RoadFundamentals
UsingInRoads
InRoadsV8i(SELECTseries2)withMicroStation
PowerInRoadsV8i(SELECTseries2)
BentleyInstituteCourseGuide
TRN0147401/0006
Trademarks
AccuDraw,Bentley,theBBentleylogo,MDL,MicroStationandSmartLineareregistered
trademarks;PopSetandRasterManageraretrademarks;BentleySELECTisaservicemarkof
BentleySystems,IncorporatedorBentleySoftware,Inc.
AutoCADisaregisteredtrademarkofAutodesk,Inc.
Allotherbrandsandproductnamesarethetrademarksoftheirrespectiveowners.
Patents
UnitedStatesPatentNos.5,8.15,415and5,784,068and6,199,125.
Copyrights
20002011BentleySystems,Incorporated.
MicroStation1998BentleySystems,Incorporated.
Allrightsreserved.
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TableofContents
Introduction
CourseExercises __________________________________ 14
DocumentConventions ____________________________ 17
ATourofInRoads
Objectives _______________________________________ 20
InRoadsProducts _________________________________ 21
InRoads:AnAssortmentofTools _____________________ 23
WhatCanyouAccomplishwithInRoads? ______________ 24
AdditionalInformation _____________________________ 25
StartingInRoads __________________________________ 26
ExerciseStartInRoads ____________________________ 27
CADGraphics ____________________________________ 28
TheInRoadsExplorer ______________________________ 29
ExploretheInterface ______________________________ 31
InRoadsFileTypes ________________________________ 32
ResourceFiles ____________________________________ 34
ExerciseOpenaPreferenceFile_____________________ 36
WorkflowTheBigPicture__________________________ 37
ExerciseCreateaCADFile _________________________ 39
MicroStationUnits ________________________________ 41
ProjectDefaults __________________________________ 43
ExerciseSetUpProjectDefaults ____________________ 45
ExerciseReferenceaBasemap______________________ 47
CreatingandSavingFiles ___________________________ 49
ClosingFilesandExitingInRoads _____________________ 51
ExerciseClosingFiles _____________________________ 53
IntroductiontoSurfaces
Objectives _______________________________________ 56
Surfaces ________________________________________ 58
SurfaceTriangulation ______________________________ 59
SurfaceFeatures __________________________________ 60
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
TableofContents
FeatureTypes ____________________________________ 61
UsingBreaklineFeatures ___________________________ 63
ExteriorFeatures _________________________________ 64
InteriorFeatures__________________________________ 65
PreferenceSets___________________________________ 66
TheStyleManager ________________________________ 67
TheStyleManager(Contd) _________________________ 68
TheNamedSymbologyManager _____________________ 70
ExerciseViewSurfaceCommands ___________________ 71
SurfaceProperties ________________________________ 74
ExerciseSurfaceReview ___________________________ 75
CollectingSurfaceData_____________________________ 77
ImportingSurfaceData ____________________________ 78
FeatureProperties ________________________________ 80
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 82
ReviewTask ______________________________________ 85
IntroductiontoGeometry
WhereAreWeintheBigPicture? ____________________ 90
Objectives _______________________________________ 91
WhatisaGeometryProject? ________________________ 93
GeometryProjectStructure _________________________ 94
OpeningFiles ____________________________________ 95
WhatisaHorizontalAlignment?_____________________ 96
TypesofGeometry ________________________________ 97
TypesofGraphicsThatCanBeImported_______________ 99
AlignmentIntegrity________________________________ 100
ExerciseImportAlignmentfromGraphics _____________ 101
HorizontalAlignments _____________________________ 103
ExerciseDefineStationing _________________________ 105
HorizontalAlignmentAnnotation ____________________ 107
Locate/GraphicSelectButton _______________________ 109
ExerciseViewHorizontalAnnotation_________________ 110
GeometryViewOptions ____________________________ 112
ExerciseCreateAnotherAlignmentwithaDifferentStyle 114
TheProjectFile ___________________________________ 117
ExerciseCreateaProjectFile _______________________ 119
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 120
ReviewTask _____________________________________ 123
MeadowParkDriveAlignment _____________________ 126
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TableofContents
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
Objectives _______________________________________ 128
HorizontalCurveSet_______________________________ 130
ProductivityTips __________________________________ 132
ExerciseCreateAlignmentwithPrecision _____________ 134
ReviewPracticeAlignment__________________________ 137
HorizontalCurves _________________________________ 138
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurves ___________________ 140
DesignCriteria ___________________________________ 142
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurvesBasedon
DesignCriteria ___________________________________ 143
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 145
ReviewTask _____________________________________ 148
MeadowParkDriveKnownAlignmentPoints __________ 152
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment_____ 153
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Objectives _______________________________________ 156
HorizontalElements _______________________________ 158
ProductivityTips __________________________________ 161
FixedHorizontalElements __________________________ 162
ElementManipulation _____________________________ 164
ExerciseCreateNewGeometry _____________________ 166
FloatingHorizontalElements ________________________ 167
FreeHorizontalElements ___________________________ 169
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingHorizontalElements ___ 170
PrecisionInput ___________________________________ 173
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingPrecisionKeyins_______ 174
CheckIntegrity ___________________________________ 177
ExerciseCheckAlignmentIntegrity __________________ 178
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 179
ReviewTask _____________________________________ 182
HorizontalAlignmentDetail _________________________ 186
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment_____ 187
ProfilesandCrossSections
Objectives _______________________________________ 190
Profiles _________________________________________ 192
CreateProfile ____________________________________ 193
ExerciseCreateExistingGroundProfile_______________ 195
CrossSections ____________________________________ 197
CreateCrossSection_______________________________ 198
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
TableofContents
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
RoadwayDesignerOverview
Objectives _______________________________________ 270
Templates _______________________________________ 272
ApplyingTemplates _______________________________ 273
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TableofContents
TemplatesSurfaceModels_________________________ 274
CreateTemplateDialog ____________________________ 275
TemplateNames__________________________________ 276
CurrentTemplateWindow__________________________ 277
TemplatePreviewWindow _________________________ 278
DynamicSettings _________________________________ 279
Components _____________________________________ 280
MergingComponents______________________________ 282
BasicTemplateCreationWorkflow ___________________ 283
ExerciseCreatingaTemplatefromComponents _______ 284
RoadwayDesigner ________________________________ 287
RoadwayDesignerDialog___________________________ 288
RoadwayDesignerPlanViewWindow _______________ 289
RoadwayDesignerProfileViewWindow______________ 290
RoadwayDesignerCrossSectionViewWindow ________ 291
RoadwayDesignerFundamentals ____________________ 292
BasicRoadwayDesignerWorkflow ___________________ 294
ExerciseCreateaRoadwayDesign___________________ 296
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 298
Templates
WhereareweintheBigPicture?_____________________ 302
Objectives _______________________________________ 303
ConstraintsonTemplatePoints ______________________ 305
VisualIndicatorsforParentChildRelationship __________ 308
VisualIndicatorsforCommonConstraints _____________ 310
ExerciseObserveTemplateConstraintsBehavior _______ 312
AddingandDeletingConstraintsGraphically____________ 315
ExerciseAddingandDeletingConstraints _____________ 316
TheSignoftheDistanceandSlope ___________________ 318
SimpleComponent ________________________________ 319
ExerciseCreatingaTemplateofSimpleComponents ____ 321
TemplatePointNames _____________________________ 323
ExerciseEditingTemplatePointNames_______________ 325
ConstrainedandUnconstrainedComponents___________ 327
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent____________ 329
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent(Continued)__ 330
BasicComponentCreationWorkflow _________________ 333
CreatingEndConditions ____________________________ 334
EndConditionsSettings ____________________________ 336
ExerciseCreatingEndConditions____________________ 338
ExerciseAddingaDitchEndComponent ______________ 342
TestingtheEndConditions__________________________ 345
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
TableofContents
TemplateTransitioning
TemplatePointControls
Objectives _______________________________________ 384
TemplatePointControls____________________________ 386
PointControlCommands ___________________________ 387
ExerciseAssignHorizontalControl __________________ 388
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 390
ReviewTask _____________________________________ 393
ProjectDetails____________________________________ 396
Superelevation
Objectives _______________________________________ 398
SuperelevationTerminology ________________________ 400
SuperelevationTerminology ________________________ 401
SuperelevationTerminology ________________________ 402
SuperelevationTerminology ________________________ 403
CreatingSuperelevation ____________________________ 404
SuperelevationWizard _____________________________ 405
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TableofContents
DesignChanges
Objectives _______________________________________ 442
TemplateLibrarySynchronization ____________________ 444
TemplateDropIndicators___________________________ 445
SynchronizewithLibraryButton _____________________ 446
ExerciseSynchronizingtheRoadwayDesignFile________ 447
TemplateRevisionsintheRoadwayDesigner __________ 450
ExerciseRevisingaTemplate _______________________ 451
EndConditionExceptions___________________________ 454
ExerciseEndConditionExceptions __________________ 455
ParametricConstraints_____________________________ 457
ExerciseUsingaParametricConstraint _______________ 458
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 461
ReviewTask _____________________________________ 464
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
WhereAreWeintheBigPicture? ____________________ 468
Objectives _______________________________________ 469
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
TableofContents
IntroductiontoVolumes
IntroductiontoReports
Objectives _______________________________________ 510
WhatisXMLandXSL? _____________________________ 512
InRoadsXMLReportProcess ________________________ 513
QuickReports ____________________________________ 514
ExerciseReviewingHorizontalGeometry _____________ 515
ExerciseReviewaSurface _________________________ 517
XMLReports _____________________________________ 518
OtherXMLReports ________________________________ 519
ExerciseCreateGeometryReport ___________________ 520
ExerciseTryAnotherFormat _______________________ 522
SavingaReportforPrinting _________________________ 523
SavingtheXML ___________________________________ 525
ExerciseChangingtheFormatOptions _______________ 526
ExerciseStationBaseReport _______________________ 527
VolumeandTemplateReports_______________________ 529
SummaryandReview ______________________________ 530
ReviewTask _____________________________________ 533
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
10
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TableofContents
ProductivityTools
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
11
RoadFundamentalsUsingInRoads
12
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Introduction
WelcometotheRoadFundamentalsUsingInRoadswithMicroStationcourse.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Introduction
13
CourseExercises
CourseExercises
Theclassismadeupofmultiplemoduleseachofwhichincludestwotypesof
learningactivities;PracticeExercisesandReviewTasks.
Thenarrative/lectureportionofeachmoduleintroducesnewconceptsandtools.
Throughoutthenarrative/lectureportionyouwillfindstepbystepPractice
Exercisestogiveyouguidedhandsonexperiencewiththeconcepts.
AttheendofmostmodulesyouwillalsofindaReviewTask.
Theintentofthetrainingmaterialisexclusivelytocreateanoptimallearning
opportunityforthosewhohaveneverworkedwiththesoftwareorforthosewho
maynothaveworkedwiththesoftwareforalongperiodoftime.
AllfilesusedinthiscoursearelocatedintheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\folder.Thefilesforthepracticeandtaskexercisesarelocatedin
the\{ChapterTitle}\Practice\and\{ChapterTitle}\Task\folders.Filesusedby
multiplemodulesarelocatedinthe_Standardsand_CommonReferencesub
folders.
Introduction
14
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CourseExercises
PracticeExercises
ThePracticeExercisesforeachchapterareindependentofoneanotherandcan
beusedwithouthavingtocompletetheexercisesinpreviouschapters.Most
PracticeExercisesuseaProjectfile(*.rwk).Whenyouloadtheprojectfile,all
othersupportingfilessuchasthefieldbook,surfaces,geometrydatabases,etc.
areloaded.
ThePracticeExercisesarepreparedusingstandardcivilengineeringpracticesbut
donotreflectnorcomplywithanyknownstateorlocaldesignstandard.Review
Tasks
ReviewTasks
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconceptstaught
inthisandpreviousmodulesandtoprovideyouaselfevaluationofhowwellyou
understandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystepinstructions.
Insteadtheyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgetosolveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforcethe
conceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybeabletodo
thisduringclassoryoucancontinueyourstudiesaftertheconclusionoftheclass.
Completionofreviewtasksisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.
InRoadsorPowerInRoads
ThiscourseisdesignedtoworkwithbothInRoadsandPowerInRoads.Allcivil
designtoolsareavailableinbothInRoadsandPowerInRoads.InRoadsisan
applicationthatrunsontopofeitherMicroStationorAutoCADsoftware.Power
InRoadsisastandaloneapplicationthatincludesboththeInRoadsandthe
MicroStationcapabilities.
ThemajordifferenceinInRoadsandPowerInRoadsishowtheyareaccessed.
InRoadsisaccessedviaanInRoadsdesktopicon(ortheStartmenu)which
activatesbothMicroStationandInRoadsatthesametime.Alternativelyyoucan
accesstheMicroStationdesktopicon(ortheStartmenu)andthenactivate
InRoadsusingtheApplicationsmenu.PowerInRoadsisaccessedfromitsown
desktopicon(ortheStartmenu)whichactivatesbothMicroStationandPower
InRoadsatthesametime.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Introduction
15
CourseExercises
InRoadstoolsareaccessiblefromtheInRoadsexplorerorpulldownmenusby
selectingApplications>InRoadsGroup>....InPowerInRoadsthesametoolsare
availablefromtheInRoadsexplorerorpulldownmenusundertherespective
groups(i.e.Survey,Surface,etc.).
MetricorImperial
WherethereisadifferencerequiredfortheImperialandMetricdatasetsthe
Metricinstructionsareshowninsquarebrackets[].
Forexample,enterthepavementwidthof12feet[3.6Meters].
Introduction
16
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DocumentConventions
DocumentConventions
Styleconventionsusedthroughoutthecourseguideareshowninthefollowing
table.
Item
Convention
Example
Bold,names
Menunames separated
File>Open
and
with>
File>Compress>Design
commands
symbol
Dialogbox
actions
Dialogbox
fieldnames
Keyins
Filenames
Filepath
Bold
ClickApply.
ClicktheGraphicSelectbuttontotherightof
theHorizontalAlignmentIncludebox.
IntheSegmentTypelist,clickLines.
Italic
EnterHemfieldRoadintheAlignmentName
box.
ClicktheGraphicSelectbuttontotherightof
theHorizontalAlignmentIncludefield.
IntheSegmentTypelist,clickLines.
Bold
EnterHemfieldRoadintheAlignmentName
field.
Italic
OpenthefileWorkingGraphics.dgninthe
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Intro
toGeometry\Practice\folder.
Nonitalic
OpenthefileWorkingGraphics.dgninthe
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Intro
toGeometry\Practice\folder.
Newtermsor
emphasis
Italic
Thetemplatelibrarycontainstemplates,which
representtypicalsectionsoftheproposed
roadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Introduction
17
DocumentConventions
Introduction
18
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
Inthischapter,wewilllearnabouttheInRoadsfamilyofproductsandnavigate
theInRoadsExplorertogether.WewillalsolearnhowtosetupanInRoads
project.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
19
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
ATourofInRoads
20
LearnwhatyoucandowiththeInRoadsproducts.
LearnhowtostartandexitInRoads.
LearnhowtonavigateandusetheInRoadsinterface.
LearntheInRoadsfiletypes.
LearnhowtosetupanInRoadsproject.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
InRoadsProducts
InRoadsProducts
TheInRoadsfamilyofcivilsolutionsprovidescivilengineeringtoolsthatfacilitate
workflow,andinterfaceswithbothMicroStationandAutoCAD.
InRoads
InRoadsprovidescivilengineeringtoolsforroadandcorridordesign.Examplesof
theInRoadsdesignfunctionalityinclude:roadandsitemodelingcapabilities,
alignmenttools,typicalsections,superelevation,andvolumecomputation.
InRoadsincludesallofthefunctionalitydeliveredinInRoadsSite.
InRoadsSite
InRoadsSiteprovidessitedesigntools,digitalterrainmodeling,andcoordinate
geometrytoolsneededtogeneratecontours,profiles,crosssections,andcut
andfillvolumes.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
21
InRoadsProducts
InRoadsSurvey
InRoadsSurveyenablesyoutotransferdatafromelectronicfieldbooks(EFBs)to
theMicroStationorAutoCADenvironment,withinteractivedataediting
capabilities.Contourscanbedisplayed,surveysadjustedandresultsvisually
verified.
InRoadsBridge
InRoadsBridgeprovidestoolstolayoutsimpleandcomplexbridgegeometry
basedontheexistinggroundconditions.InRoadsBridgealsohasinteractivetools
tocreateprecise3Dgeometricmodelsfromwhichdrawingsandreportscanbe
created.
InRoadsStorm&Sanitary
InRoadsStorm&Sanitaryoffers3Dmodeling,designandanalysis,drawing
production,anddatamanagementcapabilitiesforstormandsanitarydrainage
networks.
BentleyRailTrack
BentleyRailTrackprovidesanindustryspecificsetofraildesign,maintenance,
andmanufacturingtools.BentleyRailTrackalsoprovidestoolsforgeometry,site
andtrackdesign,railmanufacturing,reporting,viewing,andannotation.Bentley
RailTrackalsoincludesallthefunctionalitydeliveredinInRoads.
ATourofInRoads
22
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
InRoads:AnAssortmentofTools
InRoads:AnAssortmentofTools
ThinkofInRoadsasatoolboxcontaininganassortmentoftools.Eachtoolhasa
specificuse.Whentheindividualtoolsarecombinedandusedinaspecificorder,
itscalledaworkflow.Workflowsareusedtoaccomplishspecificprojectoriented
tasks.AnexampleofaworkflowisCreatingaHorizontalAlignment.Workflows
canbeusedonsimpleandcomplexprojects.
Inthiscourse,wewilllearnaboutworkflowsthataccomplishcommontasks.We
willalsolearnaboutthetoolsusedintheseworkflows.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
23
WhatCanyouAccomplishwithInRoads?
WhatCanyouAccomplishwithInRoads?
InRoadsprovidesthefunctionalitytoaccomplishavarietyofprojectsthat
include:
ATourofInRoads
24
Roadandcorridordesign
Roadwidening
Roadresurfacing
Landfilldesign
Sitedesign
Residentialandcommerciallanddevelopment
Rightofwayandpropertylayout
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
AdditionalInformation
AdditionalInformation
AllInRoadsproductshaveabuiltinHelpsystem.ClickHelpinanyInRoadsdialog
boxtoaccessthehelpsystemfortheactivetool.Thehelpsystemisalsoavailable
byselectingHelp>ContentsfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheBeCommunitieswebsiteisthedestinationfortheworldsinfrastructure
communitymemberstoconnect,communicate,andlearnfromeachother.This
professionalnetworkingisdonethroughavarietyofmeans,including:
Forumsforexchangingideasanddiscussingawiderangeoftechnical
subjects.
WikiafreeformresourcewithintheBeCommunitiesforcreating
andmaintainingreferencecontent.
Blogsonlinejournalsforcommunitiesandindividualstopublish
commentary,opinions,andideas.
ResourceGalleriesaplacetoshareandexchangeimagesandfiles
withcommunitymembers.
ToaccesstheBeCommunities,visitwww.bentley.com.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
25
StartingInRoads
StartingInRoads
LaunchInRoadsorPowerInroadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentleymenu
choices.
or
DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsShortcutcreatedonyourdesktop.
or
1 StartMicroStation.
2 SelectApplications>InRoadsGroup>ActivateInRoads.
ATourofInRoads
26
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseStartInRoads
ExerciseStartInRoads
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 Setthedirectoryto
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\ATourofInRoads\Practice\
2 SelectthefileStartingInRoads.dgn,thenclickOpen.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
27
CADGraphics
CADGraphics
InRoadsusesCADfilestodisplayCADgraphics.TheCADfileusedbyInRoadsis
referredtoastheWorkingfile.Thisfilecanbeascratchfileoritcanbeafinal
plansheetfile.MostofthegraphicsdisplayedintheCADfilebyInRoadsare
recognizedbyInRoadscommands.YoucaninteractwithInRoadsgraphicsusing
theInRoadstools.
ATourofInRoads
28
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TheInRoadsExplorer
TheInRoadsExplorer
InRoadsExplorer
TheInRoadsExplorerisdividedintofourmajorparts:
MenuBarTheMenuBarcontainsmenusforallofthetoolsavailableforthe
activeInRoadsmodules.SincetheInRoadssuiteiscomposedofdifferent
modules,themenusdisplayedwillvarydependingonwhichproductand
ApplicationAddinsareactive.MenusaresharedacrosstheInRoadsSuiteof
Products.
WorkspaceBarTheWorkspaceBaristhecontrolcenterforallInRoadsProject
Data.
FeedbackPaneTheFeedbackPanedisplaysdetailsaboutthedataselectedin
theWorkspaceBar.
StatusBarTheStatusBaristhelocationonthebottomleftcornerofthe
InRoadsExplorer.ItdisplaysInRoadsmessages,datareadout,anderrors.Ifthe
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
29
TheInRoadsExplorer
commandbeingusedrequiresthatsomethingbelocatedoridentifiedintheCAD
file,additionalcommandpromptswilldisplayintheMicroStationStatusBar.
OtherInRoadsExplorerItems
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
ScrollBarsWhenresizingtheInRoadsExplorer,somedatamaynotbevisible
eitherintheWorkspaceBarorFeedbackPane.ScrollBarsallowyoutoviewthis
datawithoutresizingtheInRoadsExplorer.
RightclickPopupMenusTheInRoadsExplorerenablesaccesstocommon
functionsthroughpopupMenus.Thesemenusaredisplayedbyrightclicking.
DialogBoxesWhenatoolisselectedusingatoolbutton,orfromtheInRoads
menu,acommanddialogboxcommonlydisplayssothatmoreoptionsrelatedto
thecommandcanbespecified.
ToolbarsInRoadscontainsbuiltintoolbarsthatcanbedockedintheInRoads
Explorer.Youcanalsocreatecustomtoolbars.
Show/HideExplorerTheentireInRoadsexplorercanbehiddenfromviewby
rightclickingintheMicroStationviewwindowandselectingExplorerShow/Hide.
SelectthiscommandagaintoshowtheExplorer.IftheInRoadsExplorerishidden,
InRoadscommandscanbeaccessedthroughtheMicroStationTasks.
ATourofInRoads
30
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExploretheInterface
ExploretheInterface
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
31
InRoadsFileTypes
InRoadsFileTypes
InRoadsFileTypes
TheInRoadsroaddesignprocessusesseveraldifferentfiletypes.AllInRoadsdata
isstoredinexternalfiles.TheCADfileisusedtoviewagraphicalrepresentation
ofthedesigndata,butthegraphicfilesdonotstoretheInRoadsdata.Deleting
theCADgraphicsdoesnotaffecttheInRoadsdata.Forexample,ifthegraphics
thatrepresentexistinggroundsurfacecontoursaredeleted,theInRoadsexisting
groundsurfacefileisnotmodified.
SurfaceFile(.dtm)
TheSurfacefilestoresfeaturesthataremadeupofrandompoints,breakline,and
boundarydata.TheSurfacefilealsocontainstriangledata.Thefeaturesandthe
trianglestogetherrepresentexistinggroundanddesignsurfaces.Multiplesurface
filesmaybeopenforeditingatthesametime.AlthoughmultipleSurfacescanbe
openedinInRoads,onlyoneSurfacecanbeeditedatagiventime.
ATourofInRoads
32
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
InRoadsFileTypes
GeometryProjectFile(.alg)
TheGeometryProjectFilestoresgeometricdataincludinghorizontalandvertical
alignmentsandCOGOpoints.MultipleGeometryProjectfilesmaybeloadedat
thesametime.AlthoughmultiplegeometryprojectscanbeopenedinInRoads,
onlyoneGeometryProjectfilecanbeeditedatagiventime.
TemplateLibraryFile(.itl)
TheTemplateLibraryFilestorestemplatesandtemplatecomponents.Different
componentscanbeassembledtobuildtemplates,whichdefinethetypical
sectionsofaroadway.OnlyoneTemplateLibraryfilemaybeopenforeditingata
giventime.
RoadwayDesign(.ird)
TheRoadwayDesignstoresinformationdefiningtheparametersofaroadway
design.Theseroadwaydesignparametersaredefinedusingatoolcalledthe
RoadwayDesigner.TheRoadwayDesignerisusedforcorridormanagement,
assigningtemplatedrops,creatingsuperelevation,reviewingthedesign,defining
templatetransitioningandcreatingdesignsurfaces.OnlyoneRoadwayDesignfile
maybeopenforeditingatagiventime.
ProjectFile(.rwk)
TheProjectfileprovidesaneasymethodofopeningandsavinganumberof
InRoadsdatafilesinasingleoperation.NoInRoadsdataisstoredinthisfile;itis
anASCIIfilethatliststheInRoadsdatafilestoopen.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
33
ResourceFiles
ResourceFiles
ResourceFiles
TheInRoadsPreferencefile(.xin)controlshowdatawillappearwhenitis
displayedintheCADfile.Preferencesetsstoredatarelatedsettingsanddialog
boxsettingsforlaterretrieval.Listedbelowareafewoftheparametersthatare
storedinpreferencefiles.
Howasurfacewillappearwhenviewedinplan,profileandcross
sections
Howgeometry,suchasalignmentsandpoints,willappearwhen
viewedinplanandprofile
HowProfileandCrossSectiongridspacing,textlabelsandaxis
symbologywillappear
Parametersandvaluesthathavebeenenteredandselectedindialog
boxfields,whichcanbesavedforlaterrecall
NumeroussettingsaresavedtotheInRoadsPreferencefileandprovideameans
bywhichtoimplementprojectspecificandorganizationalstandards.
ATourofInRoads
34
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ResourceFiles
PreferenceFile(.xin)
DraftingNotesFile(.dft)
TheDraftingNotesfilestoresnotedefinitionscreatedwiththevariousnote
placementtoolsfoundontheDraftingmenu.
StyleSheetsFile(.xsl)
TheStyleSheetsfileisusedtoformataraw.xmlfiletocreateafinished
report.
ThePreferencefilestoresthepreferencesaccessibleoneachdialogbox,Style
definitions,andNamedSymbologydefinitions.StylesandNamedSymbology
definitionscontrolthedisplayofSurfacesandGeometryelements.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
35
ExerciseOpenaPreferenceFile
ExerciseOpenaPreferenceFile
OpenthePreferenceFile
WhenInRoadsstarts,apreferencefileisopenedautomatically.The
defaultpreferencefileisnamedCivil.xinandislocatedintheC:\Program
Files\Bentley\InRoadsGroup*\Data\folder,where*representsthe
versionofsoftware.
LocatethetrainingspecificpreferencefileintheBentleyTrainingfolder:
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
2 BrowsetothepathC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\.
3 SelectthePreferencefileBentleyTraining.xin.
4 ClickOpen.
AmessagestatingthattheBentleyTraining.xinfileisopenappearsinthe
StatusBaratthebottomoftheInRoadsExplorer.
Note:theOpendialogremainsopenafteryouopenafile.
5 ClickCanceltoclosetheOpendialog.
ATourofInRoads
36
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
WorkflowTheBigPicture
WorkflowTheBigPicture
Workflow
InRoadsdoesnotforcetheuserintoalinearworkflow.Itisapowerfultoolthat
canbeusedtodoawidevarietyofcomplextasks,suchasacloverleaf
interchangedesign,sitedesignorstakingreports.Sinceworkflowscanvary
widelydependingonthescopeoftheproject,itisdifficulttodescribethe
InRoadsworkflow.Itishowever,reasonabletosaythatmostprojectsfollowthe
generalworkflowasshownhere.
ProjectSetup
SetupoftheCADfilesisusuallythestartingpointofaproject.Concurrently,a
fieldsurveyalsotakesplacetogatherexistinginformation.Theinformationthat
thesurveyortypicallysuppliescancomeinmanyformats,includingrawdata,
graphicsorASCIItext.InRoadsisflexibleenoughtohandleavarietyofformats.
Thesurfaceisthenevaluatedusingavarietyofmethods,suchascrosssections,
profiles,andcontourdisplay.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
37
WorkflowTheBigPicture
CreateGeometries
Oncethesurfaceisdeemedacceptable,thedesignerbeginscreatinggeometry.
InRoadsprovidesawidevarietyoftoolsforgeometrycreationthatcanbeusedin
anyworkflow.Therearemanydifferentwaystocreategeometryandthesteps
involvedmayvarydependingontheprojectscope.However,geometrycreation
typicallyinvolvescreatinghorizontalgeometry,creatingexistinggroundprofiles
andcrosssections,andcreatingverticalgeometries.
DesignRoadwayCorridor
Oncethegeometriesarecomplete,thedesignerwilltypicallycreatenew
templatesoruseexistingstandardtemplates.Thesetemplatesarethenusedto
designacorridormodelandgenerateaproposedsurface.
EvaluateResults
Onceacorridorisdesignedandprocessed,thedesignercanuseavarietyoftools
toevaluateandedittheresultsofthedesign.Reportscanbecreatedfor
importantdatasuchasgeometry,crosssections,andvolumes.Inaddition,more
specializedreportssuchasgradebooks,surveystakeout,slopestake,andlegal
descriptionreportscanbecreated.InRoadsreportscanbetraditionalhardcopy
reportsorelectronicdatasuchasautomatedmachinecontrolgrading.
ATourofInRoads
38
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaCADFile
ExerciseCreateaCADFile
CreateaMicroStationFile
1 SelectFile>NewintheMicroStationmenu.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\ATourof
InRoads\Practice\.
3 ClickBrowse.
TheSelectSeedFiledialogappears.
4 BrowsetotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\_Standards\
folder.
5 SelecttheBentley_Training_seed.dgnfile.
6 ClickOpen.
TheSelectSeedFiledialogdisappears,andtheselectedseedfileisshown
atthebottomoftheNewdialog.
7 EnterPracticeWorkingFile.dgnintheFilesfield.
8 ClickSave.
Thefilethatwasjustcreatedisopened,asseeninthetitlebarofthe
MicroStationwindow.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
39
ExerciseCreateaCADFile
VerifyMicroStationWorkingUnits
1 SelectSettings>DesignFilefromtheMicroStationmenu.
2 IntheDGNFileSettingsdialog,selecttheWorkingUnitscategory.
EnsurethatMasterUnitissettoUSSurveyFeet[Meters]
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
3 ClickOKtoclosetheDGNFileSettingsdialog.
ReviewtheInRoadsWorkspaceBarTabs
Note:TheInRoadsWorkspaceBartabsarelocatedatthebottomofthe
InRoadsWorkspace.Afewofthetabsarevisible,andyoucanviewthe
othersbyusingthearrowkeystoscrollleftandright.
1 SelecttheSurfacestabfromtheInRoadsWorkspaceBar.
NoticethattheDefaulticonisoutlinedinred,indicatingthatitisthe
activefiletheonethatisaffectedbyanyactionswetakeinInRoads.
2 SelecttheGeometrytabfromtheInRoadsWorkspaceBar.
NoticethattheDefaultGeometryProjectisactive.
3 SelectthePreferencetabfromtheInRoadsWorkspaceBar.
Noticethatthepreferencefileremainsopened,asindicatedintheStatus
Bar.InRoadsfilesremainopenevenwhencreatingnewCADfilesor
switchingbetweenCADfiles.
ATourofInRoads
40
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
MicroStationUnits
MicroStationUnits
MicroStationUnitsandtheSurveyFoot
ItisimportantthatyounotethetwodifferentlengthsofafootintheUnited
States,andMicroStationV8mustbesetupcorrectlyoryoumaynotbedrawing
whatyouthinkyouaredrawing.
MicroStationstoresalldatainternallyinmeters.Themeteristheofficialbaseunit
ofmeasurethroughouttheworld.Eventhoughfeetandinchesarethedominant
unitsofmeasureintheUnitedStates,theyarelegallydefinedbasedonthemeter.
MicroStationusestheworkingunitdefinitiontoconvertcoordinatesand
distancestoandfrommeters.Therefore,whentheworkingunitsaresettofeet
andinches,MicroStationstillstoresthecoordinatesinmetersandconvertsto
feetandinchestodisplaycoordinates,distances,measurements,dimensions,etc.
BecauseMicroStationV8convertsallvaluesfromfeet(oranyotherunit)to
meterstostorethedata,itiscriticalthatyouunderstandtheconversionprocess
andthedesiredfootmeasurement.Ifnot,yourdatamaynotbecorrect.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
41
MicroStationUnits
ThereisadifferencebetweenafootandaSurveyfoot.Thefollowingdefinitionis
takenfromthe1991editionofASTMpublicationE38089a(StandardPracticefor
UseofInternationalSystemofUnits).
TheU.S.MetricLawof1866gavetherelationship,1metreequals39.37
inches.Since1893theU.S.yardhasbeenderivedfromthemetre.In1959a
refinementwasmadeinthedefinitionoftheyardtobringtheU.S.yardand
theyardusedinothercountriesintoagreement.TheU.S.yardwaschanged
from3600/3937mto0.9144mexactly.Thenewlengthisshorterbyexactly
twopartsinamillion.
Atthesametimeitwasdecidedthatanydatainfeetderivedfromand
publishedasaresultofgeodeticsurveyswithintheU.S.wouldremainwith
theoldstandard(1ft=1200/3937m)untilfurtherdecision.Thisfootisnamed
theU.S.surveyfoot.
Thereforethefollowingdefinitionsareinexistencetoday:
1foot=.3048000m
1surveyfoot=1200/3937m.3048006m
ThefootinMicroStationsstandardunitlistisbasedonthefootdefinition,notthe
surveyfootdefinition.Thisisthecorrectdefinitionformostworkoutsideofthe
civilengineeringandsurveyingdisciplines.If,however,thedataisbasedon
geodeticsurveymeasurements,usingthestandardunitdefinitioninMicroStation
mayyieldincorrectresults.MostsurveydocumentationintheUSisbasedonthe
surveyfoot.However,itisimportanttocheckwithyoursurveyororlocal
authoritiesbecausesomedataisbasedonthefootdefinition.
Howmuchdifferencereallyexistsbetweenafootandasurveyfoot?Itdepends
onwhatyouaremeasuring.Asyoucanseebelow,largenumberssuchas
engineerstypicallyworkwithwhenusingStatePlaneCoordinatescanhave
significanterrorifthewrongfootdefinitionisused.
Shortdistances<1000feet
USSurveyFoot=InternationalFoot(measured1/100ofafoot)
At100,000feet
Definitionsresultinadifferenceofabout.2feet
At1,000,000feet(ApproximatesizeofmanyStatePlaneCoordinates)
Definitionsresultinadifferenceofabout2feet
ATourofInRoads
42
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProjectDefaults
ProjectDefaults
ProjectDefaults
ProjectDefaultsdefinethedefaultlocationforopeningandsavingInRoadsdata
filesrelatedtoaproject,aswellastheprojectpreferencefilesthatareloaded
whenInRoadsisactivated.TheProjectDefaultsarestoredlocallyintheWindows
registry.
TosetuptheProjectDefaults,selecttheFile>ProjectDefaultscommandinthe
InRoadsmenu.TheSetProjectDefaultsdialogboxisdividedintotwoprimary
sections:DefaultPreferencesandDefaultDirectoryPaths.
DefaultPreferencesInRoadspreferencefilesthatareloadedwhenaProject
DefaultsConfigurationNameisselected.
DefaultDirectoryPathsthefolderlocationswherethesetypesofInRoads
filesarelocated.Thespecificfilestobeloadedforaprojectareidentified
usingaProjectfile(.rwk).
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
43
ProjectDefaults
MultipleProjectDefaultconfigurationscanbecreatedandsavedunderdifferent
names.Thepathforallfiletypescanbesettothesamelocation,orseparate
pathscanbesetforeachfiletype.
TocreateanewConfigurationNameormodifyanexistingone,clickApply.This
actionwritestheinformationtotheregistryofthecomputerthatyouare
currentlyusing.
ToactivateadifferentConfigurationName,selectitandclickClose.
ATourofInRoads
44
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseSetUpProjectDefaults
ExerciseSetUpProjectDefaults
InRoadsFilesWhichOpenAutomatically
WhenInRoadsstarts,aPreferencefileisneededtospecifythesettings
andparametersofeachdialogbox.ThePreferencefileisopenedas
specifiedintheProjectDefaults,ifconfigured.IftheProjectDefaultsare
notconfigured,InRoadswillopenapreferencefilewhichislocatedinthe
productfolders.
InRoadsalsocreatesaDefaultSurfaceandDefaultGeometryProject.
TheDefaultSurfaceandGeometryProjectareemptyandcanbeused
forscratchwork,butarenormallynotsavedduringatypicalInRoads
workflow.
SetUpProjectDefaults
Inthisexercise,youwillcreateaProjectDefaultconfigurationnamed
RoadFundamentalsandassigntoitthedefaultfolderlocationsforFile>
OpenandFileSavecommands.
1 FromtheInRoadsmenu,selectFile>ProjectDefaults.
TheProjectDefaultsdialogappears.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
45
ExerciseSetUpProjectDefaults
2 ClickNew.
3 EnterRoadFundamentalsintheNewConfigurationdialogandclickOK.
TheSetProjectDefaultsdialogupdateswiththenewConfigurationName.
4 ClickinthePreferences(*.xin)fieldandclickBrowse.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
5 BrowsetotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\_Standards\
folder,andselecttheBentleyTraining.xinfile.
6 ClickOpen.
7 ClickintheProjects(*.rwk)fieldandclickBrowse.
8 BrowsetotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\folder,and
openit.
9 ClickOpen.
TheProjects(*.rwk)fieldupdateswiththeC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\folder.
10 Repeatthisproceduretocompletethefollowingfields:
Surfaces(*.dtm):
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\
GeometryProject(*.alg):
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\
TemplateLibraries(*.itl):
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\
RoadwayDesign(*.ird):
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\
11 VerifythattheProjectDefaultDirectoryfieldisblank.Deleteanytextthat
isinthisfield.
ThissettingMUSTbeblankorthe.rwkfilesusedinthistrainingdataset
willnotloadproperly.
12 ClickApply,thenclickClose.
InRoadswillusethisProjectDefaultdefinitionuntilitischanged.The
specifiedpreferencefileisautomaticallyopenedwhenInRoadsis
activated.ThefolderlocationsbecomethedefaultswhenusingtheFile>
OpenandFile>SaveAscommands.
ATourofInRoads
46
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseReferenceaBasemap
ExerciseReferenceaBasemap
ReferencingaSurveyDataBasemap
Agraphicdrawingorbasemapofthesurveyareaiscommonlyprovided
forthedesignertouseasabackdropduringthedesignprocess.Using
MicroStation,thebasemapwillbereferencedtotheworkingfile.By
referencingthebasemap,alloftheinformationinthebasemapisvisible;
however,itcannotbemodified.
AttachaReferenceFile
1 FromtheMicroStationmenu,selectFile>References.
TheReferencesdialogappears.
2 SelectTools>Attach.
3 BrowsetothefolderC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\ATourof
InRoads\Practice\.
4 SelectthePractice_Existing.dgnfile,andclickOK.
TheReferenceAttachmentSettingsdialogappears.
5 SelectCoincidentWorldintheOrientationlist.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
47
ExerciseReferenceaBasemap
6 ClickOktoattachthereference.
TheReferencedialogappears.ItdisplaysthePracticeExisting.dgnfile,
withitsattachmentmethodsettoCoincidentWorld.
7 ClosetheReferencesdialog.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
YouwillnowviewtheattachedreferencefileintheMicroStationwindow.
8 SelecttheFitViewiconintheMicroStationViewwindowtoolbar.Exit
MicroStationandInRoadsbyclickingontheClosebuttonatthetopright
oftheMicroStationscreen.
9 FromtheMicroStationmenuselectFile>SaveSettings.
Thenexttimethefileisopened,theviewwillbesettoseethereference
file.
ATourofInRoads
48
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingandSavingFiles
CreatingandSavingFiles
CreatingNewFiles
NewInRoadsfilescanbecreatedbyselectingFile>NewfromtheInRoadsmenu.
IntheNewdialogbox,usethetabstoselectthedatatypetocreate.Next,enter
thedesiredName,completetheotherparameters,andselectApply.Thedata
appearsintheWorkspaceBaroftheInRoadsExplorer(afteryouselectthe
appropriatetab).
WhenusingtheFile>Newcommand,thenewdataisstoredinvirtualmemory
(loaded)inInRoads.
ThedatacreationtoolsdonotstoretheInRoadsdatatothecomputerharddrive;
thefilesonlyexistinvirtual(ortemporary)memory.Unlesssavedtodisk,thenew
InRoadsdatawillbelostwhenInRoadsisclosed.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
49
CreatingandSavingFiles
SavingFiles
WhenanInRoadsdatafileiscreatedorloadedfromdisk,itresidesinvirtual
memory.Editingthisdatadoesnotsaveittotheharddrive.Thedataisheldin
memoryuntilacommandisexecutedtosavethedatatodisk.Youmustusethe
Savecommandstoperiodicallysaveyourwork.IffilesareclosedorInRoadsis
exitedbeforesaving,apromptwillappearaskingifyouwishtosavethefile
beforeexiting.
InRoadsallowsyoutosavesurfacesandGeometryProjectsusingadifferent
internalnamethantheexternalname(orFilename).
Theinternalfilenameisthenamegiventoadatatypewhenitiscreated
usingtheFile>Newcommand.Thisisalsothenamethatappearsinthe
InRoadsdialogboxes.
Theexternalfilenameisthenamegiventothedatatypewhenitissavedon
thediskusingtheFile>Savecommand.Theexternalfileshavetheextensions
.algand.dtm.
Forexample,youcancreateasurfaceusingtheFile>Newcommandandnameit
ExistingGround.WhenyousavethatsurfaceusingtheFile>Save>Surface
command,youcansaveittoafilenamedSR1045_Existing.dtm.Whenyouopen
thefileSR1045_Existing.dtm,allreferencestothatsurfaceintheInRoadsdialog
boxeswouldbeExistingGround.
Itishighlyrecommendedthatyoukeeptheinternalandexternalnamesthe
same.
InRoadsautomaticallyusestheSaveAsfunctionalitywhensavingInRoads
datathathasnotbeenpreviouslysaved,evenwhenusingtheFile>Save
command.However,youcanoptionallyusetheFile>SaveAscommandifyou
choose.TheFile>Savecommandsavestheactivesurface,geometry,etc.To
savenonactivedatayoushouldusetheSaveAscommand,whichallowsyou
toselectthedatayouwanttosave.
ATourofInRoads
50
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ClosingFilesandExitingInRoads
ClosingFilesandExitingInRoads
ClosingFiles
AfilecanberemovedfromInRoadsvirtualmemorybyselectingFile>Closefrom
theInRoadsexplorermenu.Ifthefilehasbeenpreviouslysavedtodisk,the
InRoadsdataispreservedinthediskfile.IftheInRoadsdatahasnotbeensaved
todisk,thedataislost.EachInRoadsdatafilecanbeclosedseparatelyorallthe
InRoadsdatafilescanbeclosedatonetimebyselectingFile>Close>All.
ExitingInRoads
ToexitInRoads,selectFile>ExitfromtheInRoadsExplorer.Ifdatathatis
currentlyloadedinInRoadshasnotbeensavedtodisk,analertappearsaskingif
thedatashouldbesaved.ClickYestosaveonlytheInRoadsdatashowninthe
alert.ClickYestoAlltosaveallcurrentlyloadedInRoadsdata.Ifthefilehasnot
beenpreviouslysavedtodisk,theSaveAsdialogboxappearssothatyoucan
specifythefilenameandfolder.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
51
ClosingFilesandExitingInRoads
NOTE:IfyouareusingPowerInRoads,youcannotexitInRoadswhileleaving
MicroStationopen.ClosebothapplicationsatthesametimebyclickingtheClose
buttonontheupperrightoftheMicroStationscreen.
ATourofInRoads
52
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseClosingFiles
ExerciseClosingFiles
CloseAllFiles
1 SelectFile>Close>CloseAllfromtheInRoadsmenu.
Analertboxopens.
2 ClickYestocloseallthefiles.
3 SelectFile>ExitfromtheCADfilemenu.
TheCADfilecloses.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ATourofInRoads
53
ExerciseClosingFiles
ATourofInRoads
54
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
Inthischapter,wewilllearnaboutthebasicconceptsofSurfaces.Wewilldisplay
thesurfacecontours,trianglesandfeaturesofaSurface.Wewillalsolearnabout
thepropertiesofaSurface.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
55
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
IntroductiontoSurfaces
56
Learnaboutsurfacesandthetypesofdatathatdefinesasurface.
Displaysurfacecontours,featuresandtriangles.
Learnaboutthesurfaceproperties.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Surfaces\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileViewSurface.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenthePreferenceFile
1 SelectthePreferencestabintheInRoadsExplorer.
2 VerifythatthepreferencefileBentleyTraining.xinisintheC:\Bentley
Training\InRoadsFundamentals\_Standards\folder.
Thepreferencefileshouldbeautomaticallyopenedfromtheproject
defaultspreviouslysetup.Ifthefileisopened,skiptothenexttopic
(Surfaces).
Ifthefileisnotloaded,completethefollowingsteps.
3 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
4 ChangetheFilesoftypetoPreferences(*.xin).
5 Browsetothe
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\_Standards\folder.
6 SelectthefileBentleyTraining.xinandclickOpen.
7 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
57
Surfaces
Surfaces
Surfaces
Asurfaceisarepresentationofthephysicalterrain.Surfacepointsareconnected
togethertoformsurfacetriangles.Thisprocessisknownastriangulation.
ThetermssurfaceandDigitalTerrainModel(DTM)canbeusedinterchangeably.
Bothtermsrefertoatriangulatedmodelrepresentingaphysicalterrainsuchas
theexistinggroundorproposeddesign.
CurrentversionsofInRoadssoftwaretypicallyusethetermsurfaceinsteadof
digitalterrainmodelorDTM.However,manyothersoftwareapplicationsreferto
theirmodelsasdigitalterrainmodels.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
58
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SurfaceTriangulation
SurfaceTriangulation
SurfaceTriangulation
Tohaveknownelevationsthroughoutthesurface,thesurfacemustbe
triangulated.YoucantriangulateasurfacebyselectingSurface>Triangulate
Surface.
Thiscommandformstrianglesfromthesurfacepointsbyactivatingthe
triangulationalgorithm.Thisalgorithm,basedonDelaunay'scriteria,creates
small,triangularplanesthatdefinetheterrainsurface.
Sincethex,y,zcoordinatesofeachtriangle'sverticesareknown,theelevationof
anypointontheresultingtriangularplanecanbecomputedthrough
interpolation.
TheMaximumLengthoptionisusedtolimitthelengthoftriangles.Changingthe
maximumsegmentlengthautomaticallyremovesunwantedlongtriangles,which
spanacrossareaswheretheterraindataisunknown.Anytrianglewithaside
longerthanthemaximumsegmentlengthwillnotbecreatedinthesurface.A
maximumlengthofzeroallowsatriangleofanylengthtobecreated.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
59
SurfaceFeatures
SurfaceFeatures
Features
InRoadsusesthetermfeaturetorefertothepointsandlinesthatarecontainedin
asurface.Thefeatureswithinthesurfacedefinehoweachpointisdisplayedand
howitinfluencesthetriangulationofthesurface.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
60
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FeatureTypes
FeatureTypes
FeatureTypes
Afeatureismadeofoneormorepoints.Thefeaturetypeaffectshowthe
triangleswhichconnectthepointstogetherareformed.
Random
Randomfeatures,alsocalledspotpoints,representnonuniformlyspaced
pointsthathavenodirectrelationshiptootherpoints.Randomfeaturesare
commonlyfoundwhenthesurveyedareaconsistsofanopenfieldorgrassy
area,sincetherearenoidentifiableterrainfeatures.
Breakline
Breaklinefeaturesrepresentalineardiscontinuityinasurfacesuchasaridge,
ditch,edgeofpavement,centerline,orcurb.Thebreaklinefeaturetype
specifiesthatallpointsinthefeatureareconnectedasalinearsegment.
Whenthesurfaceistriangulated,thetrianglesareformedsothatnotriangle
legcrossesanybreaklinefeatures.Thismaintainstheintegrityoftheslope
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
61
FeatureTypes
betweenbreaklinefeaturepointsduringtriangulation,resultinginamore
accuratesurface.
Contour
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Contourfeaturesarelinearfeaturesthatcomefromcontourdata,whichis
commonlyavailablefrommappingagencies.Contourfeaturesare
triangulatedinthesamewayasbreaklinefeatures.Surfacescreatedfrom
contourdataarenormallynotasaccurateassurfacescreatedfromBreakline
andRandomfeatures.
Interior
Interiorfeaturesareclosedshapedlinearfeaturesthatrepresentavoidor
holeinthesurface.Notrianglesareformedinsidetheinteriorfeatures,and
therecanbeunlimitedinteriorfeaturesinasinglesurface.Examplesinclude:
buildingfootprints,lakes,andobscureareas.
Exterior
Exteriorfeaturesareclosedshapedlinearfeaturesthatformaboundary
aroundthesurface.Notrianglewillbeformedoutsidetheexteriorfeature.An
exteriorfeatureiscommonlyusedtopreventtrianglesfrombeingformedin
areaswherethesurveydataisnotknown.Itisalsousedtomaintaincutand
filllinesonaproposeddesign.Therecanbeonlyoneexteriorfeatureina
singlesurface.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
62
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
UsingBreaklineFeatures
UsingBreaklineFeatures
UsingBreaklineFeatures
Toproduceanaccuratesurface,itistypicallynecessarytosupplementthe
randomfeatureswithstringsorshapesofpointscollectedalonglinearbreaksin
theground.Forexample,anexistinggroundsurfacewilllikelycontainlinestrings
alongallmajorbreaksintheterrain,suchasedgesofroadway,edgesof
waterways,andsoon.
Sincebreaklinefeaturesholdthelinearrelationshipbetweenpoints,breaklines
moreaccuratelymodelthelinearfeaturesinasurface.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
63
ExteriorFeatures
ExteriorFeatures
ExteriorFeatures
Exteriorfeatures(alsocalledexteriorboundaries)areclosedshapedlinear
featuresthatformaboundaryaroundthesurface.Notriangleisformedoutside
theexteriorfeature.Anexteriorfeatureiscommonlyusedtopreventtriangles
frombeingformedinareaswherethesurveydataisnotknown.Itisalsousedto
maintaincutandfilllinesonaproposeddesign.Youcanonlyhaveoneexterior
featureinasinglesurface.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
64
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
InteriorFeatures
InteriorFeatures
InteriorFeatures
Interiorfeaturesareclosedshapedlinearfeaturesthatrepresentavoidorholein
thesurface.Notrianglesareformedinsidetheinteriorfeatures.Youcanhave
unlimitedinteriorfeaturesinasinglesurface.
Examplesinclude:buildingfootprints,lakes,andobscureareas.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
65
PreferenceSets
PreferenceSets
Preference
APreferenceisagroupofsettingsforanInRoadscommand.Thesesettingscanbe
savedandthenretrievedatalatertime.
Forexample,youcancreatetwoPreferencesetsfortheViewContourscommand,
onecalledExistingSurface,andtheothercalledFinishedSurface,wherethefirst
displayscontoursat5intervalsandtheotherat10intervals.
YoucanassignaPreferencesettotheViewContourscommandforyourcurrent
session,byloadingthePreferencesetbeforerunningthecommand.Todothat,
opentheViewCommandsdialogbox(selectSurface>ViewSurface>Contours),
clickPreferences,selectthePreferencename,andclickLoad.Oncethe
Preferencesetisopened,itremainsopenedforthatsession.
Auserdefineddefaultpreferenceset(orPreferredPreference)isopenedwhen
thedialogisfirstopened.Youcansetthepreferreddefaultpreferenceby
selectingFile>ProjectDefaultsintheInRoadsmenuandsettingthePreferred
PreferenceName.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
66
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TheStyleManager
TheStyleManager
TheStyleManager
TheStyleManagerisusedtoconfigurethewayInRoadsdisplaysgraphics.It
controlsthegraphicdisplay(symbology)ofsurfacefeatures,geometryfeatures
andsurveyfeatures.Italsocontrolswhetherthesefeaturesaredisplayedornot.
TheStyleManageriswherestylesarecreatedandedited.ToaccesstheStyle
Manager,selectTools>StyleManager.ClickNeworEdittocreatenewFeature
Stylesoreditexistingones.OnestylecanapplytoSurface,Geometry,andSurvey,
andoncetheNewStyleorEditStyledialogboxopens,youcanaccessaleaffor
eachofthosefeaturetypes.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
67
TheStyleManager(Contd)
TheStyleManager(Contd)
StyleManagerLeaves
TherearefiveleavesontheleftpaneoftheEditStyleorNewStyledialog.The
SurfaceFeatures,GeometryFeatures,andSurveyFeaturesleavesallowyouto
specifyhowafeatureistobedisplayedwhenitoccursinsurfacedata,geometry
dataorsurveydata.ThereisalsoaGeneralleafandaSymbologyleaf.
GeneralLeaf
SpecifieswhichfeaturetheStylecanbeappliedto.
SymbologyLeaf
SpecifiestheNamedSymbologyusedforthegraphicdisplay.
SurfaceFeatureLeaf
TheSurfaceFeatureleafcontrolshowsurfacefeaturesaredisplayed.The
SettingsleafoftheSurfaceFeatureleafcontrolswhetherfeaturescanbe
displayedinthePlan,Profileand/orCrossSectionView.TheSymbologyleafof
IntroductiontoSurfaces
68
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TheStyleManager(Contd)
theSurfaceFeatureleafdefineswhichNamedSymbologywillbeusedfor
displayingthefeatureinthePlan,Profileand/orCrossSectionView.
TheGeometryFeatureleafcontrolshowgeometryfeaturesaredisplayed.
GeometryhasfourleaveswhichcontrolhowPoints,Lines,ArcsandSpiralsare
displayed.
SurveyFeatureLeaf
TheSurveyFeatureleafcontrolshowsurveyfeaturesaredisplayed.
TheStyleManagerisusedinconjunctionwithSurveyCodes.Thislinkis
coveredingreaterdetailinourSurveyFundamentalsclass.
GeometryFeatureLeaf
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
69
TheNamedSymbologyManager
TheNamedSymbologyManager
NamedSymbologyManager
ANamedSymbologydefineshowapoint,line,ortextwillbedisplayedinCAD.
NamedsymbologyisusedbytheStyleManagertodefinethedisplayofgraphics,
controllingthecolor,level,weight,andlinestyleofdisplayedelements.Itcontrols
thedisplayoftext.Italsospecifieswhichcellsandsymbolswillbeusedtodisplay
points.
TheNamedSymbologyManagerisusedtocreateandeditnamedsymbologyin
InRoads.ToaccesstheNamedSymbologyManager,selectTools>Named
SymbologyManager.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
70
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseViewSurfaceCommands
ExerciseViewSurfaceCommands
Inthisexercise,youwillopenasurfaceusingtwodifferentPreferenceSets
andcomparetheresultingcontourgraphics.Youwillalsoviewthesurface
trianglesandsurfacefeatures.
OpenaSurface
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
2 OpenthesurfaceHemfieldExisting.dtmfromthe
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\_CommonReferences\folder.
TheStatusBarsaysthefileHemfieldExisting.dtmisopen.
3 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
Thedialogstaysopensoyoucaneasilyloadmultiplesurfaces,orother
typesofInRoadsdata,inasingleoperation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
71
ExerciseViewSurfaceCommands
LoadaPreferenceSetandViewtheSurfaceContours
1 SelectSurface>ViewSurface>Contours.
TheViewContoursdialogopens.
2 ClickPreferencesatthebottomofthedialog.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
3 SelecttheExistingSurfacepreference.
4 ClickLoad.
5 ClickClosetoclosethePreferencesdialog.
6 ClickApply.
Note:TheViewContoursdialogboxremainsopen.
7 SelecttheMicroStationFitViewcommand.
Noticethecontourgraphics.
ChangethePreferenceSetandViewtheSurfaceContours
1 ClickPreferencesintheViewContoursdialogbox.
2 SelecttheFinishedSurfacepreference.
3 ClickLoad.
4 ClickClosetoclosethePreferencesdialog.
5 ClickApply.
6 ClosetheViewContoursdialog.
Noticethedifferenceinthecontourgraphics.
ViewtheSurfaceTriangles
1 SelectSurface>ViewSurface>Triangles.
2 ClickPreferences.
3 SelecttheExistingSurfacePreference.
4 ClickLoad.
5 ClickClosetoclosethePreferencesdialog.
6 ClickApply.
7 ClickClosetoclosetheViewTrianglesdialog.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
72
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseViewSurfaceCommands
ViewtheSurfaceFeatures
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
2 OpenthesurfaceExistingSurvey.dtmfromtheC:\Bentley
Training\InRoadsFundamentals\_CommonReferences\folder.
3 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
4 SelectSurface>ViewSurface>Features.
5 ClickApply.
6 ClickClosetoclosetheViewFeaturesdialog.
7 SelecttheMicroStationFitViewcommand.
Noticethedisplayofthetwodifferentsurfacesyouhaveloaded.
8 SelectSurface>FitSurface.
TheviewzoomstoshowtheactivesurfacewhichiscurrentlytheExisting
Surveysurface.
ExistingSurveyisnowtheactivesurface.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
73
SurfaceProperties
SurfaceProperties
SurfaceProperties
Immediatelyafterloadingasurface,youshouldreviewthesurfacespropertiesto
quicklyverifythesurface.
ToaccesstheSurfacePropertiesdialogbox,rightclickonthenameofthesurface
intheWorkspaceBaroftheInRoadsExplorerandselectProperties.Anotherway
toaccesstheSurfacePropertiescommandistoselectSurface>Surface
Properties.
Youcanonlyreviewthepropertiesofonesurfaceatatime.Youcanchangethe
nameofthedisplayedsurfaceherebyenteringthenewnameandclickingApply.
AdvanceTab
TheadvancedtabincludespickliststodefinetheNamedSymbology
definitionfordisplayingthesurfaceoncrosssectionsandprofiles.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
74
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseSurfaceReview
ExerciseSurfaceReview
ReviewtheSurfaceProperties
1 SelectSurface>SurfaceProperties.
TheSurfacePropertiesdialogboxappears.
2 EnsurethatHemfieldExistingisshownintheSurfacefield.
TheSurfacefieldshowstheactivesurface.Selectingadifferentsurface
namesetsthatsurfaceastheactivesurface.
3 ReviewtheMinimumandMaximumcoordinatesinthelowerleftcorner
ofthedialogbox.
CreateaReviewSurfaceReport
1 ClickReport,andreviewtheresults.
2 SelectSaveAs.
3 EnterHemfieldExisting.txtfortheFilename.
4 Savethefiletothe
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\IntrotoSurfaces\Practice\
folder.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
75
ExerciseSurfaceReview
ExittheCADSoftware
1 ClosetheResultsdialog.
2 ClosetheSurfacePropertiesdialog.
3 ExittheCADsoftware.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
76
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CollectingSurfaceData
CollectingSurfaceData
CollectingSurfaceData
Fieldsurveys,aerialphotography,andcontourmapsareallsourcesforcollecting
surfacedata.Generally,themostaccuratedatacomesfromfieldsurveys.
Whileallmethodsofcollectingsurfacedataarevalid,thedesignprojecttype
dictatestheaccuracyandlevelofdetailrequired.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
77
ImportingSurfaceData
ImportingSurfaceData
ThefollowingarewaystobringsurfacedataintoInRoads:
Survey
TheeasiestmethodforimportingsurfacedataintoInRoadsistheSurvey
application.UsingSurvey,therawdatafromthesurveydatacollectorisimported
andprocessed.Asurfacecanbecreateddirectlyfromtheprocesseddata.
DEMImport
ThiscommandloadsDigitalElevationModel(DEM)dataintoasurface.DEMdata
offersawaytocreatesurfacemodelswheredetailedsurveyaccuracyisnot
required.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
78
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ImportingSurfaceData
TextImportWizard
LandXML
ImportSurfaceFromGraphics
TheTextImportWizardallowsyouimportsurfacedatainavarietyofASCII
formats.TheTextImportWizardisflexiblebecauseyoucandescribetheformat
ofthefilesyouareimporting.
TheImportSurfaceFromGraphicscommandallowsyoutocreatesurfacesfrom
3DCADgraphics.Importingsurfacedatafromgraphicsisawidelyusedmethodof
bringingsurfacedataintoInRoads.
LandXMLisaspecializedXMLdatafileformatcontainingcivilengineeringand
surveydatacommonlyusedinthelanddevelopmentandtransportation
industries.
TheLandXMLfileformatprovidesthefollowingcapabilities:
Transferringengineeringdesigndatabetweenproducersand
consumers
Providingadataformatsuitableforlongtermdataarchival
Providingastandardformatforelectronicdesignsubmission
SurfaceCreationandEditingisnottaughtinthiscourse.SurfaceCreationand
Editingstepbystepexercisesareavailableinothercourses.Pleasevisit
www.bentley.com/LearningPathstoreviewtheseadditionaltrainingoptions.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
79
FeatureProperties
FeatureProperties
FeatureProperties
TheFeaturePropertiestoolisusedtoviewandeditthepropertiesoffeatures
storedinthesurfacefile.Toaccessthefeaturepropertiestool,selectSurface>
Feature>FeatureProperties.
Alistofindividualfeaturesstoredinthesurfacearedisplayedinthedialogbox.
Remember,allcoordinatepointsusedforasurfacemustbestoredasafeature.
FeatureName
Everyfeatureinasurfacehasaname.Eachfeaturenameinasurfacemustbe
unique.Forexample,inasurfacetheremightbefouredgeofpavementfeatures,
buttheycannotallhavethenameEOP.Therefore,thefeaturenamescouldbe
calledEOP1,EOP2,EOP3,andEOP4.
Eachfeaturehasanassociatedfeaturestyle,whichdescribeshowandwherea
featurewilldisplay.Forexample,allfouredgeofpavementfeaturescouldhavea
IntroductiontoSurfaces
80
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FeatureProperties
featurestylenamedExist_EOP.Allfouredgesofpavementwouldthenlookthe
same,eventhoughtheirnamesaredifferent,becausetheyareusingthesame
featurestyle.
Oneofthepropertiesofafeatureisthefeaturetype.Thefeaturetypecanbe
Random,Breakline,Contour,InteriororExterior.
Anothertriangulationpropertyiswhetherthefeatureisincludedinthe
triangulatedmodel.WhentheExcludefromTriangulationoptionisselected,
InRoadswillnotincludetheselectedfeaturewhenbuildingatriangulatedmodel.
Acommonuseforthisisundergroundoroverheadutilities.Theutilitystillexists
inthesurface,butitdoesnotaffectthetriangulationofthesurface.
Triangulation
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
81
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
IntroductiontoSurfaces
82
Understandsurfacesandthetypesofdatathatdefinesasurface.
Displaysurfacecontours,featuresandtriangles.
Understandandusesurfaceproperties.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:AnInRoadssurfaceisarepresentationofthephysical
terrain.
True
False
2 Listthreetypesofsurfacefeatures.
1__________
2__________
3__________
3 TrueorFalse:Namedsymbologydefineshowgraphicsaredisplayed.
True
False
4 TrueorFalse:NamedsymbologyisdefinedusingtheStyleManager.
True
False
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
83
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:Asurfaceisarepresentationofthephysicalterrain.
TrueAnInRoadssurfaceisadigitalterrainmodelofthephysicalterrain.
Commonlyasurfaceiscreatedtomodeltheexistingororiginalground
terrainandanothersurfacetomodeltheproposedordesignterrain.
2 Listthreetypesofsurfacefeatures.
Therearefivetypesofsurfacefeatures.Eachtypeofsurfacefeaturehasa
specialbehaviorandpurpose.
1Random
2Breakline
3Contour
4Interior
5Exterior
3 TrueorFalse:Namedsymbologydefineshowgraphicsaredisplayed.
TrueNamedsymbologydefinesthegraphicdisplaypropertiesforlinear,
text,andpointelements.Oncedefined,elementsassociatedwiththe
namedsymbologywillalwaysappearthesame.Namedsymbologyisa
verypowerfultoolusedtomaintaindesignanddraftingstandards.Named
symbologyisstoredinthe.xinpreferencefile.
4 TrueorFalse:NamedsymbologyisdefinedusingtheStyleManager.
FalseNamedsymbologyisdefinedusingtheNamedSymbology
Manager.However,thenamedsymbologydefinitionsarethenassociated
withstylesdefinedusingtheStyleManager.Itisthestylethatis
associatedwiththeelement.Boththenamedsymbologyandstyle
definitionsarestoredinthe.xinpreferencefile.
IntroductiontoSurfaces
84
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
15Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
85
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
Displaytheexistinggroundcontoursanddesignsurfacefeatures.
SourceData
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Surfaces\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
TheProjectdatafilesarelistedbelow:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamen
tals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
Design: MeadowParkProposed.dtm
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamen
ExistingGround: tals\_CommonReferences\MeadowPark
Existing.dtm
IntroductiontoSurfaces
86
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:ReviewtheExistingandProposedsurfaces.
Opentheexistinggroundandproposeddesignsurfaces.
DisplaythecontoursoftheexistinggroundsurfaceusingtheExisting
Surfacepreference.
RedisplaythecontoursoftheexistinggroundsurfaceusinganInterval
of5[1.5M].
Displaythefeaturesoftheproposeddesignsurface.
UsetheMicroStationViewAttributesdialogtodisabletheFilloption.
(Settings>ViewAttributes)
Questions
WhatarethehighestandlowestelevationsoftheExistingGround
Surface?
HowmanybreaklinepointsareintheDesignSurface?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoSurfaces
87
ReviewTask
IntroductiontoSurfaces
88
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
Inthischapter,wewilllearnaboutthebasicconceptsofGeometry.Wewilllearn
aboutthestructureoftheGeometryProjectfile.Wewillimportahorizontal
alignmentfromgraphicsandsetthestartingstationforthealignment.Wewill
displaythehorizontalalignmentstationingandannotatethealignment.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
89
WhereAreWeintheBigPicture?
WhereAreWeintheBigPicture?
Atthispointintheprojectwehavedonethefollowing:
SetuptheCADfile
Setupprojectdefaults
Analyzedtheexistingdata
Now,wearereadytocreategeometrieswhichwillinvolvethefollowingtasks:
IntroductiontoGeometry
90
Createhorizontalgeometry.
Createexistinggroundprofilesandcrosssections.
Createverticalgeometry.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
LearnaboutGeometryProjects.
Learnhowtodisplaygeometry.
Createhorizontalalignmentsfromgraphics.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
91
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Geometry\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileImportAlignmentGraphic.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenthePreferenceFile
1 SelectthePreferencestabintheInRoadsExplorer.
2 VerifythatthepreferencefileBentleyTraining.xinisintheC:\Bentley
Training\InRoadsFundamentals\_Standards\folder.
Thepreferencefileshouldhaveautomaticallyopenedbecauseofthe
ProjectDefaultspreviouslysetup.Ifso,skipthefollowingstepsand
continuetothenexttopic(WhatisaGeometryProject?).
Ifthefileisnotloaded,completethefollowingsteps.
3 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
4 ChangetheFilesoftypetoPreferences(*.xin).
5 Browsetothe
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\_Standards\folder.
6 SelectthefileBentleyTraining.xinandclickOpen.
7 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
IntroductiontoGeometry
92
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
WhatisaGeometryProject?
WhatisaGeometryProject?
GeometryProject
TheGeometryProjectcontainsgeometryelements,whichincludecoordinate
geometrypoints,horizontalalignments,andverticalalignments.Thefile
extensionfortheGeometryProjectis.alg.
Inadditiontothegeometryelements,theGeometryProjectalsostoresstationing
informationforthealignmentsincludingthestartingstationandstation
equations,aswellasimportantpointsalongthealignmentknownasEventPoints.
EventPointsareamethodoflocatingimportantlocationsalonganalignment.
Thesepointsareeitherbasedonastationandoffsetoronfixedcoordinates.The
stationandoffsetmethodallowsthepointtomoveasthealignmentdefinitionis
changed.Fixedcoordinateeventpointsdonotmovewhenthealignmentis
changed.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
93
GeometryProjectStructure
GeometryProjectStructure
GeometryProjectStructure
AGeometryProjectissimilarinconcepttoadatabase.Itstoresandorganizes
pointinformation.TheremaybeseveralGeometryProjectsopenedinInRoads,
butonlyonecanreceiveinputatatime.ThisiscalledtheactiveGeometry
Project.
AgeometryprojectisorganizedintohierarchalcategoriesstartingwiththeCOGO
pointbufferandhorizontalalignments.Onlyonealignmentcanbemanipulated
withinaGeometryProjectatatime.Thisiscalledtheactivealignment.
VerticalAlignments,andHorizontalAlignmentEventPoints,arestoredas
childrenofthehorizontalalignments.Verticaleventpointsarechildrento
verticalalignments.
Asshowninthediagramabove,multiplehorizontalalignmentscanexistina
GeometryProject.Eachhorizontalalignmentcanhavemultiplechildvertical
alignments.Eachhorizontalalignmentmusthaveauniquename.Geometry
namesarecasesensitive.
IntroductiontoGeometry
94
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
OpeningFiles
OpeningFiles
OpeningaGeometryProjectReview
Toopenageometryproject,selectFile>Open.MorethanoneGeometryProject
canbeloadedatatime.WhenyouselecttheGeometrytablocatedinthe
bottomoftheWorkspaceBar,thenameofthegeometryprojectisvisibleinthe
InRoadsExplorer.
ActiveGeometry
Likesurfaces,theactiveGeometryProjectisindicatedbyaredrectanglearound
theicon.Thisconceptisextendedtothehorizontalandverticalalignments
containedinthegeometryproject.Youcanonlyhaveoneactivehorizontal
alignmentandoneactiveverticalalignmentatatime.Althoughyoucanview
morethanonealignmentatatime,theactivehorizontalandverticalalignments
aretheonlyonesthatcanbeedited.SomeInRoadstoolsonlyworkontheactive
alignment,whileothersallowyoutoselecttheactivealignmentinthetooldialog
box.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
95
WhatisaHorizontalAlignment?
WhatisaHorizontalAlignment?
HorizontalAlignments
Ahorizontalalignmentisaseriesoflinearelementsandcircularelements.
Together,theelementsformanalignment.Ahorizontalalignmentisusedto
definethingssuchasaroadcenterline,arightofwayline,andproperty
boundaries.HorizontalalignmentsarestoredintheGeometryProject.
AhorizontalalignmentisachildoftheGeometryproject.EachGeometryProject
canhaveoneormanyhorizontalalignments.Thenameofeachhorizontal
alignmentwithinaGeometryProjectmustbeunique.
Alignmentscanbestationed.Whenahorizontalalignmentiscreated,stationingis
automaticallyassigned.Thestationingstartsat0+00,butitcanbechangedtoany
startingstation.Wewillseehowstationingisdefinedforanalignmentlaterinthis
chapter.
IntroductiontoGeometry
96
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TypesofGeometry
TypesofGeometry
TypesofGeometry
GeometryProjectsandalignmentarecreatedusingtheFile>Newcommand.To
creategeometry,selecttheGeometrytab.Thiscommandallocatesmemoryfora
newgeometryprojectoralignment.YoumustcreateaGeometryProject,
followedbycreatingaHorizontalAlignmentbeforeyoucancreategeometrydata.
Thefirstoptiononthedialogboxdefinesthetypeofgeometrynamebeing
created.TheoptionsincludeaGeometryProject,HorizontalAlignment,and
VerticalAlignment.
ThereisaparentchildrelationshipbetweenGeometryProjects,Horizontal
Alignments,andVerticalAlignments.Whenahorizontalalignmentiscreated,it
becomesachildoftheactivegeometryproject.Likewise,anewvertical
alignmentbecomesachildoftheactivehorizontalalignment.
EnteringadescriptionfortheGeometryProjectoralignmentisrecommended.It
willhelpyouidentifywhichfiletouse,asyoumighthaveseveralfilesloadedat
onetime.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
97
TypesofGeometry
Whencreatinghorizontalandverticalalignments,theStyleandCurveDefinition
dialogboxfieldsareactivated.Thestyledefineshowthegeometrywillappear
whendisplayedintheCADfile.Thecurvedefinitiondefineshowthehorizontalor
verticalcurvesaredefinedmathematically.
Therearemanywaystocreateandeditahorizontalalignment.Wewillcover
someofthemostcommonlyusedmethodsinthiscourse.Inthislesson,wewill
createahorizontalalignmentfromagraphicelementintheCADfile.Inalater
lesson,welearntocreateandedithorizontalalignmentsusinghorizontalPIsand
curves.Thereisalsoanoptionallessonthatintroducesyoutocreatinggeometry
elements.
GeometryiscreatedfromgraphicelementsusingtheFile>Import>Geometry
command.
Thetypesofgeometrythatcanbecreatedbyimportinggeometryfromgraphics
include:
HorizontalAlignment
VerticalAlignment
HorizontalandVerticalAlignment
COGOPoints
EventPoints
IntroductiontoGeometry
98
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TypesofGraphicsThatCanBeImported
TypesofGraphicsThatCanBeImported
TypeofGraphicsThatCanBeImported
Thetypesofgraphicelementsthatcanbeimportedare:
Lines
Linestrings
Arcs
Curvestrings(strokedusingchordheighttolerance)
Shapes
Complexlinestrings
Complexshapesmadefromelementsinthislist
BSplines(strokedusingchordheighttolerance)
Thegraphicalelementtypeslistedabovecanbeusedforhorizontalandvertical
alignments.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
99
AlignmentIntegrity
AlignmentIntegrity
AlignmentIntegrity
Ifpossible,itisbesttoconnectthealignmentgraphicsintoasingleelement,such
asacomplexchain,beforeimporting.Thisensuresthatallthelinesandcurvesget
importedintoasinglehorizontalalignmentandthattheelementsarecontinuous.
InRoadscanimportseparategraphicelementsandcombinethemintoasingle
alignment;however,creatingacomplexchainaccomplishesthesameresults.
Ifyouareimportinganalignmentcontainingnontangentialcirculararcsandthe
alignmentwascreatedfromgraphics,youmayencounterrestrictionsifyoutryto
editthealignment.
IntroductiontoGeometry
100
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseImportAlignmentfromGraphics
ExerciseImportAlignmentfromGraphics
CreateaNewGeometryProject
1 SelectFile>New.
2 ClicktheGeometrytab.
3 EnterHemfieldfortheGeometryProjectname.
4 FortheDescription,enterHemfieldRoad.
5 ClickApply,thenclickClose.
AnewGeometryProjectiscreated.
ImporttheHorizontalAlignmentFromGraphics
NowthataGeometryProjecthasbeencreated,thenewhorizontal
alignmentwillbecreatedinthisGeometryProject.Thegraphicelement
beingimportingisacomplexchain.
1 SelectFile>Import>Geometry.
2 EnsurethattheFromGraphicstabisselected.
3 EnsurethattheTypeissettoHorizontalAlignment.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
101
ExerciseImportAlignmentfromGraphics
4 EnterHemfieldRdfortheNameandHemfieldRoadExistingAlignment
fortheDescription.
5 SelectE_Road_PavementCLfortheStyle.
6 ClickApply.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
7 Selecttheyellowelementontheleftintheview.
Youcanselectanywhereonthegraphic;theresultingalignmentwillbe
thesame.InRoadsreadsthegraphicinthedirectionitwasoriginally
drawn.
8 ClickagainontheCADviewtoacceptthehighlightedgraphic.
9 Rightclicktoexitthegraphicselectionmode.
Thenewalignmentiscreated.
ReviewtheHorizontalAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>ReviewHorizontal.
2 Reviewthealignment.
Noticethatthestartingstationis0+00[0+000].
3 ClosetheReviewHorizontaldialog.
IntroductiontoGeometry
102
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
HorizontalAlignments
HorizontalAlignments
Stationing
Thefirsttimeyoucreateahorizontalalignment,thebeginningstationis
0+00[0+000].Youcanassignadifferentbeginningstationusingthestationingtool
(Geometry>HorizontalCurveSet>Stationing).Thisstationingcommand
definestheactivealignmentsstartingstation.Allalignmentstationequationscan
becreatedusingthistool.
ReviewHorizontalAlignment
Itishelpfultoreviewyourdesigngeometrically.Aquickwaytoreviewthe
alignmentistorightclickonthehorizontalalignmentintheInRoadsExplorerand
selectReview.Thiscommanddisplaysdetailedinformationaboutthehorizontal
alignment.Thealignmentreportcanbeprinted,savedordisplayedintheCAD
file.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
103
HorizontalAlignments
SaveGeometryProject
InRoadsdoesntautomaticallysaveadditionsormodificationstotheGeometry
Projectfile.Anychangesarestoredinvirtualmemoryandarenotwrittentothe
harddiskuntiltheFile>SaveAscommandisused.
IntroductiontoGeometry
104
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseDefineStationing
ExerciseDefineStationing
DefinetheBeginningStation
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>Stationing.
EnsurethatHemfieldRdisselectedfromtheHorizontalAlignmentlist.
Bydefault,theactivehorizontalalignmentisselected.
2 Enter10+00[1+000]fortheStartingStation.
3 ClickApply,thenclickClose.
ReviewtheHorizontalAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>ReviewHorizontal(orrightclickonthehorizontal
alignmentintheInRoadsExplorerwindowandselectReview).
Thealignmentreportappears.
2 SelectElementastheMode.
NoticethatthefirstgraphicelementishighlightedintheCADviewand
thereportislimitedtothatsingleelement.
3 ClickNexttostepthrougheachelementinthealignment.
4 Whenfinished,closetheReviewHorizontalAlignmentdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
105
ExerciseDefineStationing
SavetheGeometryProject
1 SelectFile>SaveAs.
2 SelectGeometryProjects(*.alg)fromtheSaveasTypefield.
3 NavigatetotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Geometry\Practice\folder.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
4 EnterHemfield.algastheFileName.
5 ClickSave,thenclickCancel.
IntroductiontoGeometry
106
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
HorizontalAlignmentAnnotation
HorizontalAlignmentAnnotation
ViewStationing
HorizontalalignmentstationingisdisplayedintheCADfileusingtheGeometry>
ViewGeometry>Stationingtool.Thistoolcontrolsthedisplayofstation
annotationtextalongtheactivehorizontalalignment.Stationsareplacedalonga
horizontalalignmentataspecifiedinterval.
HorizontalAlignmentAnnotation
TheGeometry>ViewGeometry>HorizontalAnnotationcommandisusedto
annotateahorizontalalignmentwithcurveandtangentdata.Thiscommandis
alsousedtoviewandannotateCOGOpoints.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
107
HorizontalAlignmentAnnotation
ActiveGeometryProject/HorizontalAlignmentReview
Remember,youcanopenorcreateseveralGeometryProjects.Onlyone
GeometryProjectcanbeworkedonatatime.ThisiscalledtheactiveGeometry
Project.IntheInRoadsExplorer,theactiveGeometryProjectisshownwithared
boxsurroundingtheicons.Numeroushorizontalandverticalalignmentscanbe
createdinasingleGeometryProject.JustlikeGeometryProjects,onlyone
horizontalandverticalalignmentcanbeactiveatatime.Theactivealignments
arealsoshownwitharedboxsurroundingtheicons.
RenameGeometry
TheRenameGeometryallowsyoutochangethenameofageometryprojectand
anyofthechildrenofageometryproject,suchasthehorizontalalignmentand/
ortheverticalalignmentname.TheRenameGeometrycommandisalsousedto
changethestyleofanalignment.
IntroductiontoGeometry
108
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Locate/GraphicSelectButton
Locate/GraphicSelectButton
TheTargetbuttonorGraphicSelectbuttonisavailableonmanydialogs.Itallows
youtographicallyselecttheelementorpointsfromtheCADviewtodefinethe
informationfromthatportionofthedialog.Forexample,youcouldgraphically
picktwopointstodefinetheMaximumLengthofthetriangleleg.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
109
ExerciseViewHorizontalAnnotation
ExerciseViewHorizontalAnnotation
AnnotatetheHorizontalAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>HorizontalAnnotation.
TheViewHorizontalAnnotationdialogopens.
2 ClicktheGraphicSelectbuttontotherightoftheHorizontalAlignments
Includefield.
3 SelecttheyellowelementontheleftintheCADview.
Thenearestalignmentisfoundandhighlighted.
4 ClickanywhereintheCADViewtoAcceptthehighlightedalignment.
TheHemfieldRdalignmentisaddedtothehorizontalalignmentlistinthe
ViewHorizontalAnnotationdialog.
5 ClickApply,thenclickClose.
ThealignmenttangentsandcurvesareannotatedbasedontheStyle
associatedwiththealignment.
IntroductiontoGeometry
110
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseViewHorizontalAnnotation
ViewtheStationing
1 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>Stationing.
Ifthecorrectalignmentwasnotalreadyactive,itcanbeselectedfromthe
picklist.
2 ClickApplyandclickClose.
ThestationingisdisplayedintheCADdrawing.
Noticethattheactivealignment,HemfieldRd,appearsintheHorizontal
Alignmentfield.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
111
GeometryViewOptions
GeometryViewOptions
GeometryViewOptions
TheViewGeometryOptionsallowyoutospecifywhichtypeofannotationis
automaticallyupdatedwhengeometryismodified.Whenselected,InRoadswill
automaticallyupdatethefollowingannotation:
HorizontalElements
VerticalElements
ClosedAreas
Stationing
CurveSets
VerticalChangeinPlan
ViewRegressionPoints
Ifaspecifictypeofannotationisnotselected,annotationcanbemanually
updatedusingtheviewannotationcommand.
IntroductiontoGeometry
112
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
GeometryViewOptions
TheappearanceoftheannotationiscontrolledbyeachGeometry>View
Ifyoucheckedthatyouwanttoupdatethestationing,thenyoumustsaveaView
stationpreferencecalledDesignCenterline.Ifsuchapreferenceisdefined,then
InRoadsdisplaysandannotatesthestationingbaseduponthesettingsforDesign
Centerline.InRoadsdoesnotlookatthesettingsforViewStationingthatarein
memory.Thepreferencemustexistondiskorthesoftwaresilentlyskipsthe
stationingannotation.
commandspreferencesbyusingthealignmentsstyleandviewcommand
preference.Forexample,youmayhaveanalignmentwithastylecalled
DesignCenterline.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
113
ExerciseCreateAnotherAlignmentwithaDifferentStyle
ExerciseCreateAnotherAlignmentwithaDifferentStyle
ChangetheViewGeometryOptions
1 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>Options.
2 Makesureallthegeometryoptionsareselected.
3 ClickApply,thenclickClose.
ImporttheHorizontalAlignmentFromGraphics
1 SelectFile>Import>Geometry.
2 EnsurethattheFromGraphicstabisselected.
3 EnsurethattheTypeissettoHorizontalAlignment.
4 EnterRoad2fortheNameandRoad2fortheDescription.
5 SelectP_COGO_MainCLfortheStyle.
6 ClickApply.
7 Selecttheredelementontherightintheview.
Youcanselectanywhereonthegraphic;theresultingalignmentwillbe
thesame.InRoadsreadsthegraphicinthedirectionitwasoriginally
drawn.
IntroductiontoGeometry
114
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateAnotherAlignmentwithaDifferentStyle
8 ClickagainanywhereontheCADviewtoacceptthehighlightedgraphic.
Thenewalignmentiscreated.
9 Rightclicktoexitthegraphicselectionmode.
10 ClosetheImportGeometrydialog.
ViewtheStationingandAnnotation
1 Deletetheredelementontheright.
2 IntheInRoadsExplorer,rightclickontheRoad2alignment,andselect
View.
NoticethattheStationingandAnnotationaredisplayedautomaticallyin
theCADview.
3 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>Stationing.
4 ClickPreferences.
NoticethatapreferenceexistscalledP_COGO_MainCL,whichisthesame
nameasthealignmentstyleforRoad2.Thestationingandannotationtext
willalsoautomaticallyupdatewhenthealignmentismodified.
5 ClosethePreferencedialogandtheViewStationingdialog.
ChangethestylefortheHemfieldRoadAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>RenameGeometry.
2 SettheTypetoHorizontalAlignment.
3 IntheFromareasettheGeometryProjecttoHemfield.
4 Inthealignmentlistinthecenterofthedialog,selectHemfieldRd.
5 IntheToarea,changetheStyletoP_COGO_MainCL.
6 ClickApply.
AnAlertwilldisplayconfirmingyouwanttochangethegeometry.
7 ClickYes.
8 ClickClose.
9 OntheleftsideoftheInRoadsExplorer,rightclickontheHemfieldRd
AlignmentandselectViewAllHorizontals.Thealignmentupdateswith
thenewstyleandannotation.
DeletetheRoad2Alignment
1 OnrightsideoftheInRoadsExplorer,rightclickontheRoad2alignment
andselectDelete.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
115
ExerciseCreateAnotherAlignmentwithaDifferentStyle
2 Analertboxwilldisplay.ClickYes.
3 SavetheGeometryProjectbyselectingFile>Save>GeometryProject.
IntroductiontoGeometry
116
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TheProjectFile
TheProjectFile
TheProjectfile(.rwk)isusedtoopenandsavemultipleInRoadsdatafilesina
singleoperation.UsingaProjectfileisveryhelpfulbecauseanentireprojectcan
beloadedorsavedinasingleoperation.WithouttheuseofProjectfiles,loading
orsavingaprojectinvolveskeepingtrackofmanyindividualfiles.
BeforeaProjectfileiscreated,theindividualInRoadsdatafiles(Surfaces,
GeometryProjects,TemplateLibraries,etc.)mustbeopenedorcreatedandsaved
tothedisk.TheProjectfileisalistoftheindividualInRoadsdatafilestoloadand
save.TheProjectfileitselfdoesnotcontainanyInRoadsdata.ItisanASCIIfile
thatpointstothelocationoftheInRoadsfiles.
TocreateanInRoadsProjectfile,selectFile>SaveAsfromtheInRoadsmenu.
ThiswillbringuptheSaveAsdialog.OntheSaveAsdialog,selectOptions.This
bringsuptheProjectoptionsdialog.TheProjectOptionsdialogisusedtoselect
whichInRoadsdatafilestoaddtotheProjectfile.
TheavailableInRoadsdatatypesareseparatedbytabs.Allcurrentlyloaded
InRoadsdatafilesarelistedwhenatabisselected.ToincludeanInRoadsdatafile
intheProjectfile,selecttheAddand/orUpdateboxnexttothedesiredInRoads
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
117
TheProjectFile
datafile.TheAddoptionindicatesthattheProjectfilewillopenthefile.The
UpdateoptionindicatesthattheProjectfilewillsavethefile.
ToopenanexistingProjectfile(*.rwk),selecttheFile>Opencommandand
selectProjectastheFilesofType.BrowseandselecttheProjectfile(.rwk)and
clickOK.ThiswillopenallInRoadsfileslistedintheProjectfile.
TosavealldatafilesinaProjectfile,selecttheFile>Save>Projectcommand.
ThiswillsavetheactualInRoadsdatafileswhentheUpdateoptionisselected.
IntroductiontoGeometry
118
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaProjectFile
ExerciseCreateaProjectFile
CreateaProjectFile
1 SelectFile>SaveAs.
2 SetSaveasTypetoProjects(*.rwk).
3 ClickOptions.
Bydefault,theProjectOptionsdialogopenstotheSurfacestab.
4 SelecttheGeometryProjecttab.
5 SelecttheAddandUpdateoptionsnexttotheGeometryProjectnamed
HemfieldandclickOK.
6 NavigatetotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Geometry\Practice\folder.
7 EnterPracticeIntrotoGeometry.rwkastheFileName.
8 ClickSaveandthenCancel.
9 ExittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
119
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
IntroductiontoGeometry
120
UnderstandanduseGeometryProjects.
Displaygeometry.
Createhorizontalalignmentsfromgraphics.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 ThefileextensionforanInRoadsGeometryProjectis:
A.xin
B.alg
C.dtm
D.rwk
2 TrueorFalse:Analignmentnamemustbedefinedbeforeanyalignment
elementsorpointscanbedefined.
True
False
3 Thefirsttimeyoucreateahorizontalalignment,thebeginningstationis
____.
A0+00[0+000]
B10+00[1+000]
C20+00[2+000]
D12+23[1+223]
4 TrueorFalse:TheProjectfile(.rwk)isusedtoopenandsavemultiple
InRoadsdatafilesinasingleoperation.
True
False
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
121
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 ThefileextensionforanInRoadsGeometryProjectis.
B.alg
2 TrueorFalse:Analignmentnamemustbedefinedbeforeanyalignment
elementsorpointscanbedefined.
TrueYoumustcreateanalignmentnamebeforeanygeometryelements
canbedefined.Thegeometrynameiscreatedintheactivegeometry
projectbutitisnotsavedtotheharddriveautomatically.Youmustsave
thegeometryprojectusingtheFile>SaveAscommand.
3 Thefirsttimeyoucreateahorizontalalignment,thestartingstationis
____.
A0+00[0+000]Allhorizontalalignmentsbeginatstation0+00[0+000]
bydefault.ThestartingstationcanbechangedwiththeGeometry>
HorizontalCurveSet>Stationingtool.
4 TrueorFalse:TheProjectfile(.rwk)isusedtoopenandsavemultiple
InRoadsdatafilesinasingleoperation.
TrueTheProjectfile(.rwk)isaconvenientmethodofopeningandsaving
multipledatafilesinasingleoperation.TheProjectfileiscreatedwiththe
File>SaveAscommand.
IntroductiontoGeometry
122
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
15Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
123
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
ImporttheMeadowParkDriveexistinghorizontalalignmentfromgraphics.
AnnotatetheMeadowParkDrivealignment.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Geometry\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Geometry\Task\TaskIntrotoGeometry.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
IntroductiontoGeometry
124
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:ImportGeometryfromgraphics.
CreateanewGeometryProjectnamedMeadowPark.
Importtheredcomplexchainthatrepresentsthecenterlineofthe
roadasahorizontalalignmentnamedMeadowParkDrive.Use
P_COGO_MainCLastheStyle.
SetthebeginningstationofMeadowParkDriveto15+51.15
[1+551.15].
Displaythehorizontalalignment,stationing,andannotation.
Whenfinished,savethenewGeometryProjectas
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Geometry\Task\MeadowPark.alg.
AddthenewMeadowPark.algtotheprojectfileTaskIntroto
Geometry.rwk.SelecttheAddandUpdateoptionsforthenewly
createdGeometryProject.Whenaskedifyouwishtooverwritethe
existingfile,clickYes.
Questions
Whatistheendingstationofthealignment?
WhatisthePIStationofthecurve?
WhatisthecurveRadius?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoGeometry
125
MeadowParkDriveAlignment
MeadowParkDriveAlignment
IntroductiontoGeometry
126
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignments
UsingPIs
Inthischapter,wewilllearnhowtocreatehorizontalalignmentusingthePI
commands(Add,Insert,Move,DeletePI).Wewillalsolearnhowtoeditexisting
alignmentsandcreatecurves.
UsingthePIcommandsisoneofanumberofwaystocreatealignments.Ifyour
normalworkingpracticedoesnotusethismethod,youshouldskipthischapter.
However,oncethistrainingcourseisended,youwillhavethisdocumentandthe
dataset,soyouwillbeabletoworkthroughthecontentofthischapteratalater
date.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
127
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
Learnhowtodefinehorizontalpointsofintersection(PIs)with
precisioninput.
Learnhowtoedithorizontalalignments.
Learnhowtocreatehorizontalcurves.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
128
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Creating
HAUsingPIs\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileAddPIs.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Creating
HAUsingPIs\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeHAPI.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
129
HorizontalCurveSet
HorizontalCurveSet
HorizontalCurveSet
TheHorizontalCurveSettoolsareusedtoplaceandeditPIsandcurvesthat
defineahorizontalalignment.ThealignmentdefinitionmustbecreatedusingFile
>NewbeforePIscanbeaddedtothealignment.YouaddPIstoanalignment
usingtheAddPIcommand.Thisbuildsthetangentsections.Next,youmust
move,insert,ordeletepointstoeditthepointsthatwereplacedwiththeAddPI
command.Finally,usetheDefineCurvescommandtocreateandeditthecurves.
TherearefourtoolsforcreatingandmanipulatingPIs:
AddPIcreatesanewPIintheactivealignment.Ifthealignmentalready
containsoneormorePIs,theAddPItoolwilladdanewPIatthebeginningor
theendoftheactivealignment.
Whenyouinvokethistool,youwillbepromptedtoidentifytheendofthe
alignment.Ifyourexistingalignmentisempty,thefirstdatapointwillbecome
thebeginningofyouralignment.Otherwise,thefirstdatapointidentifiesthe
nearestendoftheactivealignment.Makesureyouhavethecorrectactive
horizontalalignment.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
130
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
HorizontalCurveSet
InsertPIcreatesanewPIbetweentwoexistingPIsintheactivehorizontal
alignment.
MovePIrepositionsaPIanditsassociatedcurveset,ifoneexists.
DeletePIremovesaPIanditsassociatedcurveset,ifoneexists.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
131
ProductivityTips
ProductivityTips
PrecisionInputandConventions
ToplacePIsusingprecisioninput,selectUtilities>KeyinfromtheCADmenu.
Therearenospacesusedintheprecisioninputformat.
Theformatofthekeyinsareshownbelow:
ne=northing,easting,elevation
Theelevationparameterisoptional.
di=distance,direction
TheformatofthedirectionasabearingisN45^3630.7EordecimalN45.52E
so=station,offset,elevation,alignmentname,GeometryProjectname
Offsetstotherightoftheaheadstationingarepositive.Offsetstotheleftof
theaheadstationingarenegative.
Theelevation,alignmentname,andGeometryProjectnameareoptional
parameters;however,theymustbeincludedinthespecifiedorder.Therefore,
ifyouwishtoincludethealignmentname,theelevationmustalsobe
included.Alignmentnamesarecasesensitive.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
132
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTips
StatusBar
TheAngleModemayneedtobechangedtoBearingsforthedikeyinto
functionasexpected.
TochangetheAngleMode:
Settings>DesignFile>AngleReadout>DirectionMode
TheleftcorneroftheCADstatusbarwilldisplayInRoadscommandprompts.
ThesepromptswillassistyouwhenusingInRoadscommandswhichrequireyou
toclickintheCADVieworenterinformationintotheCADKeyindialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
133
ExerciseCreateAlignmentwithPrecision
ExerciseCreateAlignmentwithPrecision
AddHorizontalPIs
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>AddPI.
2 Whenpromptedtoidentifytheendofthealignment,datapointnearthe
lowerendoftheredelementintheCADfile.
3 Movethecursor.
4 Youshouldseealinestretchingfromtheendofthealignment.
Thenextpointswillbeenteredusingprecisioninputkeyins.
5 Clickinthekeyinfieldtomakeitactive.
6 IntheCADKeyindialog,enterne=120126.674,1089335.314
[36609.524,332088.135.].
7 PressEnter.
ThePIisplaced.
Next,wewillplaceanotherPIbyusingthedikeyin.
8 IntheCADKeyindialog,enterdi=1145.0[267.02],s78^2624e.
Shift6willenterthe^symbol.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
134
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateAlignmentwithPrecision
9 PressEnter.
ThenexttwoPIswillbeaddedbygraphicallyselectingthepoints.
10 Snaptoandacceptadatapointatthesouthendofthepurplelineto
placeaPI.Thispointisnortheastofthelastpointplaced.IfAccuSnapis
enabled,youmustholddowntheShift+Ctrlkeystosnap.
11 DatapointanyplaceeastofthealignmenttoplacethelastPIpoint.
12 Rightclicktoresetthecommand.
13 RightclickagaintoterminatetheAddPIcommand.
Ifnecessary,youcanusetheCADviewcontrolcommandtoolsinthemiddle
ofusingthePlacePIcommand.Whenyouaredonewiththeview
manipulation,rightclickandInRoadswillbringyoubacktothelaststepprior
toyourviewmanipulation.
InsertaHorizontalPI
TheInsertPItoolisusedtoaddanewPItoanexistingtangentline.
Remember,theAddPItoolcanonlybeusedtoaddaPIontheendofan
existingalignment.
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>InsertPI.
2 Graphicallyselectthelastsegmentofthealignment.
Thesegmentbecomesdynamicshowingthepossiblelocationsofthenew
PI.
3 Clicktolocatethepointjustnorthoftheexistingsegment.
PrecisionkeyinscouldhavebeenusedtolocatetheinsertedPI.
4 Clickagaintoaccepttheoverallsolution.
5 RightclicktoterminatetheInsertPIcommand.
MoveaHorizontalPI
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>MovePI.
2 GraphicallyselectthelastPIinthealignment.
3 MovethePItoanewlocation(theexactlocationisnotimportant).
4 ClicktolocatethePI.
PrecisionkeyinscouldalsohavebeenusedtolocatethePI.
5 Clickagaintoaccepttheoverallsolution.
6 RightclicktoterminatetheMovePIcommand.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
135
ExerciseCreateAlignmentwithPrecision
DeleteaHorizontalPI
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>DeletePI.
2 GraphicallyselectthelastPIinthealignment.
3 Clickagaintoaccepttheoverallsolution.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
4 RepeattheproceduretoagainremovethelastPIinthealignment.Thisis
thePIthatwassecondtolastintheoriginalalignment.
5 RightclicktoterminatetheDeletePIcommand.
6 SelectFile>Save>GeometryProject.
Remember,InRoadsdoesnotautomaticallysavetheGeometryProjectchangesto
theharddisk;theyareonlystoredinvirtualmemoryatthistime.Itisalwaysa
goodideatosavethegeometry,oranyotherInRoadsdata,aftermakingchanges.
AnotherwaytosaveInRoadsdataistorightclickonthedatatypeintheInRoads
ExplorerandclickSave.Inthiscase,highlighttheHemfieldGeometryProjectin
theInRoadsExplorer,rightclickandclickSave.
InpreviouschaptersyouusedtheSaveAscommandtosavegeometryand
otherdata.However,inthisexerciseyouloadedandareworkingwithan
existinggeometryproject(.alg).BecauseInRoadsalreadyknowsthename
andlocationofthegeometryprojectontheharddisk,youcanusetheSave
command,whichwilloverwritetheexistingfilewiththecurrentdatain
InRoads.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
136
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewPracticeAlignment
ReviewPracticeAlignment
Thehorizontalalignmentinthepreviousexerciseshouldresemblethefigure
abovewhencomplete.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
137
HorizontalCurves
HorizontalCurves
HorizontalCurves
TheDefineHorizontalCurveSettooldefinesnewcurvesetsandmodifiesexisting
curvesetsintheactivehorizontalalignment.Theacceptedsolutionisdisplayedin
theCADdrawingfile.Therearenumerousoptionsonthisdialogbox;however,a
fewbasicoptionswillgetyoustarted.
HorizontalPIArea
ThetextfieldsintheHorizontalPIgroupboxdescribethepositionofthecurrent
PIrelativetothepreviousandnextPIs.Changingvaluesonthisdialogwill
redefinethelocationofthePI.TheDefinedByoptiondetermineshowPIlocations
aredetermined.
Forexample,assumethatDefineByissettoDirectionsfromPreviousandNext
PIs,andthatyouhavemodifiedthevaluesofDirectionBackandDirectionAhead.
WhenyouclickApply,thePIisrepositionedbasedontheintersectionofthose
directionsprojectedfromthepreviousPItothenextPI.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
138
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
HorizontalCurves
Thisisthemostimportantareaonthedialogbox.Thesesettingsdefinethecurve
orcurvesetthatiscreatedatthecurrentPI.Acurvesetcanbeasimplesingle
curve,acomplexspiralcurvespiralcurvespiralcurvecombination,oranything
inbetween.Toomitacurveorspiraldefinitioninthecurveset,leaveitslengthor
radiusvaluesettozero.
Adegreeofcurvaturecanbeenteredintheradiusfieldbyproceedingthevalue
withtheletterd.Forexample,keyingind1returnsaradiusof5729.578,whichis
theradiusofa1degreecurve.
HorizontalCurveArea
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
139
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurves
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurves
Nowthatwehaveextendedouralignment,theappropriatenextstepisto
definecurvesforthosePIsthathavebeenplaced.
DefineHorizontalCurve
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>DefineCurve.
2 ClickNextuntilyoulocatethefirstPIwithnocurve.
WatchtheRadiusfieldtodetermineifeachPIhasacurveassigned.The
activecurveand/ortangentsegmentsarehighlightedintheCADdrawing.
IfyouknowexactlywhichPIyouwanttoedit,theSelectbuttoncanbe
usedtographicallyselectthePI.
3 Enter100[40]forthelengthoftheleadingtransitionclothoidspiral.
4 Enter1200[400]forRadius1.
5 Enter100[40]forthelengthofthetrailingtransitionclothoidspiral.
6 ClickApplyandthenClose.
ThecurvesolutionisdisplayedintheCADfile.Didthecurvegetcreated?
7 ReadthepromptintheInRoadsExplorer.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
140
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurves
CorrecttheCurve
1 ChangetheRadius1to500[150].
Leavebothtransitionlengthsat100.00[40].
2 ClickApply.
Whatdoesthepromptsay?Didthecurvegetcreated?
3 ClickUndoontheDefineHorizontalCurveSetdialogbox.
Youcanonlyundothelastcurveyoudefine.Whathappens?
4 ChangetheRadius1to700[200].
5 ClickApply,thenclickNext.
Besuretoclicknextsothecorrectcurvewillbemodified.
6 Enter2000[600]forRadius1.
7 ClickApply,thenclickNext.
8 Enter500[300]forRadius1.
9 ClickApply.
10 Closethedialog.
ReviewandAnnotatetheAlignment
1 Rightclickonthehorizontalalignment(intheInRoadsExplorerWindow)
andselectReview.
2 ClosetheReviewHorizontalAlignmentdialog.
3 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>HorizontalAnnotationtoolto
annotatethehorizontalalignment.
4 ClickthetargetbuttonnexttotheHorizontalAlignmentsIncludefield.
5 Clickonthealignmentgraphic.
Thealignmenthighlights.
6 Clickagaintoacceptthealignment.
7 ClickApplytoannotatethealignment.
8 ClosetheViewHorizontalAnnotationdialog.
SaveGeometry
1 SelectFile>Save>GeometryProject.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
141
DesignCriteria
DesignCriteria
AddHorizontalPI
TheAddHorizontalPIcommandcanplacePIsanddefinecurvesbasedonthe
designcriteriaspecifiedintheDesignCriteriadialog.AccessHorizontalDesign
CriteriafromGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>DesignCriteria.AccessVertical
DesignCriteriabyselectingGeometry>VerticalCurveSet>DesignCriteria.
Browsetotheappropriatehorizontalcurvecheckstable.Thiswillallowyouto
automaticallyplacePIswithcurvesdefinedusingtheAddPIcommand.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
142
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurvesBasedonDesignCriteria
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurvesBasedonDesignCriteria
SpecifyDesignCriteria
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>DesignCriteria.
2 SelecttheUseDesignCriteriacheckbox.
3 Iftablenamefieldisempty,clickBrowse.
4 NavigatetotheC:\ProgramFiles\Bentley\InRoadsGroup
V8.11\data\imperial[metric]\folderandselectHorizontalDesign
Checks.txt.
IfyourInRoadssoftwareisnotinstalledtothedefaultlocation,thepathin
step3willbedifferent.Browsetothelocationwhereyoursoftwareis
installed.
5 Select55[80]fortheSpeedandsettheMaximumeto6.
6 ClickApply,thenClose.
AddPIswithCurves.
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalCurveSet>AddPI.
2 SelectthelastPIinthealignment.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
143
ExerciseDefineHorizontalCurvesBasedonDesignCriteria
3 ClickdownandtotherightofthelastPI.Noticeacurveisautomatically
definedbasedonthedesigncriteriaspecified.
4 PlaceonemorePIupandtotheright,thenrightclicktofinish.
5 ExittheCADsoftware.
6 Whenpromptedtosavethegeometryproject,clickNo.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
144
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Definehorizontalpointsofintersection(PIs)withprecisioninput.
Edithorizontalalignments.
Createhorizontalcurves.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
145
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtodefineahorizontalPI?
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
AAddPI
BDeletePI
CInsertPI
DMovePI
2 Listatleasttwokeyincommandsusedtoenterhorizontalgeometrywith
precision.
1__________
2__________
3__________
3 TrueorFalse:TheDefineHorizontalCurveSettooldefinesnewcurvesets
butwillnotallowforthemodificationofexistingcurvesetsintheactive
horizontalalignment.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
146
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtodefineahorizontalPI.
AAddPI
CInsertPI
BoththeAddPIandInsertPIcommandsareusedtodefineanewPI.The
AddPIcommandisusedtostartanewalignmentoraddaPItoeitherend
ofanexistingalignment.TheInsertPIcommandisusedtodefineanewPI
inthemiddleofanexistingalignment.
2 Listthreekeyincommandsusedtoenterhorizontalgeometrywith
precision.
1ne=northing,easting,elevation
2di=distance,direction
3so=station,offset,elevation,alignmentname,GeometryProjectname
3 TrueorFalse:TheDefineHorizontalCurveSettooldefinesnewcurvesets
butwillnotallowforthemodificationofexistingcurvesetsintheactive
horizontalalignment.
FalseTheDefineHorizontalCurveSettooldefinesnewcurvesetsand
modifiesexistingcurvesetsintheactivehorizontalalignment.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
147
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
30Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
148
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
ExtendtheexistingMeadowParkDrivehorizontalalignmenttoconnecttoa
knowncoordinate.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Creating
HAUsingPIs\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreatingHAUsing
PIs\Task\TaskHAPI.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
149
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:ExtendtheexistingMeadowParkDrivehorizontalalignment.
TheexistingMeadowParkDrivealignmentcurrentlyendsat
N149236.796,E1088363.612[N45487.466,E331733.892].
Theextendedalignmentshouldbeginwithatangentthathasthe
samebearingasthelasttangentoftheexistingalignment.
ThefirstnewPIis374.76[114.23M]feetfromtheendoftheexisting
alignment.
ThesecondnewPIis386.12[117.69M]feetandisS65^4821.5E
fromthefirstnewPI.
ThesecondtothelastPIoftheextendedalignmentis350[106.68M]
feetfromwherethealignmentintersectsBrownWay.HintUsethe
DefineBymethodofDirectionandDistancefromNextPItoassistin
placingthisPI.
ThelasttangentoftheextendedalignmentshouldintersectBrown
Wayata90degree.Hintdrawalineperpendiculartobrownway
about350'inlength(itdoesnothavetobeexact).Whenconstructing
thelastpartofthealignment,youcansnaptotheperpendicularline
thatwaspreviouslydrawn.
TheeasternmostpointonthealignmentwhereittiesintoBrownWay
southoftheculdesacisN149198.65,E1089850.38
[N45470.037,E332187.029].
Thisportionofthealignmentmusthaveaminimumof3curves.
AllofthecurvesshouldhaveaDegreeofCurvature(DOC)of11[35]
degrees(radiusof520.87feet[159.15M]).
Thecompletealignmentshouldbedisplayed,stationed,and
annotatedintheCADfile.
Oncecomplete,savetheGeometryProject.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
150
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Whatisthebearingofthesecondtangentinyourfinalgeometry?
Whatisthelaststationonthealignment?
Whatisthetangentlengthofthelasttangentinyourfinalgeometry?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Questions
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
151
MeadowParkDriveKnownAlignmentPoints
MeadowParkDriveKnownAlignmentPoints
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
152
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
153
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingPIs
154
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingHorizontalAlignments
UsingElements
DuringthislessonyouwilllearntocreateaHorizontalAlignmentusingElements.
CreatinganalignmentusingElementsisoneofanumberofwaystocreate
alignments.Ifyournormalworkingpracticedoesnotusethismethod,youshould
skipthischapter.However,oncethistrainingcourseisended,youwillhavethis
documentandthedatasetsowillbeabletoworkthroughthecontentofthis
chapteratalaterdate.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
155
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
Createhorizontalelements.
Edithorizontalelements.
Checkalignmentintegrity.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
156
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateHA
UsingElements\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileHAElements.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateHA
UsingElements\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeHAElements.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
ExistingSurface: ExistingGround.dtm
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
157
HorizontalElements
HorizontalElements
WhatAreHorizontalElements?
HorizontalelementsareGeometryelementsthataredefinedusingFixed,Float
andFreeparameters.TheyaremoreflexiblethanusingthePImethod,asthey
allowforpartsofthealignmenttocontaindiscontinuitiesandgaps.Theyalso
enabletheusertodesignpartsofthealignmentwithconstraints,whilestill
havingfreeelementswhereneeded.Becausetherecanbegapsinanalignment
definedwithelements,youcandesigntheprojectbyfirstestablishingthe
straightsandcurvesinthemostconstrainedareasandthencompletingtherestof
thealignmentlaterbyfillinginthegaps.
HorizontalalignmentsdefinedusingElementsaregenerallybestsuitedto:
Finaldesignorreconstruction
Brownfielddesign
Designinarestrictedcorridor
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
158
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
HorizontalElements
HorizontalElementTools
ThehorizontalelementtoolsarefoundontheGeometry>HorizontalElement
menu.
ThehorizontalelementtoolscanbeactivatedanddeactivatedusingApplication
AddIns.IftheHorizontalElementtoolsarenotonyourGeometrymenu,select
Tools>ApplicationAddIns.Fromthelistofavailableaddins,selectthecheck
boxnexttotheHorizontalandVerticalElementAddinandclickOK.
Thesecommandsareusedtomodifyhorizontalalignmentsbyadding,copying,
editing,anddeletingindividualelements.
AddFixed/Floating/FreeHorizontalLineplacesalinearhorizontalelement.
AddFixed/Floating/FreeHorizontalCurveplacesahorizontalcurveelement.
DefineSpiraltiestwoexistingcurvesortangentstogetherwithaClothoid,
RICCubicParabola,BiquadraticParabola,Bloss,Sinusoid,orCosinespiral
curve.
ConnectElementsmovesoneelementandconnectsittoasecondelement.
CutElementcutsanexistinghorizontalelementintotwopieces.
JoinElementsjoinstwocoincident,colinearelementstoformasinglenew
element.
MoveElementsmovesanexistinghorizontalelementtoaspecifiedlocation.
CopyElementscopiesapartofanexistingalignmentintotheactive
alignment.
AddFixedElementplacesafixedelementbasedontwoparameters.The
parametersincludebeginningcoordinates,endingcoordinates,length,and
deltaangle.Clothoidspiralscanbeplacedbydefiningdifferentbeginningand
endingradii.Nootherspiraltypescanbeplaced.
EditElementeditsanexistinghorizontalelement.
DeleteElementdeletesaselectedhorizontalelementfromtheactive
horizontalalignment.
CheckIntegrityidentifiesgeometricintegrity,reorderselements,fixes
transpositionsanddeletesextraneouselements.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
159
HorizontalElements
SimplifiedHorizontalElementTools
SimplifiedHorizontalandVerticalElementsaretoolsthatareusedtocreate
geometryelementswithpredefinedsettingsintheactivehorizontaland/or
verticalalignment.Whenusingthesecommands,nodialogboxesappearwhen
usingthesimplifiedhorizontalandverticalelementsbecausethesettingsused
arealreadyspecifiedandcanbechangedbyselectingGeometry>Simplified
HorizontalElement>Settings.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
160
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTips
ProductivityTips
TheformatofthedirectionasabearingisN45^3630.7EordecimalN45.52E.
TheAngleModemayneedtobechangedtoBearingsforthedikeyinto
functionasexpected.
TochangetheAngleMode:
Settings>DesignFile>AngleReadout>DirectionMode
Whenanoffsetorradiusisrequiredthesignofthevaluedefinesthedirection
relativetothealignment.Apositivevaluedefinesanoffsetorcurvetotheright
whenlookingupstation.Anegativevaluedefinesanoffsetorcurvetotheleft.
StatusBar
TheleftcornerofthestatusbarwilldisplayInRoadscommandprompts.These
promptswillassistyouwhenusingInRoadscommandswhichrequireyoutoclick
inaCADVieworenterinformationintotheCADKeyindialog.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
161
FixedHorizontalElements
FixedHorizontalElements
AddFixedLine
Createsafullyconstrainedlinearelementintheactivealignment.
Therearetwomodesforthiscommand.Youcanplacealinearhorizontalelement
betweentwopoints.ThepointscanbedatapointsorcanbespecifiedasNorthing
andEastingpairsinthedialogbox.Oryoucanplacealinearhorizontalelementby
Point,Direction,andDistance.
AddFixedCurve
Createsafullyconstrainedcurveelementintheactivealignment.
Therearetwomodesforthiscommand.Youcandefineahorizontalcurvebytwo
points(startandend)andaradius.Thepointscanbedatapointsorcanbe
specifiedasNorthingandEastingpairsinthedialogbox.Oryoucanplacea
horizontalcurveby3Points(start,end,andpassthrough).
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
162
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FixedHorizontalElements
WhentheSelectInsertionElementcheckboxisenabled,thenewelementis
addedbeforeorafteranexistingelementintheactivealignment.Thereference
elementisselectedduringtheelementplacement.Whenthecheckboxiscleared
thenewelementisplacedattheendofthealignment.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
163
ElementManipulation
ElementManipulation
ChangePositionTools
MoveElementThistoolchangesthepositionofanexistingelement.
ConnectElementsThischangesthepositionofanexistingelementbutitdoesso
byconnectingthebeginningofoneelementtotheendofasecondelement.This
toolensuresthatthetwoelementsshareacommonendpoint.
CopyElementThistoolcopiesoneormoreelements.Youmustidentifythe
alignmenttheelementiscomingfrom,thefirstelementinthealignmenttobe
copied,andthelastelementtobecopied.Allelementsbetweenthefirstandlast
elementarecopied.Ifthesameelementisidentifiedasthefirstandlastelement,
thatsingleelementiscopied.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
164
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ElementManipulation
ModifyElementTools
CutElementsdividestheselectedelementintotwoelements.
EditElementisusedtoeditexistinglinear,circular,andspiralelements.The
elementthatwillbeeditedishighlightedintheCADfile.UsetheSelect,First,
Previous,Next,andLastbuttonstonavigatetotheelementyouwanttoedit.The
start,stop,orbothendsoftheelementscanbeadjusted.Twoimportantoptions
forthistoolcontrolhowconnectingelementsareorarenotmodifiedalongwith
themodifiedelement.
MaintainElementConnectivityotherelementsaremovedtomaintain
connectivityandcolineardirection.
MaintainElementconnectivitywithMinimumMovementtheelementjust
afterthemodifiedelementisadjusted.Thesoftwareattemptstominimizethe
overallmovementofthealignment.
NoOptionSelectedonlytheeditedelementisadjusted.Adiscontinuitywill
existbetweentheeditedelementandthenextelementinthealignment.
DeleteElementisusedtodeleteexistingelements.
JoinElementsjoinstwoelementsintoasingleelement.Thetwoelementsmust
thesametype(linearorcurve),beconnected,andbetangenttobejoined.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
165
ExerciseCreateNewGeometry
ExerciseCreateNewGeometry
CreateaNewGeometryProject
1 SelectFile>New.
2 IntheNewdialog,selecttheGeometrytab.
3 SettheTypetoGeometryProject.
4 EnterRoute1ExtensionforthegeometryprojectName.
5 ClickApply.
CreateaNewHorizontalAlignment
6 IntheNewdialog,changetheTypetoHorizontalAlignment.
7 EnterRoute1ExtensionforthealignmentName.
8 SettheStyletoP_COGO_MainCL.
9 ClickApply.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
166
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FloatingHorizontalElements
FloatingHorizontalElements
AddFloatingLine
Attachesahorizontallinearelementontoanexistingnonlinearelement.
Ifyouselecttheelementnearitsstart,thenewlineattachestothestartofthe
element.Ifyouselecttheelementonitsend,thenewlineattachestotheendof
theelement.
Therearetwomodesforthiscommand.Youcanplacealinearhorizontalelement
bydefiningtheendpointorbyfixingthedirectionanddefiningtheendpoint.
Floatingalineontheendofacurvewillrecomputethelengthoftheendofthe
curveandusethedatapointastheendoftheline.
Floatingalineonthestartofacurvewillrecomputethelengthofthestartofthe
curveandusethedatapointasthestartoftheline.
Afterplacement,thelengthofthecurvetowhichyouareattachingtheline
adjuststomaintaintangencyandcoincidencebetweenthetwoelements.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
167
FloatingHorizontalElements
AddFloatingCurve
Attachesahorizontalcurveelementontoanexistinglinearelement.
Ifyouselectthestartinghalfoftheexistingelement,thecurvewillbeaddedto
thestartingsideoftheexistingelement.Ifyouselecttheendinghalfofthe
existingelement,thecurvewillbeaddedtotheendingsideoftheexisting
element.
Therearetwomodesinthispulldownmenu.Youcandefinethenewhorizontal
curvebyPointandRadiusorbyPointandDirection.
Whenyouselectthiscommand,thesystempromptsyoutoselectanelementby
placingadatapointontheelement.Thatpointservesastheinitialpointforyour
curvehoweveritdoesnotfixthatpointasthetangentpointbetweenthelineand
thecurve.Asyoumovethecursorthecurvefloatsalongthelineelement.The
locationofthecurveendpointdefineswherethecurveisplacedwhichinturn
defineswherethetangentpointislocated.Afterplacement,thelineelementto
whichyouareattachingthecurveadjuststomaintaintangencyandcoincidence
betweenthetwoelements.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
168
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FreeHorizontalElements
FreeHorizontalElements
AddFreeLine
Attachesalinearhorizontalelementbetweentwoexistingnonlinearhorizontal
elements.
Afterplacement,theelementstowhichyouareattachingthelineadjustto
maintaintangencyandcoincidencebetweentheelements.
AddFreeCurve
Definesacurvebetweentwoexistinghorizontalelements.Thecurvecanoptional
includeleadingand/ortrailingtransitions.Thecommandpromptsyoutoselect
thetwoelementsbyidentifyingeachofthemingraphics.
Whenyouplacethetransitionalelement,thetwoelementsconnectedbythe
transitionareadjustedtomaintaintangencyandcoincidencebetweenthe
elements.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
169
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingHorizontalElements
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingHorizontalElements
CreateFixedLines
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>AddFixedLine.
2 IntheAddFixedHorizontalLinedialogbox,makesuretheModeissetto
ByTwoPoints.
3 ClickApply.
4 Placethefirstpointatlocation1andthesecondpointabouthalfway
betweenlocations1and2.
5 Clicktoaccept,thenrightmouseclick.
6 Placeanotherfixedline,withthefirstpointabouthalfwaybetween
location2and3andthesecondpointatlocation3.
7 Clicktoaccept,thenrightmouseclick.
8 RightMouseClickagaintoterminatetheelementplacement.
9 Closethedialog.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
170
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingHorizontalElements
Yourresultsshouldnowappearsimilartowhatisshowninthefollowing
illustration:
CreateCurves
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>AddFreeCurve.
2 SettheRadiusto1000[300],thenclickApply.
3 Selectthefirstelementontheleft,thenthesecondelementontheright.
4 Clicktoaccept.
5 Rightclick,thenclosetheAddFreeHorizontalCurvedialog.
6 ZoomoutintheCADviewsothatpoint4isvisible.
7 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>AddFloatingCurve.
8 EnsuretheModeissettoByPointandRadius.
9 Enter1000[300]fortheRadius,thenclickApply.
Thenegativesigndefinesacurvetotheleftlookingtowardtheendofthe
alignment.Apositivesigndefinesacurvetotheright.
10 ClickApply.
11 Selectthelastelementinthealignment.
12 Fortheendofthecurve,placeapointmidwaybetweenlocations3and4.
13 Clicktoaccept.
14 Rightclick,thenclosetheAddFloatingHorizontalCurvedialog.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
171
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingHorizontalElements
AddFloatingLine
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>AddFloatingLine.
2 EnsuretheModeissettoByPoint.
3 ClickApply.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
4 SelecttheLastcurveinthealignment.
5 Placetheendpointatlocation4.
6 Clicktoaccept.
7 Rightclick,thenclosetheAddFloatingHorizontalLinedialog.
Yourresultsshouldlooksimilartotheillustrationbelow.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
172
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
PrecisionInput
PrecisionInput
WheneverInRoadsisexpectinginputintheCADviewbydataclickingyoucan
substitutetheclickwithaprecisioninput.
Touseprecisioninput,selectUtilities>KeyinfromtheCADmenu.
Therearenospacesusedintheprecisioninputformat.
Theformatofthekeyinsareshownbelow:
ne=northing,easting[,elevation]
di=distance,direction
TheformatofthedirectionasabearingisN45^3630.7EordecimalN45.52E
so=station,offset[,elevation][,alignmentname][,GeometryProjectname]
Offsetstotherightoftheaheadstationingarepositive.Offsetstotheleftof
theaheadstationingarenegative.
Theelevation,alignmentname,andGeometryProjectnameareoptional
parameters;however,theymustbeincludedinthespecifiedorder.Therefore,
ifyouwishtoincludethealignmentname,theelevationmustalsobe
included.Alignmentnamesarecasesensitive.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
173
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingPrecisionKeyins
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingPrecisionKeyins
CreateaHorizontalAlignmentwithPrecision
1 CreateanewHorizontalAlignmentnamedRightTurnLanewiththestyle
P_COGO_Secondary_CL.
Hint:File>New.
2 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>AddFixedLine.
3 SelectthePoint1checkboxandselecttheGraphicSelectionbuttonnext
totheNorthingandEastingfields.
4 IntheCADKeyindialogenterthefollowing:
so=2600,12,0,Route1Extension[so=0800,3.6,0,Route1Extension]
Thedialogdisplayswiththecoordinatesforthefirstpoint.The
coordinatesarecomputedforapoint12feet[3.6meters]rightofstation
26+00[800]ontheRoute1Extensionalignment.
5 SelectthePoint2checkbox.
6 SelecttheGraphicSelectionbuttonnexttotheNorthingandEasting
fields.
7 IntheCADKeyindialogenterthefollowing:
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
174
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingPrecisionKeyins
so=2900,12,0,Route1Extension[so=0830,3.6,0,Route1Extension]
Thedialogdisplayswiththecoordinatesforthefirstpoint.The
coordinatesarecomputedforapoint12feet[3.6meters]rightofstation
29+00[830]ontheRoute1Extensionalignment.
8 ClickApply.
Thefirstelementdisplays.Itislocatedontherightsideoftheexisting
alignmentbetweenpoints2and3.
9 ClicktoAccept.
Thedialogboxreopens.
CreateRampTaper
1 SelectthegraphicselectionbuttonnexttothePoint1Northingand
Eastingfields.
2 IntheCADKeyindialogenterthefollowing:
so=2900,12,0,Route1Extension[so=0830,3.6,0,Route1Extension]
Youcanusetheuparrowonyourkeyboardtodisplaythepreviously
enteredkeyins.
3 SelectthegraphicselectionbuttonnexttothePoint2Northingand
Eastingfields.
4 IntheCADKeyindialogenterthefollowing:
so=3200,24,0,Route1Extension[so=0900,7.2,0,Route1Extension]
5 ClickApply.
Thetaperelementdisplays.
6 ClicktoAccept.
Thedialogboxreopens.
CreateParallelSegment
1 SelectthegraphicselectionbuttonnexttothePoint1Northingand
Eastingfields.
2 IntheCADKeyindialogenterthefollowing:
so=3200,24,0,Route1Extension[so=0900,7.2,0,Route1Extension]
3 SelectthegraphicselectionbuttonnexttothePoint2Northingand
Eastingfields.
4 IntheCADKeyindialogenterthefollowing:
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
175
ExerciseCreateAlignmentusingPrecisionKeyins
so=3400,24,0,Route1Extension[so=0950,7.2,0,Route1Extension]
5 ClickApply.
Thetaperelementdisplays.
6 ClicktoAccept.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Thedialogboxreopens.
7 Closethedialog.
ExtendtheAlignmentby50[10M]
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>EditElement.
2 MakesurethetypeissettoLinear.
3 ClicktheNext>buttononthelowerrightsideofthedialoguntilthelast
elementishighlighted.
4 Atthebottomofthedialog,changethecurrentlengthto250[60].
5 ClickApply,thenclosethedialog.
SaveGeometry
1 SelectFile>SaveAs.
2 SettheSaveastypetoGeometryProjects(*.alg).
3 TypeRoute1ExtensionintheFilenamefield.
4 BrowsetotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateHAUsing
Elements\Practice\folderifitisnotalreadyactive.
5 ClickSave.
6 Closethedialog.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
176
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CheckIntegrity
CheckIntegrity
TheCheckIntegritytoolisusedtoverifytangencyandconnectivitybetweenthe
elementsthatmakeupahorizontalalignment.TheCheckIntegritytoolcanbe
usedonanyalignmentnomatterhowitwascreated.
Thiscommandisdesignedtofixseveraltypesofissuesthatareinherentinthe
design/implementationofHorizontalandVerticalElementcommands.These
issuesareresultsofallowingyouthefreedomtoworkonanypartofthe
alignment.Thesefreedomscancreatediscontinuities,nontangency,and
transpositions.
Toactivatethetool,selectGeometry>HorizontalElement>CheckIntegrity.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
177
ExerciseCheckAlignmentIntegrity
ExerciseCheckAlignmentIntegrity
ChecktheIntegrityoftheAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>HorizontalElement>CheckIntegrity.
2 IntheCheckIntegritydialog,selectthefirstelementatthetopofthelist.
Thefirstelementinthealignmentshouldhighlight.
3 Atthebottomofthedialog,clickNextandreviewtheothertwoelements
inthealignment.
4 Rightclickonthelastelementandreviewtheoptionsinthepopup
menu.
5 Whenfinished,closethedialog.
6 ExittheCADsoftware.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
178
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Createhorizontalelements
Edithorizontalelements
Checkalignmentintegrity
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
179
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtocreateasinglelinear
elementthatistangenttoanexistingcurve?
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
AAddFreeLine
BAddFixedLine
CAddFloatingLine
DAddTangentLinearCommand
2 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtocreateasinglecurve
inbetweentwoexistinglinearelements?
AAddFreeCurve
BAddFixedCurve
CAddFloatingCurve
DBothBandC
3 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtochangethedirectionof
asinglelinearelement?
AInverseDirection
BCheckIntegrity
CThereisnowaytochangethedirectionofasinglelinearelement.
DTheCallBentleyInstituteCommand
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
180
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtocreateasinglelinear
elementthatistangenttoanexistingcurve?
AAddFreeLine
BAddFixedLine
CAddFloatingLine
DAddTangentLinearCommand
2 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtocreateasinglecurvein
betweentwoexistinglinearelements?
AAddFreeCurve
BAddFixedCurve
CAddFloatingCurve
DBothBandC
3 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtochangethedirectionof
asinglelinearelement?
AInverseDirection
BCheckIntegrity
CThereisnowaytochangethedirectionofasinglelinearelement.
DTheCallBentleyInstituteCommand
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
181
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
30Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
182
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
ExtendtheexistingMeadowParkDrivehorizontalalignmenttoconnecttoa
knowncoordinate.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateHA
UsingElements\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateHAUsing
Elements\Task\TaskHAElements.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
183
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:CreateaHorizontalAlignmentusingelements.
TheexistingMeadowParkDrivealignmentcurrentlyendsat
N149236.796,E1088363.612[N45487.466,E331733.892].
Thelastelementoftheexistingalignmentshouldbeextendedby300.
TheeasternmostpointonthealignmentwhereittiesintoBrownWay
southoftheculdesacisN149198.65,E1089850.38
[N45470.037,E332187.029].
ThelastelementinthealignmentisperpendiculartoBrownWay.
Thisportionofthealignmentmusthaveaminimumof3curves.
ThecurvesshouldhaveaDegreeofCurvature(DOC)of11[35]degrees
(radiusof520.87[159.15M]feet).
Thecompletealignmentshouldbedisplayed,stationed,and
annotatedintheCADfile.
Oncecomplete,savetheGeometryProject.
UsetheEditElementcommandtoextendthelasttangentofthe
existingalignmentby300'[95M].
Forthelastelementinthealignment(rememberwiththesetoolsyou
cancreateelementsinanyorder)AddaFixedLineByPoint,Direction
andDistance.ThepointshouldbeN149198.65,E1089850.38
N45470.037,E332187.029]andthedirectionshouldbeperpendicular
toBrownWay(usetheillustrationasaguide)Hint:Youcanalsouse
thegraphicselectiontogetthebearingofBrownWay,thenadd/
subtracttheappropriateangletogetthedirection.Useadistanceof
about310'[100M](itdoesnotneedtobeexact).
Ifnecessary,usetheCheckIntegritycommandtotransposethelast
elementthattiesintoBrownWay.
FinishthealignmentUsingAddFloatingLineorCurveandAddFree
LineorCurve.(Usetheillustrationasaguide.)
Tips
Questions
Whatisthelaststationonthealignment?
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
184
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
185
HorizontalAlignmentDetail
HorizontalAlignmentDetail
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
186
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment
Dec2011
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
187
MeadowParkDriveExampleCompletedAlignment
CreatingHorizontalAlignmentsUsingElements
188
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtocreateprofilesandcrosssections.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
189
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
ProfilesandCrossSections
190
Learnhowtocreateprofiles.
Learnhowtocreatecrosssections.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Profiles
andCrossSections\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileProfilesandCrossSections.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Profiles
andCrossSections\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeProfilesandCrossSections.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\Hemfield
Existing.dtm
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
191
Profiles
Profiles
Profiles
Aprofileisaseriesofelevationsextractedalongabaseline,whichisnormallya
horizontalalignment.Aprofileisagraphofthehorizontalalignmentstationing
versustheelevationsofthesurface.Thealignmentstationingisplottedalongthe
bottomaxisandthesurfaceelevationsareplottedalongtheverticalaxis.
Aprofileiscomprisedoftwoparts,theprofilewindowandtheprofiledata.The
profilewindowconsistsofthebottom,leftandrightaxis,andgridlines.The
profiledataconsistsofsurfacelinesandsurfacefeatures.Theprofiledatacanalso
beupdatedwithnewsurfacedataasitisobtained.
Verticalalignmentscanbedisplayedontheprofileinadditiontothesurface.
Multipleplotsofprofiledatarepresentingdifferentsurfacescanbedisplayedina
singleprofile.Onceaprofileiscreated,verticalalignmentscanthenbecreated
anddisplayed.
ProfilesandCrossSections
192
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreateProfile
CreateProfile
CreateProfile
TheCreateProfilecommandextractselevationdatafromoneormoresurfaces
anddisplaysitalongalinearpath.TheCreateProfilecommandhassettingsthat
definehowtheprofileappears.Whenworkinginaproductionenvironment,very
fewofthesesettingswillneedtobealteredbecausetheywillalreadybedefined
inyourprojectstandards.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
193
CreateProfile
TheCreateProfiledialogboxisorganizedwithatreeandleafinterface.Belowisa
briefdescriptionofthesettingthatyoumayneedtoalter.
GeneralLeaf
Exaggerationspecifiestheverticaltohorizontalexaggerationfor
displayedprofiles.Typically,thehorizontalexaggerationshouldbeleft
at1.0andtheverticaladjustedforthedesiredexaggeration.
Surfacesallowsyoutoselectwhichsurfacestodisplayintheprofile.
AllsurfacescurrentlyloadedinInRoadsarelisted.Youcanselectas
manysurfacestobedisplayedintheprofileifdesired.
SourceLeaf
Alignmentspecifiesthenameofthealignmenttheprofilefollows.
ProfilesandCrossSections
194
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateExistingGroundProfile
ExerciseCreateExistingGroundProfile
ViewTheHorizontalAlignment
1 LocatethealignmentHemfieldRoadintheInRoadsExplorer.
2 RightclickonHemfieldRoadandselectView.
ViewSurface
1 SelectSurface>ViewSurface>Perimeter.
2 EnsuretheSurfaceissettoHemfieldExisting.
3 ClickApply,thenClose.
CreateProfile
1 SelectEvaluation>Profile>CreateProfile.
IfyouareusingtheMetricdataset,selectthePreferencesbuttonandload
thepreferenceDefault_Metric.
2 ClickApplyandfollowtheprompt.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
195
ExerciseCreateExistingGroundProfile
3 IdentifyalocationintheCADdrawingwherethelowerleftcornerofthe
profileislocated(makesureyouallowenoughroomforthewholeprofile
windowsoitdoesntoverlapwithothergraphicelements).
4 ClickClose.
ProfilesandCrossSections
196
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSections
CrossSections
CrossSections
Acrosssectionisa2Dgraphicdisplayofaplanarsectioncutthroughoneormore
3Dsurfaces.CrossSectionsareextractedalongalinearpath,suchasahorizontal
alignment.Theycanbeextractedatanyanglerelativetothelinearpath,butare
typicallyperpendiculartothepath.
Thebottomaxisshowstheoffsetfromthelinearpath.Theverticalaxisshowsthe
elevationsofthesurfaces.
Likeprofiles,acrosssectioniscomprisedoftwoparts,thecrosssectionwindow
andthecrosssectiondata.Thecrosssectionwindowconsistsofthebottom,left
andrightaxislines,andgridlines.Thecrosssectiondataconsistsofsurfacelines
andsurfacefeatures.Thecrosssectiondatacanalsobeupdatedwithnewsurface
dataasitisobtained.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
197
CreateCrossSection
CreateCrossSection
CreateCrossSection
TheCreateCrossSectiontoolextractselevationdatafromoneormoresurfaces
anddisplaysitalongalinearpathperpendicularto,orataspecifiedanglefrom,
analignmentorotherpath.
TheCreateCrossSectiontoolhassettingsthatdefinehowthecrosssections
appear.However,whenworkinginaproductionenvironmentveryfewofthese
settingsneedtobealtered.TheCreateCrossSectiondialogboxisorganizedwith
atreeandleafinterface.Belowisabriefdescriptionofthosesettingsthatyou
mayneedtoalter.
ProfilesandCrossSections
198
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreateCrossSection
Intervalspecifiesthespacingbetweenconsecutivecrosssections.
LeftOffsetdefinestheleftendoftherangeoverwhichtoextract
crosssections.Anegativevalueistotheleftofthealignment.Leftand
rightoffsetsaredeterminedbasedonincreasingstations.
RightOffsetdefinestherightendoftherangeoverwhichtoextract
crosssections.Apositivevalueistotherightofthealignment,based
onincreasingstations.
VerticalExaggerationspecifiestheverticalexaggerationfor
displayingcrosssections.Valuesgreaterthan1.0forthisparameter
increasetheexaggeration.
Surfacesallowsyoutoselectwhichsurfacestodisplayinthecross
section.AllsurfacescurrentlyloadedinInRoadsarelisted.Youcan
enablemultiplesurfacestobedisplayedinthecrosssectionifdesired.
CreateCrossSection>SourceLeaf
Alignmentspecifiesthenameofthealignmenttheprofilefollows.
CrossSectionAnnotation,UpdateCrossSectionandEndAreaVolumesare
coveredinanotherlesson.
CreateCrossSection>GeneralLeaf
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
199
ViewingCrossSections
ViewingCrossSections
ViewingCrossSections
CrossSectionscanbeviewedusingtheCrossSectionViewer.ToaccesstheCross
SectionViewer,selectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSectionViewer.
Therearetwowaystoviewcrosssections:
MovieMode
Moviemodeautomaticallydisplayseachcrosssectioninthelistoneatatime.
ThespeedanddisplayofthecrosssectionsarecontrolledbytheZoomFactor
andtheTimesettings.ClicktheRunbuttontostarttheMovie.
CrossSectionsList
Toviewacrosssectionataspecificstation,selectthatstationfromtheCross
Sectionslist.ThecrosssectionisfittoyourCADviewbasedontheZoom
Factor.TheUpandDownarrowsonyourkeyboardcanbeusedtovieweach
crosssectionfromthelistinsuccession.
ProfilesandCrossSections
200
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
CreateCrossSections
1 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSections.
2 OpentheCreateCrossSectionfolderintheCrossSectionsdialog.
3 SelecttheGeneralleaf.
4 IfyouareusingtheMetricdataset,clickthePreferencesbuttonandload
thepreferencenamedDefault_Metric.
5 Makesuretheleftoffsetissetto50[40].
6 Makesuretherightoffsetissetto50[40].
7 ClickApplyandfollowtheprompts.
8 IdentifyalocationintheCADdrawingforthelowerleftcornerofthecross
sections(makesureyouallowenoughroomforthewholecrosssection
setsoitdoesntoverlapwithothergraphicelements).Thecrosssections
display.
9 ClickClose.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
201
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
ViewtheCrossSections
1 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSectionViewer.
2 SelectaCrossSectionfromthelist.
Thecrosssectionselectedisimmediatelydisplayedonthescreen.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
3 Selectthefirstcrosssectionatthetopofthestationlist.Presstheupor
downarrowsonyourkeyboardtoviewothercrosssectionsinthelist.
4 IntheMovieModesection,settheTimeto.3andclickRun.
Thecrosssectionsdisplayoneatatimeintheview.
TheESCkeycanbeusedtoexitoutofmoviemode.
5 Closethedialog.
6 ExittheCADsoftware.
ProfilesandCrossSections
202
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Createprofiles
Createcrosssections
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
203
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:Aprofileisaseriesofelevationsextractedalongabaseline.
True
False
2 TrueorFalse.TheCreateProfilecommandextractselevationdatafrom
onlyonesurfaceatatimeanddisplaysitalongalinearpath.
True
False
3 TrueorFalse.CrosssectionsmustbeextractedalonganInRoads
alignment.
True
False
ProfilesandCrossSections
204
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
TrueInRoadscalculatestheelevationfromasurfaceeachtimethe
baselineintersectsatriangleedge.Thebaselineiscommonlyahorizontal
alignmentbutprofilescanalsobecreatedalonggraphicalelementsor
dynamicallyselectedpoints.
2 TrueorFalse:TheCreateProfilecommandextractselevationdatafrom
onlyonesurfaceatatimeanddisplaysitalongalinearpath.
FalseInRoadsprofilescanbecreatedfrommultiplesurfacesatonetime.
3 TrueorFalse:CrosssectionsmustbeextractedalonganInRoads
alignment.
FalseCrosssectionscanbeextractedalongdifferenttypesofbaselines
includingalignments,graphics,anddynamicallyselectedpoints.
1 TrueorFalse:Aprofileisaseriesofelevationsextractedalongabaseline.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
205
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
15Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
ProfilesandCrossSections
206
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
CreateanexistinggroundprofileandcrosssectionsalongMeadowParkDrive
alignment.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Profiles
andCrossSections\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\ProfilesandCross
Sections\Task\TaskProfilesandCrossSections.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProfilesandCrossSections
207
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createanexistingprofileandexistingcrosssections.
Createanexistinggroundprofilealongtheentirelengthofthe
MeadowParkDrivealignment.Placetheprofiletotherightofthe
existingbasemap.
Createasetofexistinggroundcrosssectionsalongtheentirelengthof
theMeadowParkDrivealignment.
Thecrosssectionsshouldbecreatedevery50feet[10M].Placethe
crosssectionsabovetheprofile.
BONUSCreateasinglecrosssectionsetthatspecifiescrosssections
thatare100feet[30M]wide(50[15M]leftand50[15M]right)
betweenstation15+51.15[1+551.15]and26+00[2+200]and250
[40M]feetwide(100[20M]leftand150[20M]right)between
station26+00[2+200]andtheendofthealignment.
Questions
Howmanyfeet[meters]ofgridonthetopandbottomisemptyonthe
profile(thisiscalledWIndowClearance)?
Howmanysurfacescanbedisplayedonasingleprofile?
Howmanyfeet[meters]ofgridonthetopandbottomisemptyonthe
crosssections(thisiscalledWIndowClearance)?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
ProfilesandCrossSections
208
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsing
PIs
Inthischapter,wewilllearnabouthowtocreateverticalalignmentsusing
precisioninput.Wewillthencreate,displayandannotateaverticalalignment.
CreatingaverticalalignmentusingthePIcommandsisoneofanumberofways
tocreateverticalalignments.Ifyournormalworkingpracticedoesnotusethis
method,youshouldskipthischapter.However,oncethistrainingcourseisended,
youwillhavethisdocumentandthedatasetsoyouwillbeabletoworkthrough
thecontentofthischapteratalaterdate.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
209
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
Learnaboutverticalalignments.
Createverticalalignmentsusingprecisioninput.
Editverticalpointsofintersection(PIs)anddefineverticalcurves.
Annotateaverticalalignment.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
210
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Creating
VAUsingPIs\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileVerticalPIs.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Creating
VAUsingPIs\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeVAPI.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\Hemfield
Existing.dtm
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
211
WhatisaVerticalAlignment?
WhatisaVerticalAlignment?
VerticalAlignments
Averticalalignmentisaseriesoflinear,circularorparabolicgeometryelements.
Connectedtogether,theelementsformaverticalalignment.Thevertical
alignmentfollowsthepathdefinedbyahorizontalalignment.
Becauseofitsdependenceonthehorizontalalignment,averticalalignmentisa
childofthehorizontalalignmentinthegeometryprojectstructure.Each
horizontalalignmentcanhavemultipleverticalalignments.Ahorizontal
alignmentmustexistbeforeaverticalalignmentcanbedefined.
Allverticalalignmentsunderthesamehorizontalalignmentmusthaveunique
names.Twoverticalalignmentsunderdifferenthorizontalalignmentscanhave
thesamename.
VerticalalignmentsarecreatedwiththeFile>Newcommand.IntheNewdialog,
clicktheGeometrytab.IntheTypefield,selectVerticalAlignment.Makesure
thatyouhavethecorrectactivehorizontalalignmentbecausethevertical
alignmentiscreatedasachildoftheactivehorizontalalignment.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
212
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VerticalAlignmentCreation
VerticalAlignmentCreation
VerticalAlignments
Justlikehorizontalalignments,verticalalignmentscanbecreatedfromgraphics
orfromVerticalCurveSettools.Aprofilemustbecreatedtousethevertical
curvesettools.
PrecisionInputKeyIns
Twoadditionalprecisionkeyinsareusefulforverticalalignments.Likethe
horizontalprecisioninputkeyins,therearenospacesallowedintheformat.
se=station,elevation
dg=distance,grade
Theformatforthegradeisapercentage.Forexample,thegradecanbe4%or
0.04.Anegativegradeisdownhillandapositivegradeisuphill.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
213
AddingVerticalPIs
AddingVerticalPIs
VerticalCurveSetTools
TheVerticalCurveSettoolsareusedtoaddandmodifyverticalalignmentPIsand
curves.Thesetoolsworkverysimilartotheirhorizontalalignmentcounterparts.
AddVerticalPI
TheAddVerticalPItoolisusedtoaddanewPIinanemptyverticalalignment,or
tothebeginningorendofanexistingverticalalignment.
ThistoolhasfouroptionalparameterswhicharesetontheGeometry>Vertical
CurveSet>DynamicSettingsdialog.Thesesettingsinfluencethedynamic
positionofthecursorwhileusingthiscommand.TheverticalPIpositionis
incrementedorroundedbythevaluesspecifiedwhentheyareenabled.Ifnoneof
theoptionsareenabled,noroundingorincrementingisdone.
Stationwhenenabled,thestationisincremented.Thedatapointvalueis
rounded(upordown,tothenearestvalue)suchthatitsstationisevenly
divisiblebythespecifiedvalue.Forexample,arawstationvalueof16+17.82
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
214
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
AddingVerticalPIs
Elevationwhenenabled,theelevationisincremented.Thedatapointvalue
isrounded(upordown,tothenearestvalue)suchthatitselevationisevenly
divisiblebythespecifiedvalue.Forexample,arawelevationof1078.278
roundsto1080withanelevationintervalof10.Ifthecheckboxisclearedorif
theintervaliszero,theelevationisnotincremented.
Gradewhenenabled,thegradeisincremented.Thedatapointvalueis
rounded(upordown,tothenearestvalue)suchthatitsgradeisevenly
divisiblebythespecifiedvalue.Ifthecheckboxisclearedoriftheintervalis
zero,thegradeisnotincremented.
Distancewhenenabled,thedistanceisincremented.Thelengthofthe
verticalcurveisrounded(upordowntothenearestvalue)suchthatthe
lengthisevenlydivisiblebythespecifiedvalue.Ifthecheckboxisclearedorif
theintervaliszero,thecurvelengthisnotincremented.
Theconstraintparameterdefineshowthecurvelengthiscalculated.
LengthofCurverateofchange(r(g2g1)/L)
Kvalue(K=l/(g2g1)).
roundsto16+00withastationintervalof50.Ifthecheckboxisclearedorif
theintervaliszero,thestationisnotincremented.Thisoptionalsoworkswith
stationequations.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
215
ExerciseCreateaNewVerticalAlignment
ExerciseCreateaNewVerticalAlignment
Nowthatwehavecreatedourprofile,thenextstepwouldbetodesign
theverticalalignment.Likeahorizontalalignment,onewaytocreatea
verticalalignmentistocreateaverticalalignmentfromgraphics.
CreateaNewVerticalAlignment
1 SelectFile>New.
2 SelecttheGeometrytab.
3 SettheTypetoVerticalAlignment.
4 IntheNamefield,typeHemfieldVertical.
5 IntheDescriptionfield,typePracticeVerticalAlignment.
6 FortheStyle,selectP_Cogo_PropVertical.
7 ClickApply,thenclickClose.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
216
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaNewVerticalAlignment
AddVerticalPIs
1 Makesureyouhaveaprofileandthatitisvisible.Ifnot,createoneand
zoomintothelefthalf(orthird)oftheprofile.
2 SelectGeometry>VerticalCurveSet>AddPI.
InRoadspromptsyoutoidentifythefirstpoint.Thisfirstpointwillbe
enteredwithastationelevationkeyintoaccuratelylocatethepoint.
3 IntheCADKeyinfield,typese=2345.78,208.0[63.40].
ThefirstPIisplacedatstation23+45.78[2+345.78]andelevation208.0
[63.40].
4 PressEnter.
InRoadspromptsyoutoidentifythenextpointorrejecttheprevious
point.Thenextpointwillbeenteredwithadistancegradekeyin.
5 Enterdg=600.0[182.92],0.03.
Distanceof600[182.92M]ftanddownhillgradeof3%.
6 PressEnter.
7 Ifnecessary,zoomouttoseethegraphics.
FortheremainingPVIs,wewillgraphicallypickthem.
8 ClicknearthetopoftheprofilearoundStation46+50[3+050].
Itdoesnthavetobeexact,butfollowtheexistingground.
YoucanuseCADViewtoolsinthemiddleofInRoadscommand.Whenyou
aredonewiththeviewmanipulation,rightclickandInRoadswillbringyou
backtothelaststeppriortoyourviewcommand.
9 Placeanotherdatapointattheendofourprofileneartheexistingground
aroundStation70+68[3+770].
10 Placeanotherdatapointjusttotherightofthelastpointbutstillinside
theprofilewindow.
11 Rightclicktwicetoresetoutofthecommand.
12 ClosetheAddVerticalPIdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
217
EditingtheVerticalAlignment
EditingtheVerticalAlignment
InsertPI
TheInsertPItoolplacesaverticalpointofintersectionbetweentwoexisting
verticalPIsontheactiveverticalalignment.
SelecttheexistingverticalalignmentatthepointwhereyouwanttheinsertedPI
tobelocated.Youarethenpromptedtoacceptorrejectthiselement.Acceptthe
element,andthealignmentisdynamicallyattachedtothecursor.Youcanthen
definethelocationofthenewPI,eithergraphicallyorbyprecisionkeyin.After
youdefinethelocationoftheinsertedPI,youmustacceptorrejecttheoverall
solution.Dependingonthespecifications,thewarningmessageSolution
Overlapmaydisplay.
Beforeyoucanusethiscommand,youmusthaveanactivegeometryproject,
activehorizontalalignment,andactiveverticalalignment.Youmustfirstplacea
profilewindowintheCADfile.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
218
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
EditingtheVerticalAlignment
MovePI
TheMovePItoolrepositionspointsofintersectionontheactivevertical
alignment.AnycurvesatthemovedverticalPIarerecomputedandupdated.
WhenyouclickApply,youarepromptedtoidentifyanelementoftheactive
verticalalignment.SelecttheverticalPIontheverticalalignmentyouwantto
move.Youarepromptedtoacceptorrejectthispoint.Whenyouacceptthe
point,itisdynamicallyattachedtoyourcursor.Specifyalocationforthemoved
elementeithergraphicallyorbyprecisionkeyin.Youarepromptedtoacceptor
rejecttheoverallsolution.Dependingonthespecifications,thewarningmessage
SolutionOverlapsmaybedisplayed.
DeletePI
TheDeletePItoolremovespointsofintersectionandtheassociatedvertical
curvesfromtheactiveverticalalignment.
WhenyouclickApply,youarepromptedtoidentifyanelementoftheactive
verticalalignment.SelecttheverticalPIontheverticalalignmentyouwantto
delete.TheselectedverticalPIandanyelementsaffectedbythedeletionwill
updatetotemporarilyreflecttheproposedsolution.Youarethenpromptedto
acceptorrejecttheoverallsolution.Whenyouacceptthesolution,theverticalPI
isdeletedfromtheactiveverticalalignment.Anytangentsorcurvesconnectedto
theverticalPIarealsodeleted.IfthedeletedverticalPIhadtwotangents
connectedtoit,thentheverticalPIsontheoppositeendsofthosetangentsare
connectedwithanewtangent.IfcurvesexistattheneighboringverticalPIs,they
arerecomputedusingthepointofintersectionandtheconstraintsyouselected
onthedialogbox.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
219
ExerciseEdittheVerticalAlignment
ExerciseEdittheVerticalAlignment
InsertVerticalPI
InsertaPIaroundStation63+00[3+545].
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalCurveSet>InsertPI.
2 GraphicallyselectthealignmentnearStation63+00[3+545].
3 GraphicallylocatethenewPIaroundStation63+00[3+545]andnearthe
existingground.
4 Clicktoaccepttheoverallsolution.
InsertanotherPVIatStation50+00[3+200].
5 GraphicallyselectthealignmentataroundStation50+00[3+200].
6 GraphicallylocatethenewPIaroundStation50+00[3+200]andnearthe
existingground.
7 Clicktoaccepttheoverallsolution.
8 Rightclicktoterminatethecommand.
MoveVerticalPI
MovethelastPVIinserted.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
220
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseEdittheVerticalAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalCurveSet>MovePI.
2 IdentifythePIthatyoujustinsertedatStation50+00[3+200].
3 GraphicallylocatethePIaroundStation52+00[3+215]andnearthe
existingground.
5 Rightclicktoterminatethecommand.
DeleteVerticalPI
DeletethelastPVIofthealignment(aroundStation71+00[3+790]).
1 Pantotheendoftheprofile.
2 SelectGeometry>VerticalCurveSet>DeletePI.
3 GraphicallyselectthelastPIofthealignment(aroundStation71+00
[3+780]).
4 Clicktoaccepttheoverallsolution.
5 Rightclicktoterminatethecommand.
YoujusteditedyourverticalalignmentbyusingtheInsertVerticalPI,
MoveVerticalPIandDeleteVerticalPItools.Itisagoodpracticetosave
thegeometryprojectafteryoumakeanychanges.
6 SelectFile>Save>GeometryProject.
4 Clicktoaccepttheoverallsolution.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
221
DefineVerticalCurveSet
DefineVerticalCurveSet
DefineVerticalCurveSet
TheDefineVerticalCurveSettooldefinesnewcurvesetsandmodifiesexisting
curvesetsintheactiveverticalalignment.Theacceptedsolutionisdisplayedin
theCADfile.Bydefault,thefirsttimeyouinvokethistool,thecurveinformation
shownisthatofthefirstcurveofthealignment.
Beforeyouusethiscommand,youmusthaveanactivegeometryproject,active
horizontalalignment,andactiveverticalalignment.Youmustalsohaveaprofile
windowdisplayedintheCADfile.
Curvescanbedefinedbyseveralmethods,butthetwomostcommonareLength
ofCurveandPassthrough.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
222
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseDefineVerticalCurves
ExerciseDefineVerticalCurves
NowthatwehavecreatedourPVIs,thenextstepistodefinevertical
curves.
DefineVerticalCurve
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalCurveSet>DefineCurve.
2 Enter200[100]forLengthofCurve.
3 ClickApply.
Didyouseethecurveintheprofile?
4 ClickNext.
5 Enter800[60]forLengthofCurve.
6 ClickApply.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
223
ExerciseDefineVerticalCurves
AdjustingVerticalCurve
Whatifyoumeanttoenter400[65]insteadof800[60]?Andwhatifthe
verticalPIissupposedtobeatStation46+00[3+060]?
1 Enter46+00[3+060]forStation.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
2 Enter400[65]forLengthofCurve.
3 ClickApply.
YoujustmovedthePVItoStation46+00[3+060](elevationunchanged)
andplaceda400[65M]verticalcurveatthatlocation.
ContinueDefiningVerticalCurves
1 ClickNext.
2 Enter200[95]forLengthofCurve.
3 ClickApply.
Ifyouweretoenteralengthof1000here,thecurvewouldnotchange
becausethelengthwouldbetoobig.ThepromptwouldsaySolution
overlapsorcontainsdiscontinuities.
4 ClickNext.
TheNextbuttonisnowgrayedout.Thisisbecausetherearenomore
curvestodefine.
IfthePreviousbuttonisgrayedout,itmeansyouareatthefirstcurveof
thealignment.
DefineaVerticalCurvePassingThroughaPoint
1 SelectPassthroughfortheCalculatedByoption.
2 Enter63+25[3+595.28]fortheStation.
3 Enter175.62[52.73]fortheElevation.
4 ClickApply.
AcurvewasjustcreatedthathasapointoncurveatStation
63+25[3+595.28]andElevation175.62[52.73].
ThereadoutofthePassthroughStationandElevationfieldsisconverted
tothelowpointofasagcurveorthehighpointofacrestcurveafter
Applyisclicked.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
224
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseDefineVerticalCurves
EditthelocationofaVerticalCurve
1 NavigatebacktothecurveataroundStation52+00[3+215]usingthe
Previousbutton.
2 SelectLengthofCurvefortheCalculatedByoption.
3 Ifthestationisnotatafullstation,changeitto52+00[3+215].Ifitis,
changeitto52+05[3+215.10].
4 ClickApplyandthenClose.
Youjusteditedthecurve.Youcouldgobackandeditthecurveatanytime
usingthistool.
5 Fittheprofilewindowyouareworkingonintheviewwindowtovisually
reviewyourverticalalignment.
Youhavejustfinisheddefiningyourverticalalignment.
Youwillnowsave,review,displayandannotatethealignment.
6 SelectFile>Save>GeometryProjectorrightclickontheHemfield
GeometryProjectintheInRoadsExplorerWindowandselectSave.
ReviewVerticalAlignment
1 Rightclickontheverticalalignment(intheInRoadsExplorerWindow)and
selectRevieworselectGeometry>ReviewVertical.
Likereviewingthehorizontalalignment,youcaneitherreviewthevertical
alignmentinitsentiretyorreviewthealignmentoneelementatatime.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
225
VerticalAnnotation
VerticalAnnotation
ViewVerticalAlignment
Averticalalignmentcaneasilybeviewedbyrightclickingonthevertical
alignmentintheInRoadsExplorerWindowandselectingView,orbyselecting
Geometry>ViewGeometry>ActiveVerticalcommand.
AnnotateVerticalAlignment
TheAnnotateVerticalAlignmentcommanddisplaysandannotatesverticalpoint
andalignmentinformation,suchastangentgradesandverticalcurve
information.
IntheMaintab,identifytheverticalalignmentyouwanttoannotate(remember
thattheverticalalignmentisachildofthehorizontalalignment)andselectthe
profilesetyouwanttoannotate.
Ifyouhavemorethanoneprofilesetdisplayed,makesureyouhavethecorrect
profilesetselected;otherwise,youwillnotseetheverticalannotationwhereyou
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
226
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VerticalAnnotation
expectit.Ifyouknowthenameoftheprofileset,youcanselectitfromthepull
downlist;otherwise,youcouldusethegraphiclocatebutton.Clickonthegraphic
selectbuttonandidentifytheprofilesetyouwanttoannotate.
TheCurvestabcontrolstheverticalannotationofthecurves.
TheTangentstabcontrolstheverticalannotationofthetangents.
TheAffixestabisusedtodefineprefixesandsuffixesforthedifferenttypesof
annotation.
ThePointstabdefineshowthepointsontheverticalalignmentareannotated.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
227
ExerciseAnnotatetheVerticalAlignment
ExerciseAnnotatetheVerticalAlignment
ViewtheVerticalAlignment
1 RightclickonHemfieldVerticalintheInRoadsExplorer.
2 SelectView.
ViewtheVerticalAnnotation
1 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>VerticalAnnotation.
2 ClickApply.
Theverticalalignmentisnowannotated.
3 Closethedialogbox.
4 ExittheCADsoftware.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
228
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Understandverticalalignments.
Createverticalalignmentsusingprecisioninput
Editverticalpointsofintersection(PIs)anddefineverticalcurves
Annotateaverticalalignment
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
229
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:Ahorizontalalignmentmustexistbeforeavertical
alignmentcanbedefined.
True
False
2 Listtwoprecisionkeyinsforverticalalignments.
1__________
2__________
3 Whichofthefollowingisnotavalidmethodfordefiningaverticalcurve?
ALengthofCurve
BPassThroughPoint
CUnsymmetricalLength
DCircularCurve
EK=L/(g2g1)
4 Whichofthefollowingcommandswouldbethebestchoicetoannotate
curveandtangentinformationonanentireverticalalignmentinone
operation?
AGeometry>ViewGeometry>ActiveVertical
BGeometry>ViewGeometry>VerticalAnnotation
CEvaluation>Profile>AnnotateProfile
DEvaluation>Profile>AnnotateFeatureinProfile
EDrafting>PlaceProfileNote
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
230
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:Ahorizontalalignmentmustexistbeforeavertical
alignmentcanbedefined.
TrueInRoadsverticalalignmentsarechildrenofahorizontalalignment
andthuscannotbecreateduntilthehorizontalalignmentisdefined.
2 Listtwoprecisionkeyinsforverticalalignments.
1se=station,elevation
2dg=distance,grade
3 Whichofthefollowingisnotavalidmethodfordefiningaverticalcurve?
DCircularCurve
ThereareseveralmethodsofdefiningverticalcurvesinInRoads,but
circularcurveisnotoneofthem.Circularcurvesaredefinedforhorizontal
curvesonly.
4 Whichofthefollowingcommandswouldbethebestchoicetoannotate
curveandtangentinformationonanentireverticalalignmentinone
operation?
BGeometry>ViewGeometry>VerticalAnnotation
TheVerticalAnnotationcommandwouldbethemostappropriatechoice
forbulkannotation.Thiscommandannotatesthepoints,tangents,and
curvesinasingleoperation.Thereareothercommandsthatalsoprovided
annotationcapabilitiesthatcanbeusefulinsomesituationsbutthe
VerticalAnnotationcommandistypicallythebestchoiceforgeneral
annotation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
231
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
30Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
232
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
CreateanewverticalalignmentforMeadowParkDrive.
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Creating
VAUsingPIs\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreatingVAUsing
PIs\Task\TaskVAPI.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
SourceData
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
233
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:CreateanewverticalalignmentforMeadowParkDrive.
HintRequirementsarenotnecessarilyinastepbysteporder,soread
themcarefullybeforeyoubegin.
Defineaverticalalignmentwith6verticalPIsand4paraboliccurves.
Thebeginningoftheverticalalignmentwillbeatstation15+51.15
[1+551.15]andelevation201.072[61.29].
Themaximumgradeshouldnotexceed3%.
ThefirstverticalcurvesPIisatStation26+00[1+870.84]andelevation
204.00[62.18].
ThenextverticalcurvesPIis500[152M]and1.8%fromthefirst
verticalcurves.
ThethirdverticalcurvesPIisatStation37+00[2+206.13]and
elevation181.00[55.17].
TheverticalalignmenthastopassthroughSta.25+25[1+850]and
elevation203.00[61.86].
OneoftheverticalcurvesPIisatSta.40+00[2+297.56]andElevation
178.00[54.25].
Theverticalalignmenthastohavea4[1.2M]clearanceovera24
[600mm]drainagepipethathasaninvertelevationof172.70[53.28]
atSta.40+50[2+315](ignorethicknessofpipe).
Theminimumlengthofverticalcurveis200[60M].
Designthealignmentasclosetotheexistinggroundaspossible.
Theendoftheverticalalignmentwillbeatstation41+65.75
[2+348.08]andelevation179.71[54.78].
TheproposedalignmentshouldbedisplayedandannotatedintheCAD
file.
BesuretosavetheGeometryProjectwiththenewverticalalignment.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
234
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Whatisthegradeofthefirsttangentintheverticalalignment?
Whatistheflattestgradeofyouralignment?
Whatisthestationandelevationofthelowestpointofthealignment?
Whatisthestationandelevationofthehighestpointofthe
alignment?
Whatisthelengthofthelongestverticalcurve?
Whatisthelengthofthelastcurve?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Questions
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
235
ReviewTask
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingPIs
236
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsing
Elements
DuringthislessonyouwilllearntocreateaVerticalAlignmentusingElements.
TheElementscapabilityisoneofanumberofwaystocreateverticalalignments.
Ifyournormalworkingpracticedoesnotusethismethod,youshouldskipthis
chapter.However,oncethistrainingcourseisended,youwillhavethisdocument
andthedatasetandwillbeabletoworkthroughthecontentofthechapterata
laterdate.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
237
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
Createverticalelements.
Editverticalelements.
Checkalignmentintegrity.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
238
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateVA
UsingElements\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileVAElements.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfiekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateVA
UsingElements\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeVAElements.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\Hemfield
Existing.dtm
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
239
VerticalAlignments
VerticalAlignments
VerticalAlignments
Averticalalignmentisaseriesoflinear,circularorparabolicgeometryelements.
Connectedtogether,theelementsformaverticalalignment.Thevertical
alignmentfollowsthepathdefinedbyahorizontalalignment.
Becauseofitsdependenceonthehorizontalalignment,averticalalignmentisa
childofthehorizontalalignmentinthegeometryprojectstructure.Each
horizontalalignmentcanhavemultipleverticalalignments.Ahorizontal
alignmentmustexistbeforeaverticalalignmentcanbedefined.
Allverticalalignmentsunderthesamehorizontalalignmentmusthaveunique
names.Twoverticalalignmentsunderdifferenthorizontalalignmentscanhave
thesamename.
VerticalalignmentsarecreatedwiththeFile>Newcommand.IntheNewdialog
box,clickontheGeometrytab.InType,selectVerticalAlignment.Makesure
thatyouhavethecorrectactivehorizontalalignmentbecausethevertical
alignmentiscreatedasachildoftheactivehorizontalalignment.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
240
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VerticalElements
VerticalElements
WhatAreVerticalElements?
GeometryelementsaredefinedusingFixed,FloatandFreeparameters.Theyare
moreflexiblethanthePImethod,astheyallowforpartsofthealignmentto
containdiscontinuitiesandgaps.Theyalsoenabletheusertodesignpartsofthe
alignmentwithconstraintswhilestillhavingfreeelementswhereneeded.
Becausetherecanbegapsinanalignmentdefinedwithelements,youcandefine
thealignmentfortheprojectbyfirstestablishingthestraightsandcurvesinthe
mostconstrainedareas,andthencompletetherestofthealignmentlaterby
fillinginthegaps.
VerticalalignmentsdefinedusingElementsaregenerallybestsuitedto:
Finaldesignorreconstruction
Brownfielddesign
Designinarestrictedcorridor
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
241
VerticalElements
VerticalElementTools
TheverticalelementtoolsarefoundontheGeometry>VerticalElementmenu.
ThehorizontalelementtoolscanbeactivatedanddeactivatedusingApplication
AddIns.IftheHorizontalElementtoolsarenotonyourGeometrymenu,select
Tools>ApplicationAddIns.Fromthelistofavailableaddins,selectthe
HorizontalandVerticalElementAddincheckboxandclickOK.
Thesecommandsareusedtomodifyverticalalignmentsbyadding,copying,
editing,anddeletingindividualelements.
AddFixed/Floating/FreeVerticalLineplacesalinearverticalelement.
AddFixed/Floating/FreeVerticalCurveplacesaverticalcurveelement.
ConnectElementsmovesoneelementandconnectsittoasecondelement.
CutElementcutsanexistinghorizontalelementintotwopieces.
JoinElementsjoinstwocoincident,colinearelementstoformasinglenew
element.
MoveElementsmovesanexistinghorizontalelementtoaspecifiedlocation.
CopyElementscopiesapartofanexistingalignmentintotheactive
alignment.
AddFixedElementplacesafixedelementbasedontwoparameters.The
parametersincludebeginningstation/elevation,endingstationelevation,and
deltaangle.
EditElementeditsanexistinghorizontalelement.
DeleteElementdeletesaselectedverticalelementfromtheactive
horizontalalignment.
CheckIntegrityidentifiesgeometricintegrity,reorderselements,fixes
transpositionsanddeletesextraneouselements.
SimplifiedVerticalElementTools
SimplifiedVerticalElementsaretoolsthatareusedtocreategeometryelements
withpredefinedsettingsintheactiveverticalalignment.Nodialogboxesappear
whenusingthesimplifiedverticalelementsbecausethesettingsusedarealready
specified.TheycanbechangedbyselectingGeometry>SimplifiedVertical
Element>Settings.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
242
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FixedVerticalElements
FixedVerticalElements
AddFixedLine
Createsafullyconstrainedlinearelementintheactivealignment.
Therearetwomodesforthiscommand:
Youcanplacealinearverticalelementbetweentwopoints.Thepointscanbe
datapointsorcanbespecifiedasStationandElevationpairsinthedialogbox.
YoucanplacealinearverticalelementbyPoint,Grade,andDistance.
AddFixedCurve
Createsafullyconstrainedcurveelementintheactivealignment.
Therearetwomodesforthiscommand:
YoucandefineaverticalcurvebytwopointsandeitheranRorKvalue.The
pointscanbedatapointsorcanbespecifiedasStationandElevationpairsin
thedialogbox.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
243
FixedVerticalElements
Youcanplaceaverticalcurveby3Points.
WhentheSelectInsertionElementcheckboxisselected,thenewelementis
addedbeforeorafteranexistingelementintheactivealignment.Thereference
elementisselectedduringelementplacement.Whenthecheckboxiscleared,
thenewelementisplacedattheendofthealignment.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
244
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ElementManipulation
ElementManipulation
ChangePositionTools
MoveElementchangesthepositionofanexistingelement.
ConnectElementschangesthepositionofanexistingelementbutdoessoby
connectingthebeginningofoneelementtotheendofasecondelement.This
toolensuresthatthetwoelementsshareacommonendpoint.
CopyElementcopiesoneormoreelements.Youmustidentifythealignment
theelementiscomingfrom,thefirstelementinthealignmenttobecopied,and
thelastelementtobecopied.Allelementsbetweenthefirstandlastelementare
copied.Ifthesameelementisidentifiedasthefirstandlastelement,thatsingle
elementiscopied.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
245
ElementManipulation
ModifyElementTools
CutElementsdividestheselectedelementintotwoelements.
JoinElementsjoinstwoelementsintoasingleelement.Thetwoelementsmust
bethesametype(linearorcurve),beconnected,andbetangenttobejoined.
EditElementisusedtoeditexistingverticallinearelementsandcurves.The
elementthatwillbeeditedishighlightedintheCADfile.UsetheSelect,First,
Previous,Next,andLastbuttonstonavigatetotheelementyouwanttoedit.The
start,stop,orbothendsoftheelementscanbeadjusted.Twoimportantoptions
forthistoolcontrolhowconnectingelementsareorarenotmodifiedalongwith
themodifiedelement.
MaintainConnectedandColinearElementotherelementsaremovedto
maintainconnectivityandremaincolinear.
NoOptionSelectedonlytheeditedelementisadjusted.Adiscontinuitywill
existbetweentheeditedelementandthenextelementinthealignment.
DeleteElementisusedtodeleteexistingelements.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
246
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaNewAlignment
ExerciseCreateaNewAlignment
CreateaNewVerticalAlignment
1 SelectFile>New.
TheNewdialogopens.
2 ChangetheTypetoVerticalAlignment.
3 TypeHemfieldVerticalfortheAlignmentName.
4 SettheStyletoP_COGO_PropVertical.
5 ClickApply.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
247
FloatingVerticalElements
FloatingVerticalElements
AddFloatingLine
Attachesaverticallinearelementontoanexistingverticalcurve.
Therearetwomodesforthiscommand.Youcanplacealinearvertical
elementbyplacingaPointatastationandelevation.Oryoucanplacealinear
verticalelementbygrade.
Youcanplaceafloatinglinebyplacingapointontheselectedverticalcurve.If
youselecttheelementnearitsstart,thenewlineattachestothestartofthe
element.Ifyouselecttheelementonitsend,thenewlineattachestotheend
oftheelement.Oryoucanplaceafloatinglinebygrade.Then,thesystem
displaystheelementatthegradespecifiedinthegradefieldofthedialogbox.
Floatingalineontheendofacurvewillrecomputetheendofthecurveand
usethedatapointastheendoftheline.
Floatingalineonthestartofacurvewillrecomputethestartofthecurveand
usethedatapointasthestartoftheline.
Afterplacement,theelementtowhichyouareattachingthelineadjusts
tomaintaintangencyandcoincidencebetweenthetwoelements.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
248
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FloatingVerticalElements
AddFloatingCurve
Therearetwomodesinthispulldownmenu.Youcandefineahorizontal
curvebyPointandGradeoryoucanplaceaverticalcurvebyPointand
Parameter.Thenthesystemdisplaystheelementusingtheparameters
specifiedinthefieldofthedialogbox.
Whenyouselectthiscommand,thesystempromptsyoutoselectanelement
byplacingadatapointontheelement.Thatpointservesastheinitialpoint
foryourcurve.Ifyourpointisonthestartinghalfoftheexistingelement,the
curvewillbeaddedtothestartingsideoftheexistingelement.Ifyouselect
theendinghalfoftheexistingelement,thecurvewillbeaddedtotheending
sideoftheexistingelement.
Floatingacurveontheendofalineorcurvewillrecomputetheendofthe
lineorcurveandusethedatapointastheendofthecurve.
Floatingacurveonthestartofalineorcurvewillrecomputethestartofthe
lineorcurveandusethedatapointasthestartofthecurve.
Afterplacement,theelementtowhichyouareattachingthecurveadjuststo
maintaintangencyandcoincidencebetweenthetwoelements.
Placesacurvedverticalelementthatisdefinedbyanexistingvertical
element.Youcandefineacurveusingtheexistingverticalelement,apoint,
andanrvalue,kvalueorlength,oryoucandefineitusingtheexistingvertical
element,apoint,andgrade.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
249
FreeVerticalElements
FreeVerticalElements
AddFreeLine
Attachesalinearverticalelementbetweentwoexistingverticalcurves.
Afterplacement,theelementstowhichyouareattachingthelineadjust
tomaintaintangencyandcoincidencebetweentheelements.
AddFreeCurve
Definesacurvebetweentwoexistingverticalelements.Thecommand
promptsyoutoselectthetwoelementsbyidentifyingeachofthemin
graphics.
Whenyouplacethetransitionalelement,thetwoelements
connectedbythetransitionareadjustedtomaintaintangency
andcoincidencebetweentheelements.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
250
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateVerticalElements
ExerciseCreateVerticalElements
AddFixedLine
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalElement>AddFixedLine.
2 IntheAddFixedLinedialog,changetheModetoByTwoPoints.
3 SelectthefirstStation/Elevationcheckbox.
4 Setthestationandelevationtothefollowing:
Station23+45.78[2+345.78]
Elevation208.00[63.40]
5 SelectthesecondStation/Elevationcheckbox.
6 Setthestationandelevationtothefollowing:
Station26+07.00[2+425.43]
Elevation202.00[61.57]
7 ClickApply.
8 ClicktoAccept,thenclosethedialog.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
251
ExerciseCreateVerticalElements
AddFloatingCurve
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalElement>AddFloatingCurve.
2 IntheAddFloatingVerticalCurvedialog,changetheModetoByPoint
andParameter.
3 SelectthePointcheckbox.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
4 Setthestationandelevationtothefollowing:
Station26+66.02[2+438.37]
Elevation199.36[60.98]
5 SettheParametertoLengthandavalueof165.12[50.33].
6 ClickApply.
7 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelinearelementthatwas
justplaced.
8 ClicktoAccept.
9 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
AddFloatingLine
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalElement>AddFloatingLine.
2 SettheModetoByPoint.
3 SelecttheStation/Elevationcheckboxandsetittothefollowing:
Station27+93.21[2+480.61]
Elevation194.46[59.37]
4 ClickApply.
5 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastverticalcurveinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
6 ClicktoAccept.
7 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
AddFloatingCurve
1 IntheAddFloatingVerticalCurvedialogsettheStationandElevationto
thefollowing:
Station32+31.53[2+601.71]
Elevation193.82[58.69]
Ifthedialogisnotopen,selectGeometry>VerticalElement>Add
FloatingCurve.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
252
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateVerticalElements
2 SettheLengthto440.82[134.36].
3 ClickApply.
4 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastlinearelementinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
5 ClicktoAccept.
6 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
AddFloatingLine
1 IntheAddFloatingVerticalLinedialogsettheStationandElevationtothe
following:
Station45+85.23[3+026.38]
Elevation214.38[65.42]
Ifthedialogisnotopen,selectGeometry>VerticalElement>Add
FloatingLine.
2 ClickApply.
3 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastverticalcurveinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
4 ClicktoAccept.
5 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
AddFloatingCurve
1 IntheAddFloatingVerticalCurvedialogsettheStationandElevationto
thefollowing:
Station50+14.00[3+171.19]
Elevation210.38[63.85]
Ifthedialogisnotopen,selectGeometry>VerticalElement>Add
FloatingCurve.
2 SettheLengthto431.00[150].
3 ClickApply.
4 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastlinearelementinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
5 ClicktoAccept.
6 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
253
ExerciseCreateVerticalElements
AddFloatingLine
1 IntheAddFloatingVerticalLinedialogsettheStationandElevationtothe
following:
Elevation174.80[53.29]
Station60+54.43[3+473]
2 ClickApply.
AddFloatingCurve
3 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastverticalcurveinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
4 ClicktoAccept.
5 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
1 IntheAddFloatingVerticalCurvedialogsettheStationandElevationto
thefollowing:
Station63+68.18[3+561.67]
Elevation170.69[52]
2 SettheLengthto312.00[80].
3 ClickApply.
4 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastlinearelementinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
5 ClicktoAccept.
6 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
7 ClosetheAddFloatingVerticalCurvedialog.
AddFloatingLine
1 IntheAddFloatingVerticalLinedialogsettheStationandElevationtothe
following:
Station70+57.54[3+781.93]
Elevation174.00[53.04]
2 ClickApply.
3 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyElement,selectthelastverticalcurveinthe
alignmentthatwasjustcreated.
4 ClicktoAccept.
5 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
6 ClosetheAddFloatingVerticalLinedialog.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
254
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateVerticalElements
EditVerticalElement
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalElement>EditElement.
2 Onthebottomrightsideofthedialog,clickLast.
3 SettheDefineFromtoStop.
Station:70+30.47[3+760.33]
Elevation:174.08[53.12]
Grade:.5%
5 SelecttheMaintainConnectedandColinearElementcheckbox.
6 ClickApply.
4 SettheStation,ElevationandGradetothefollowing:
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
255
CheckIntegrity
CheckIntegrity
TheCheckIntegritytoolisusedtoverifytangencyandconnectivitybetweenthe
elementsthatmakeupaverticalalignment.TheCheckIntegritytoolcanbeused
onanyalignmentnomatterhowitwascreated.
Thiscommandisdesignedtofixseveraltypesofissuesthatareinherentinthe
design/implementationofHorizontalandVerticalElementcommands.These
issuesareresultsofallowingyouthefreedomtoworkonanypartofthe
alignment.Thesefreedomscancreatediscontinuities,nontangency,and
transpositions.
Toactivatethetool,selectGeometry>VerticalElement>CheckIntegrity.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
256
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCheckAlignmentIntegrity
ExerciseCheckAlignmentIntegrity
ChecktheIntegrityoftheAlignment
1 SelectGeometry>VerticalElement>CheckIntegrity.
2 IntheCheckIntegritydialog,selectthefirstelementatthetopofthelist.
Thefirstelementinthealignmentshouldhighlight.
3 Rightclick,andreviewthesettingsinthepopupmenu.
4 Atthebottomofthedialog,clickNextandreviewtherestoftheelements
inthealignment.
5 Whenfinished,closethedialog.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
257
VerticalAnnotation
VerticalAnnotation
ViewVerticalAlignment
Averticalalignmentcaneasilybeviewedbyrightclickingonthevertical
alignmentintheInRoadsExplorerWindowandselectingView,orbyselecting
Geometry>ViewGeometry>ActiveVerticalcommand.
AnnotateVerticalAlignment
TheAnnotateVerticalAlignmentcommanddisplaysandannotatesverticalpoint
andalignmentinformation,suchastangentgradesandverticalcurves.
IntheMaintab,identifytheverticalalignmentyouwanttoannotate(remember
thattheverticalalignmentisachildofthehorizontalalignment)andselectthe
profilesetyouwanttoannotate.
Ifyouhavemorethanoneprofilesetdisplayed,makesureyouhavethecorrect
profilesetselected;otherwise,youwillnotseetheverticalannotationwhereyou
expectit.Ifyouknowthenameoftheprofileset,youcouldselectitfromthepull
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
258
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VerticalAnnotation
downlist;otherwise,youcouldusethegraphiclocatebutton.Clickonthegraphic
selectbuttonandidentifytheprofilesetyouwanttoannotate.
ThePointstabdefineshowthepointsontheverticalalignmentareannotated.
TheTangentstabcontrolstheverticalannotationofthetangents.
TheAffixestabisusedtodefineprefixesandsuffixesforthedifferenttypesof
annotation.
TheCurvestabcontrolstheverticalannotationofthecurves.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
259
ExerciseVerticalAnnotation
ExerciseVerticalAnnotation
ViewtheVerticalAnnotation
1 SelectGeometry>ViewGeometry>VerticalAnnotation.
2 ClickApply.
Theverticalalignmentisnowannotated.
3 Closethedialogbox.
4 ExittheCADsoftware.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
260
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Createverticalelements
Editverticalelements
Checkalignmentintegrity
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
261
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:Atleastoneelementmustexistintheactivevertical
alignmentbeforeyoucanaddaFloatingelement
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
ATrue
BFalse
2 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtocreateasinglecurve
fromtheactiveverticalalignment?
ARemoveFreeCurve
BRemoveFixedCurve
CDeleteElement
DRemoveFloatingCurve
3 HowaretheSimplifiedVerticalElementCommandsdifferentthanthe
traditionalverticalelementcommands?
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
262
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:Atleastoneelementmustexistintheactivevertical
alignmentbeforeyoucanaddaFloatingelement
ATrue
BFalse
2 Whichofthefollowingcommand(s)canbeusedtocreateasinglecurve
fromtheactiveverticalalignment?
ARemoveFreeCurve
BRemoveFixedCurve
CDeleteElement
DRemoveFloatingCurve
3 HowaretheSimplifiedVerticalElementCommandsdifferentthanthe
traditionalverticalelementcommands?
SimplifiedVerticalElementsaretoolsthatareusedtocreategeometry
elementswithpredefinedsettingsintheactiveverticalalignment.No
dialogboxesappearwhenusingthesimplifiedverticalelements
becausethesettingsusedarealreadyspecified.Theycanbechangedby
selectingGeometry>SimplifiedVerticalElement>Settings.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
263
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
30Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
264
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
CreateanewverticalalignmentforMeadowParkDrive.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateVA
UsingElements\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CreateVAUsing
Elements\Task\TaskVAElements.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
265
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:CreateaVerticalAlignmentusingelements.
CreateanewverticalalignmentfortheMeadowParkDrivealignment.
UseP_COGO_PropVerticalforthestyle.
Defineaverticalalignmentwithatleast4paraboliccurves.
Thebeginningoftheverticalalignmentwillbeatstation15+51.15
[1+551.15]andelevation201.072[61.29].
Themaximumgradeshouldnotexceed3%.
Thefirstverticalcurveshouldpassthroughthefollowingstationsand
elevations:
Station:23+17.82[1+782.85],Elevation:203.21[62.10]
Station:26+00[1+856.13],Elevation:202.53[62.01]
Station:28+82.18[1+930.55],Elevation:198.92[61.23]
Thesecondverticalcurveshouldpassthroughthefollowingstations
andelevations:
Station:30+00[1+992.48],Elevation:196.80[60.28]
Station:31+00[2+008.43],Elevation:194.87[60]
Station:32+00[2+024.52],Elevation:192.67[59.65]
Thethirdverticalcurveshouldpassthroughthefollowingstationsand
elevations:
Station:36+00[2+207.31],Elevation:183.33[55.29]
Station:37+00[2+234.78],Elevation:181.33[54.76]
Station:38+00[2+262.06],Elevation:180.00[54.48]
Thefourthverticalcurveshouldpassthroughthefollowingstations
andelevations:
Station:38+85.60[2+295.48],Elevation:179.14[54.29]
Station:40+00[2+310.42],Elevation:178.58[54.28]
Station:41+14.40[2+325.48],Elevation:179.18[54.42]
Completethealignmentbyconnectingthecurveslistedabovewith
linearelements.
Theendoftheverticalalignmentwillbeatstation41+65.75
[2+349.64]andelevation179.71[54.76].
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
266
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TheproposedalignmentshouldbedisplayedandannotatedintheCAD
file.
BesuretosavetheGeometryProjectwiththenewverticalalignment.
UsetheCheckIntegritycommandtomakesurealltheelementsinthe
alignmentarethesamedirection.
Questions
Whatisthegradeofthefirsttangentintheverticalalignment?
Whatistheflattestgradeofyouralignment?
Whatisthestationandelevationofthelowestpointofthealignment?
Whatisthestationandelevationofthehighestpointofthe
alignment?
Whatisthelengthofthelongestverticalcurve?
Whatisthelengthofthelastcurve?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
267
ReviewTask
CreatingVerticalAlignmentsUsingElements
268
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
ThismoduleprovidesanintroductiontotheTemplatedefinitionandRoadway
Designerprocess.Havingageneralunderstandingofhowthesetoolsfunction
makesiteasiertolearnthedetailsofthetoolsinthefollowingtrainingmodules.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
269
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill
Learnabouttemplateconceptsandhowtoapplytemplatesusingthe
RoadwayDesigner.
Assembleatemplatefromcomponentsusingthedraganddrop
workflow.
CreateamodeloftheroadwayusingtheRoadwayDesignercommand.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
270
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartMicroStationandInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoads/PowerInRoadsshortcut
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Roadway
DesignerOverview\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileSR2067Bypass.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Roadway
DesignerOverview\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeRoadwayDesignerOverview.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\SR2067
BypassExistingGround.dtm
GeometryProject: SR2067Bypass.alg
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: SR2067Bypass.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
271
Templates
Templates
Aftertheproposedalignmentsandexistinggroundsurfacehavebeencreated,a
modeloftheproposedroadwaydesignisgeneratedbyassemblingproject
templatesandapplyingthemtotheprojectusingtheRoadwayDesigner.
Templatesarecrosssectionviewsofthetypicalsectionsusedtocreatethe
proposeddesign.
IndividualtemplatesarecreatedandstoredintheTemplateLibraryFile,which
hasthefileextension.itl.
Thetemplatelibrarycanbesharedbymanypeople,butitmustbeaccessedas
readonlywhenitisbeingshared.Usuallyaprojectspecifictemplatelibraryis
createdforeachprojectandtheappropriatetemplatesarecopiedtothatlibrary
sotheycanbemodifiedtomeetthespecificneedsoftheproject.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
272
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ApplyingTemplates
ApplyingTemplates
Templatesareusedtocreateaproposedmodeloftheroadway.Thisis
accomplishedusingtheRoadwayDesigner.IntheRoadwayDesigner,templates
areassignedtospecificstationsalongthemainlinealignmentatspecificintervals,
whicharecalledtemplatedrops.
TheRoadwayDesignerconnectsthepointsofthetemplatedrops,forminga
modeloftheroadway,whichismadeintoasurfacemodel.Theconnected
templatepointsformlongitudinalbreaklinefeaturesinthesurfacemodel.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
273
TemplatesSurfaceModels
TemplatesSurfaceModels
OnlythetoppointsinthesurfacemodelgeneratedbytheRoadwayDesignerare
triangulated.
AllsubsurfacepointsthatarelowerthanthetriangulatedsurfaceareExclude
fromTriangulationpointsintheproposedsurface.Thesubsurfaceswillappear,if
desired,intheproposedcrosssectionsascomponents.Componentsareused
forvolumecalculations.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
274
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreateTemplateDialog
CreateTemplateDialog
Tocreateoreditatemplatelibrary,selectModeler>CreateTemplate.Thisopens
theCreateTemplatedialog,whichistheprimaryplacewheretemplatesare
createdandedited.Thisisalsowheretemplatesarecopiedfromastandard
templatelibrarytoaprojecttemplatelibraryusingTools>TemplateLibrary
Organizer.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
275
TemplateNames
TemplateNames
OntheleftsideofthedialogistheTemplateLibraryarea,whichcontainsa
Windowslikefolderstructure.Therootfolderisthenameandlocationofthe
templatelibrarythatiscurrentlyopen.Onlyonetemplatelibrarymaybeopenat
atime.
Tonavigatethefolderstructure,doubleclickthefoldersyouwanttoopenor
close.Insideanyfolderyoucancreateandorganizeyourtemplatesandsub
folders.Theorganizationofthefolderstructureisuserdefinable.Thefolder
structurealsosupportscommonWindowsfunctions,suchasdraganddrop,cut
andpaste,etc.
Mostcommonlyusedcommandscanbeaccessedbyrightclickingonthefolder
andtemplatenames.Ifyoudoubleclickatemplatename,itbecomestheCurrent
Templateandissignifiedbyaredboxaroundthetemplateicon.TheCurrent
TemplateisalsoidentifiedintheCurrentTemplateareanexttotheTemplate
Libraryarea.AtemplatemustbetheCurrentTemplateinordertobeassembled
oredited.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
276
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CurrentTemplateWindow
CurrentTemplateWindow
InthecenteroftheCreateTemplatedialogisthemaingraphforcreating
templates.ThegraphiscalledtheCurrentTemplatewindow.TheCurrent
TemplatewindowusesitsowngraphicsengineandisnotaviewfromtheCAD
file.Thescaleofthegraphisdynamicandchangesasyouzoominandout.
ThecenterpointoftheCurrentTemplatewindowismarkedbythedynamic
origin,whichisamagentacoloredbox.Thedynamicoriginisareferencepoint
andcanbemovedtoanylocationinthegraph.
Atthebottomofthegrapharenumerousviewcommandswhichallowyouto
manipulatetheviewofthetemplate.TheseoperatesimilartoCADfileview
commands.Ifyourmousehasascrollwheel,itcanbeusedtopanandzoom.The
twobuttonswiththeleftandrightscrolliconsareusedtoundoandredo
templatecreationoperations.CTRLZwillundoyourlasteditorcreation.
Inthegraphareayoucanrightclicktoaccessadditionalcommandsandyou
candoubleclickelementsinthegraphforeditingpurposes.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
277
TemplatePreviewWindow
TemplatePreviewWindow
Whenyouhighlight(clickon)atemplate,thetemplateisdisplayedinthePreview
area,whichislocatedundertheTemplateLibraryarea.
Youcanusethepreviewtoassembletemplatesfromtheirpartsorcomponents,
usingdraganddrop.
Thecyancoloredboxinthepreviewrepresentstheinsertionpointforanydrag
anddropoperation.Youcanchangetheinsertionpointlocationbyclickingthe
desiredinsertionpointonthepreview.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
278
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DynamicSettings
DynamicSettings
TheDynamicSettingsdialogisusedforprecisioninputofthetemplate
componentsandforassigningpointnamesandstyleswhencreatingcomponents.
Italsoservesasacompassforthelocationofyourcursorwithrespecttothe
dynamicorigin.ThedynamicorigincanbemovedusingSetDynamicOrigin,
locatedatthebottomoftheDynamicSettingsdialog.
TheDynamicSettingsdialogisaccessedbyselectingTools>DynamicSettingsor
usingtheviewcontroliconslocatedbelowtheCurrentTemplatewindow.
TheKeyinpulldownspecifiesthetypeofkeyintobeperformed.
XY=absolutecoordinates
DL=deltacoordinatesfromlastpointplaced(defaultstothedynamic
originifitisthefirstpointofacomponent)
HS=horizontaldeltadistanceandslopefromlastpointplaced
VS=verticaldeltadistanceandslopefromlastpointplaced
OL=deltacoordinatesfromdynamicorigin
OS=horizontaldeltadistanceandslopefromdynamicorigin
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
279
Components
Components
Componentsarelogicalpartsofatemplate.Portionsofthetemplatethatare
separatedintocomponentsarenormallybasedontabulationconsiderations.
Examplesofcomponentsincludecurbandgutter,medianbarrier,pavement
layers,cutandfillslopes,andditches.
Componentsarenormallykeptinaseparatefolderinthetemplatelibrary.They
areusedtoassemblecompletetemplates,bydragginganddroppingthe
componentstotheCurrentTemplatewindow.Whenconnectingtwo
components,theconnectingpointchangestoawhiteplussignpriortoplacing
thecomponent.Thisistheindicationthatthepointscoincide.Whenthe
componentsareconnectedtogether,usingdraganddropfromthetemplate
libraryfolders,anycoincidentcomponentpointswillusethepointnameofthe
previouslyplacedcomponent.Templatepointnamescanbeeditedanytime
duringthecreationprocess.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
280
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Components
Componentsarenormallycreatedwithpointnamesthatarenotspecifictothe
leftorrightsideoftheroadway.Whentheyareusedtocreatecompleted
templates,prefixesandsuffixestothetemplatepointscanbeautomatically
addedduringcomponentplacement.Prefixesandsuffixesarecontrolledusing
Tools>OptionsintheCreateTemplatedialogandcanbesetandclearedinthe
DynamicSettingsdialogduringplacementusingtheApplyAffixescheckbox.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
281
MergingComponents
MergingComponents
Whencombiningtwocomponentsofapavementsectiontogether,twoseparate
componentsareproducedwithaverticalsegmentdividingthem.Toremovethe
verticalsegmentandmergethetwocomponentsintoone,positionthecursor
overtheverticalsegmentandrightclick.ThenselectMergeComponents.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
282
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
BasicTemplateCreationWorkflow
BasicTemplateCreationWorkflow
OpenanexistingtemplatelibrarybyselectingFile>Open.
SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.ThisbringsuptheCreateTemplate
dialog.
Navigatetotheappropriatefolderinthetemplatelibraryfolderstructureand
selectFile>New>Template.
Namethenewtemplate.
Navigatetowherethecomponentsarestoredinthetemplatelibraryfolder
structure,anddraganddropthecomponentstotheCurrentTemplate
window.
Ifnecessary,mergecomponentstogetherbyrightclickingonthevertical
segmentbetweentwocomponentsandselectingMergeComponents.
SelecttheDisplayPointNamesradiobuttonintheDisplayareaoftheCreate
Templatedialogbox.
Reviewthepointnamesandeditthem,ifneeded,bydoubleclickingonthe
pointsintheCurrentTemplatewindow.
SelectFile>Savetosavethetemplatelibrary.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
283
ExerciseCreatingaTemplatefromComponents
ExerciseCreatingaTemplatefromComponents
Continuingwiththefilesfromthepreviouspracticeexercise.
CreateaTemplateName
1 SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.
2 Doubleclicktherootfolder.
3 SelectthefoldernamedTemplatesintheCreateTemplatesdialog.
4 RightclicktheTemplatesfolder,thenselectNew>Template.
5 RenamethenewtemplateTwoLane.
6 SelectTools>DynamicSettingsfromtheCreateTemplatedialog.
7 Type0.1inbothXStepandYStepfields.
8 SelectTools>Options.
9 SelecttheApplyAffixescheckbox.
10 TypethefollowinginthePrefixfields:
LeftPrefix:LT_
RightPrefix:RT_
RoadwayDesignerOverview
284
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreatingaTemplatefromComponents
11 ClickOK.
TheApplyAffixesisautomaticallyselectedontheDynamicSettings
dialog.
DefineRightsideofTemplate
1 DoubleclicktheComponentsfolder.
2 DraganddropthecomponentnamedTwoLanew/shouldersfromthe
ComponentsfoldertotheoriginoftheActiveTemplatewindow(marked
byamagentacoloredbox).
HINTWatchthecoordinatesintheupperleftportionoftheDynamic
SettingsdialoganddroptheTwoLanew/shoulderscomponentatthe
coordinates0,0.
DefineLeftsideofTemplate
NextwewillplacetheTwoLanew/shoulderstemplateagainbutweneed
areflectionofthetemplate.
1 AsyoudragthecomponentnamedTwoLanew/shouldersintothe
templatewindow,Rightclick(youarestillholdingdowntheleftmouse
buttonwhenyourightclick).
2 ReleasetheleftmousebuttonandselectReflect.
3 Movethetemplatetothe0,0coordinates.
Noticetheexistingconnectionturnswhitewhenyouareinthecorrect
location.
4 Clicktoplacethetemplate.
Youshouldnowhavebothsidesofatwolaneroadwaycreated.
Ifyoumakeamistake,useCTRLZtoundo.
5 SelectFit.
DefineCurbandGutter
Thistimewewanttoplaceboththeleftandrightcurbatthesametime
usingthemirrorfunction.
1 AsyoudragthecomponentnamedConcreteCurb&Gutterintothe
templatewindow,Rightclickwhile(youarestillholdingdowntheleft
mousebuttonwhenyourightclick).
2 ReleasetheleftmousebuttonandselectMirror.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
285
ExerciseCreatingaTemplatefromComponents
3 RightclickagainandcleartheReflectcheckmark.
4 Placethecomponentattheedgeoftherightshoulderpoint.
Thecurbandguttersectionisplacedonboththeleftandrightsidesofthe
template.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
DefineEndConditions
1 DoubleclicktheEndConditionsfolder.
2 DraganddroptheendconditioncomponentnamedSimpleCutandFill.
3 Placethecomponentatthebackofcurbpointontherightside.
4 SelectFit.
MergeComponents
1 Rightclickontheverticalsegmentsbetweenthepavementsboxes
(yellow)inthecenter,thenselectMergeComponents.
2 Rightclickontheverticalsegmentsbetweenthebaseboxes(orange)in
thecenter,thenselectMergeComponents.
Yourtemplateshouldlooklikethis:
SavetheTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>SavefromtheCreateTemplatedialogtosavethetemplate
library.
2 ClosetheCreateTemplatedialog.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
286
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesigner
RoadwayDesigner
Afterthetemplatesarecreated,theyareappliedusingtheRoadwayDesigner.
TheRoadwayDesignercombinesalignments,surfaces,andtemplatestocreatea
modeloftheproposedroadway.Itisalsowheresuperelevationiscreatedand
appliedtothedesign.
TocreateandeditRoadwayDesigns,selectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.This
bringsuptheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
ThedatayouinputintoRoadwayDesignerissavedintheRoadwayDesignfile,
whichhastheextension.ird(InRoadsRoadwayDesign).
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
287
RoadwayDesignerDialog
RoadwayDesignerDialog
TheRoadwayDesignerdialoghasthreewindowviewingareas,representingthe
plan,profile,andcrosssectionviewsofthedesign.
Theseviewsusetheirowngraphicsengine,liketheCreateTemplatedialog,and
arenotCADfileviews.Theviewsshowonlywhatisrelatedtothedesign,not
whatisdisplayedintheCADfile.Thecontentofeachwindowiscontrolledbythe
activeCorridorselectionandActiveSurfacesettings.
TheRoadwayDesignerdialogisresizable.EachwindowintheRoadwayDesigner
canalsobeindividuallyresized.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
288
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerPlanViewWindow
RoadwayDesignerPlanViewWindow
ThePlanViewwindowislocatedintheupperleftcorneroftheRoadway
Designerdialog.Althoughitlookslikeastandardview,thePlanViewwindow
doesnotdisplaythegraphicsintheCADfile.NothavingtheCADgraphics
displayedallowsyoutofocusonthedesigndataonly.
Templatedropsaredisplayedasshortbrownlines.Atemplatedropisthelocation
whereanewtemplatebegins.ThePlanwindowislinkedtotheotherwindowsin
RoadwayDesignerviastationpositioningofthedesign.Thestationpositionis
shownasthelongeryellowline.
Othergraphicsinthiswindowincludethecorridorcenterline,originalground
surfaceperimeter,andcutfilllines.Asweincreasethecomplexityofthedesign,
othergraphicindicatorsappearinthewindow.Mouseovertipsareavailableand
viewcontrolsarelocatedonthebottomofalloftheRoadwayDesignersview
windows.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
289
RoadwayDesignerProfileViewWindow
RoadwayDesignerProfileViewWindow
TheProfileViewwindowislocatedinthelowerleftcorneroftheRoadway
Designerdialog.
ItdisplaystheOriginalgroundsurfacelineandthecorridorsverticalalignment.It
isalsolinkedtothestationpositionofthedesignandthatlocationisshownasa
verticalyellowline.ThescaleoftheProfileViewwindowisdynamicbasedonthe
zoomcontrols.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
290
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerCrossSectionViewWindow
RoadwayDesignerCrossSectionViewWindow
TheCrossSectionViewwindowislocatedontherightsideoftheRoadway
Designerdialog.
ItdisplaystheActivesurfaceline,(typically,existingground)andthetemplatesas
theyareappliedtothedesign.Thiswindowwillbeaprimaryareaforreviewing
thedesign.
Additionaldisplaysettingscanbeappliedbyrightclickingonthewindow.The
scaleoftheCrossSectionViewwindowisdynamicbasedonthezoomcontrols.
LocateddirectlybelowtheCrossSectionViewwindowisanareathatdisplaysthe
stationcurrentlydisplayedandseveralbuttonsthatallowyoutostepthroughthe
design,basedonstationing.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
291
RoadwayDesignerFundamentals
RoadwayDesignerFundamentals
CorridorManagementCommand
ACorridorisadesignsectionofroadwaydefinedbythestationlimitsofthe
mainlineshorizontalandverticalalignment.Acorridoriscreatedbyusing
Corridor>CorridorManagement.
TocreateaCorridor,nametheCorridor,selectahorizontalandverticalalignment,
andoptionallysetthestationlimitsoftheproject.Asingleroadwaydesignfile
(.ird)canstoremultiplecorridorsforaproject.Thesurfacesymbologyisalso
specifiedwhenacorridoriscreated.Thesymbologyisusedtosetthesurface
crosssectionandprofilesymbologieswhenanindividualsurfaceiscreatedfrom
thecorridor.
The.irdfilecanonlybeopenedbyoneuseratatime.
Thenextstepistoassigntemplatestothecorridor,usingtheCorridor>Template
Dropscommand.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
292
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerFundamentals
TemplateDropsCommand
Tocreatetemplatedrops,selecttheappropriatetemplatefromthetemplate
library,thestationwherethetemplateisapplied,andthemodelinginterval.The
finalresultisastationandtemplatelist.
CreateSurfaceCommand
CreateSurfacecombinesthecorridorandtemplatedropsdatatocreateasurface
modeloftheproposedroadwaydesign.Thiscreatesasurfaceconsistingofthe
topsurfaceoftheroadwaydesignandthesubgradecomponents,whichare
ExcludefromTriangulationpointsandchildrenofthetopsurface.Components
canbedisplayedincrosssectionsandusedforvolumecalculations.
TemplateDropsassignpreviouslycreatedtemplatestospecificstationsinthe
corridor.TheXY=0,0pointonthetemplatetracksonthecorridorshorizontal
andverticalalignmenttoformtheproposedroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
293
BasicRoadwayDesignerWorkflow
BasicRoadwayDesignerWorkflow
Openthegeometryproject,originalgroundsurface(existingground),and
templatelibraryusingFile>Open.
SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
Loadthetemplatelibrary.
SelectFile>NewfromtheRoadwayDesignerdialogandenterthenameof
thenewroadwaydesignfile(.ird).Touseanexistingroadwaydesignfile,
selectFile>Open.
SelectCorridor>CorridorManagement.
Namethenewcorridorandselecttheappropriatehorizontalandvertical
alignments.
SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
Selecttheappropriatetemplateandassociatedstationtoapplythattemplate.
Repeatfortemplatechangesalongthealignment.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
294
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ClickProcessAllintheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
UsetheRoadwayDesignersviewwindowstoreviewthedesign.
SelectCorridor>CreateSurfaceandenterthenameoftheproposedsurface.
SelectFile>SavefromtheRoadwayDesignerdialogtosavetheroadway
designfile.
SelectFile>Save>Surfacetosavethedesignsurface.
BasicRoadwayDesignerWorkflow
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
295
ExerciseCreateaRoadwayDesign
ExerciseCreateaRoadwayDesign
Continueusingthefilesusedinthepreviouspracticeactivity.
CreateaNewCorridor
1 SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
2 SelectCorridor>CorridorManagement.
3 TypeSR2067RelocationintheNamefield.
4 ClickAdd,thenClose.
CreateTemplateDrops
1 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
2 DoubleclicktheRootfolder.
3 DoubleclicktheTemplatesfolder.
4 SelectthetemplatenamedTwoLane.
5 ClickAdd,thenClose.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
296
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaRoadwayDesign
ProcessAllandReview
1 ClicktheProcessAllbuttonlocatedinthelowerrightcornerofthe
RoadwayDesignerdialog.
2 ClosetheResultsdialog.
CreateProposedDesignSurface
1 SelectCorridor>CreateSurface.
2 IntheNamefield,typeFinished.
3 EnsurethatEmptyDesignSurfacecheckboxisselected.
4 ClickApply.
5 ClosetheResultsdialog.
3 ReviewthedesigninRoadwayDesigner.
1 SelectFile>Savetosavetheroadwaydesignfile.
6 ClosetheCreateSurfacedialog.
ReviewtheDesignSurfaceFeatures
1 SelectSurface>Feature>FeatureProperties.
2 SelecttheFinishedsurfaceandreviewthelistoffeatures.
3 Whenfinished,closetheFeaturePropertiesdialog.
SavetheRoadwayDesignandDesignSurface
2 ClosetheRoadwayDesignerdialogandreviewtheplanfeaturesinthe
CADdrawing.
3 SavethesurfaceFinished.dtmtothefolderC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\RoadwayDesignerOverview\Practice\.
4 ExittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
297
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Understandtemplateconceptsandhowtoapplytemplatesusingthe
RoadwayDesigner.
Assembleatemplatefromcomponentsusingthedraganddrop
workflow.
CreateamodeloftheroadwayusingtheRoadwayDesignercommand.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
298
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 Arepointsinatemplate(topsurfaceandsubsurface)includedinasingle
resultingdesignDTM?
Yes
No
2 WhichmethodisusedtosetatemplateasactiveintheCreateTemplate
dialog?(Selectallthatapply).
ASelectthetemplatenamefromtheTemplatemenu.
BDoubleclickonthetemplatenameintheTemplateLibrarylist.
CRightclickonthetemplatenameintheTemplateLibrarylistand
selectSetActive.
3 TrueorFalse:Thetemplatepreviewwindowalwaysshowsthesame
templateastheeditingwindow.
True
False
4 TrueorFalse:The0,0positiononthetemplatewilltrackonthecorridors
horizontalandverticalalignmenttoformtheproposedcorridor.
True
False
5 Cantheresultsoftheroadwaymodel(pavementlayers,sideslopes,etc.)
bereviewedwithoutprocessingtheentireproject?
Yes
No
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDesignerOverview
299
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 Arepointsinatemplate(topsurfaceandsubsurface)includedinasingle
resultingdesignDTM?
YesAlltemplatepointsareincludedintheresultingdesignDTM.
However,onlythetoppointsinthesurfacemodelgeneratedbythe
RoadwayDesignerwillbetriangulated.Allsubsurfacepointsthatare
lowerthanthetriangulatedsurfacewillbeExcludefromTriangulation
pointsintheproposedDTM.Thesubsurfaceswillappear,ifdesired,inthe
proposedcrosssectionsascomponents.
2 WhichmethodisusedtosetatemplateasactiveintheCreateTemplate
dialog?(Selectallthatapply)
BandCTosettheactivetemplate,eitherdoubleclickonthetemplate
nameorrightclickonthetemplatenameandselectSetActivefromthe
menu.Theactivetemplateisidentifiedbyaredboxaroundthetemplate
icon.
3 TrueorFalse:Thetemplatepreviewwindowalwaysshowsthesame
templateastheeditingwindow.
FalseClickingonatemplatenameresultsinthattemplate/component
displayinginthepreviewwindow.Thepreviewedtemplate/component
canthenbedraggedontotheactivetemplatetocreatenewcomponents.
4 TrueorFalse:The0,0positiononthetemplatewilltrackonthecorridors
horizontalandverticalalignmenttoformtheproposedcorridor.
TrueThe0,0positiononthetemplatedefineswherethetemplatewill
connecttothecorridorshorizontalandverticalalignment.
5 Cantheresultsoftheroadwaymodel(pavementlayers,sideslopes,etc.)
bereviewedwithoutprocessingtheentireproject?
YesYoucanreviewanystationlocationalongtheprojectwithout
processingtheentireearthwork.TheRoadwayDesignerprocessesthe
earthwork/crosssectionfortheselectedstationlocationinteractivelyasit
isdisplayed.Anychangestothecorridorsettingswillimmediatelybe
reflectedinthedisplayedcrosssection.
RoadwayDesignerOverview
300
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
ThismoduleisanintroductiontotheCreateTemplatetool.Youwilllearnthe
basicsofcreatingandeditingtemplatesandthecomponentsandpointsthat
makeupthetemplates.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
301
WhereareweintheBigPicture?
WhereareweintheBigPicture?
Atthispointintheprojectwehavedonethefollowing:
CreatetheCADfile.
Setprojectdefaults.
Analyzedtheexistingdata.
Createdhorizontalgeometry.
Createdanexistinggroundprofile.
Createdaproposedprofile.
Nowwearereadytodesigntheroadwaycorridorwhichwillinvolvethefollowing
tasks:
Templates
302
Definingtemplates.
Defineanddesigncorridors.
Generateproposedsurfaces.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill
Learnabouttemplatepointconstraintsandcomponents.
Createtemplatecomponents.
Createacompletetemplatefromthecomponents.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
303
Objectives
StartMicroStationandInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoads/PowerInRoadsshortcut
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\Templates\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileSR2067Bypass.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\Templates\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeTemplates.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
Templates
304
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ConstraintsonTemplatePoints
ConstraintsonTemplatePoints
Pointconstraintsareusedtomanagethebehavioroftemplatepoints. Theyare
usedsothatifapointismovedinatemplate,eitherbyyoueditingthetemplate
orbytheapplicationofpointcontrolsduringdesignprocessing,allthepoints
relatedtothepointbeingmovedwillbehaveinapredictablemanner.
Atemplatepointhasamaximumoftwoconstraintsonit. Apointwith
twoconstraintsisconsideredfullyconstrained.Apointthatisfully
constrainedisrepresentedbyaredplussign.
Apointthathasonlyoneconstraintonitisconsideredpartially
constrainedandisshownasayellowplussign.
Apointwithnoconstraints(unconstrained)isshownasagreenplus
sign.
Constraintscanalsobelabeledsothatduringthedesignprocessthevalueof
labeledconstraintsmaybechanged.Forexample,thetemplatemayhavea
constraintlabelcalledThicknessthatcontrolsthethicknessoftheasphaltwearing
surface. Thisthicknesscanbechangedsothatonetemplatecanbeusedfor
differentasphaltdepths,withouthavingtoeditthetemplate.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
305
ConstraintsonTemplatePoints
TypesofConstraints
TheRoadwayDesignerprovidesavarietyofconstrainttypesforroadway
templatedesign,asdescribedbelow.ThiscoursediscussestheHorizontal,
Vertical,andSlopeconstraints.Additionaltrainingonthemoreadvanced
constrainttypesisavailableinotherBentleyInstitutetrainingmodules.
Horizontal
Thechildpointremainsatthespecifiedhorizontaldistancefromtheparent
point.
Vertical
Thechildpointremainsatthespecifiedverticaldistancefromtheparent
point.
Slope
Thechildpointmaintainsthespecifiedslopefromtheparentpoint.
Additionally,slopeconstraintscanhaverollovervaluesassignedtothem.
Rollovervaluesareusedtosettheslopeconstraintbasedonahighsideslope
differenceandalowsideslopedifferencerelativetoareferencepointwhich
definesthecontrollingslopetotheparentpoint. Slopeconstraintsare
absolute.Slopesgoingfromlowerlefttoupperrightarepositiveregardlessof
whetherthechildpointistotheleftorrightoftheparent.
HorizontalMaximum
Thechildpointhastwoparentpointsandremainsatthespecifiedhorizontal
distancefromtheparentpointthatisfarthesttotheright(hasthemaximum
horizontalorXvalue).
HorizontalMinimum
Thechildpointhastwoparentpointsandremainsatthespecifiedhorizontal
distancefromtheparentpointthatisfarthesttotheleft(hastheminimum
horizontalorXvalue).
VerticalMaximum
Thechildpointhastwoparentpointsandremainsatthespecifiedvertical
distancefromtheparentpointthatishighest(hasthemaximumverticalorY
value).
Templates
306
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ConstraintsonTemplatePoints
VerticalMinimum
Thechildpointhastwoparentpointsandremainsatthespecifiedvertical
distancefromtheparentpointthatislowest(hastheminimumverticalorY
value).
VectorOffset
Thechildpointisprojectedontothevectordefinedbytwoparentpoints. If
theoffsetiszero,thechildpointislocatedontheparentvector.Iftheoffsetis
notzero,thenthechildpointwillmaintainaperpendicularoffsetfromthe
parentvectoratthespecifiedoffsetvalue.Negativevaluesindicateanoffset
totheleftofthevectordefinedbytheparentpoints. Positivevaluesindicate
anoffsettotheright.
ProjecttoSurface
Thisconstraintmustbeusedinconjunctionwithoneofthepreviouslydefined
constraints. Theotherconstraintdefinestheprojectiondirection.Thechild
pointisprojectedtothesurfacewiththespecifiedname.Ifthesurfacedoes
notexist,ornosolutionisfound,thepointremainswhereitisplacedinthe
template.
ProjecttoDesign
ThisconstraintissimilartoProjecttoSurface,exceptthatthepointis
projectedtothedesignsurfaceofthetemplate.Aprojectionvalueisgivento
indicatewhethertheprojectionwillbetotheleftortotheright.Thepoint
mustbeconstrainedbyoneofthepreviousconstraints,excludingtheProject
toSurfaceconstraint,sothatadirectionfortheprojectionmaybe
determined.Ifnosolutionisfound,thenthepointremainswhereitisplaced
inthetemplate.
AngleDistance
Usethiscommandtofullyconstrainapointinthetemplate.Thisconstraint
requirestwoparentpoints,adistance,andanangle.Thepointisconstrained
tothelocationdefinedbythedistancefromthefirstparent,andtheangle
fromthefirstparentrelativetothevectordefinedbythetwoparentpoints.
Thisconstraintcreatesarigidbodyrotation.Whenselected,noother
constrainttypesareavailable.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
307
VisualIndicatorsforParentChildRelationship
VisualIndicatorsforParentChildRelationship
ParentChildPointRelationship
Whenapointisconstrained,itisconstrainedfromeitheroneortwootherpoints.
Pointsareconstrainedinatwodimensional(crosssection)plane. Constraintscan
affectonlythepointsoffsetandelevation,whicharetheXandYcoordinatesina
crosssectionview. Pointconstraintsarealsodirectional.Thedirectionformsa
parentchildrelationshipbetweenpoints. IfpointBisconstrainedbypointA,
pointAissaidtobetheparentofpointB.Whenviewingtheconstraints,the
parentpointhasabluearrowpointingtothechildpoint.Toseetheconstraintsin
atemplate,selecttheConstraintsradiobuttonlocatedintheDisplayportionof
theCreateTemplatedialog.
HorizontalConstraint
Ahorizontalconstraintiswhenachildishorizontallyconstrainedtotheparent.
Whenyoumovetheparentpoint,thechildpointmovesataconstanthorizontal
distancefromthatpoint,whichisspecifiedwhentheconstraintisestablished.A
Templates
308
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VisualIndicatorsforParentChildRelationship
whitehorizontallinecrossingoverthebluearrowindicatesahorizontal
constraint.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
309
VisualIndicatorsforCommonConstraints
VisualIndicatorsforCommonConstraints
VerticalConstraint
Averticalconstraintiswhenachildisverticallyconstrainedtotheparent.When
youmovetheparentpoint,thechildpointmovesataconstantverticaldistance
tothatpoint,whichisspecifiedwhentheconstraintisestablished.Awhite
verticallinecrossingoverthebluearrowindicatesaverticalconstraint.
HorizontalandVerticalConstraint
Ahorizontalandverticalconstraintiswhenachildishorizontallyandvertically
constrainedtotheparent.Whenyoumovetheparentpoint,thechildpoint
movesataconstanthorizontalandverticaldistancetothatpoint,whichis
specifiedwhentheconstraintisestablished.Awhitehorizontalandverticalline
crossingoverthebluearrowindicatesahorizontalandverticalconstraint.Whena
pointhastwoconstraints,suchashorizontalandverticalconstraints,thatpointis
fullyconstrainedandisshowninred.
Templates
310
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VisualIndicatorsforCommonConstraints
Aslopeconstraintiswhenachildisconstrainedtotheparentbytheslope
betweenthetwopoints.Whenyoumovetheparentpoint,thechildpointmoves
ataconstantslopewithrespecttotheparentpoint,whichisspecifiedwhenthe
constraintisestablished.Awhitediagonallinecrossingoverthebluearrow
indicatesaslopeconstraint.Whenapointhasonlyoneconstraint,suchasaslope
constraint,itiscalledapartiallyconstrainedpointandisshowninyellow.
SlopeConstraint
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
311
ExerciseObserveTemplateConstraintsBehavior
ExerciseObserveTemplateConstraintsBehavior
SelectTemplate
1 SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.
2 Expandtherootfolderbydoubleclickingthefoldername.
3 DoubleclicktheConstraintsfolder,thendoubleclickthetemplatenamed
ConstraintsBehavior.
ThismakesConstraintsBehaviorthecurrenttemplate.
4 SelecttheConstraintsandDisplayPointNamesoptionsintheDisplay
portionoftheCreateTemplatedialog.
Templates
312
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseObserveTemplateConstraintsBehavior
MoveTemplatePoints
1 RightclickonPoint1andselectMovePoint.
ObservehowthePoints1,2and3moveasarigidbody.
2 RightclicktoexitMovePoint.
3 RightclickonPoint2andnoticethatMovePointisnolongeravailable.
Itisnotpossibletomoveafullyconstrainedpoint.
Letsseewhathappenswhenweremovetheverticalconstraintfrom
Point2.
ChangePointConstraints
1 DoubleclickPoint2.
ThePointPropertiesdialogopens.
2 ChangeConstraint2fromVerticaltoNone.
3 ClickApply,thenClose.
Noticethecolorofthepointturnedfromredtoyellow.
MoveTemplatePoints
1 MovePoint1.
NoticethehorizontaldistancebetweenPoints1and2remainsconstant
buttheslopeisallowedtovary.
2 RightclicktoexitMovePoint.
3 MovePoint2.
NoticethehorizontaldistancebetweenPoints1and2remainconstant
butagaintheslopeisallowedtovary.
Alsonoticethatthehorizontalandverticaldistanceremainsconstant
betweenPoints2and3.
4 RightclicktoexitMovePoint.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
313
ExerciseObserveTemplateConstraintsBehavior
ChangePointConstraints
1 DoubleclickPoint2again.
2 ChangeConstraint1fromHorizontaltoSlope.
3 ClickApply,thenClose.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
MoveTemplatePoints
1 MovePoints1and2.
Noticethebehaviorissimilartobefore.However,Point2isnow
constrainedataconstantslopefrompoint1insteadofataconstant
horizontaldistance.
DeleteComponent
1 Deletethecomponentbyrightclickingwithyourcursordirectlyoverthe
componentandselectingDeleteComponent.
ThereisadifferentDeleteComponentscommandthatisusedtodelete
multiplecomponents.
Templates
314
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
AddingandDeletingConstraintsGraphically
AddingandDeletingConstraintsGraphically
InadditiontoeditingthetemplatepointconstraintsusingthePointProperties
dialog,youcanrightclickonanypointtoaccessAddConstraintorDelete
Constraintcommands.Thisisveryhandyformakingquickadjustmentstothe
templateconstraints.
TheDeleteConstraintscommandremovesallconstraintsfromthepoint.
TheAddConstraintcommandletsyoupickthetypeofconstraintyouwanttoadd
tothepoint.TheFullConstraintoptionaddsbothhorizontalandvertical
constraintstoapoint.
Rightclickonthechildpointyouwanttoconstrain,selectAddConstraint,and
selectthepointconstraintyouwanttoadd.Thenclicktheparentpointandenter
theoffsetsorslopevaluesofthechildpointfromtheparent.Settingthe
appropriateconstraintsonpointsisimportanttoachievethedesiredresultswhen
pavementlayers,superelevation,andtransitioningareintroducedtothedesign.
ThePointPropertiesdialogishelpfulforadjustingpointconstraintsafterthe
initialpointplacement.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
315
ExerciseAddingandDeletingConstraints
ExerciseAddingandDeletingConstraints
Continueworkingonthetemplatelibraryusedinthelastexercise.
DeleteConstraint
1 SelecttheAddandDeleteConstraintstemplateandmakeitthecurrent
template(doubleclickontemplatename).
2 SelecttheComponentsandDisplayPointNamesoptionsintheDisplay
areaoftheCreateTemplatedialog,iftheyarenotalreadyset.
3 RightclickontheCL_AGGR_B_BOTpointandselectDeleteBoth
Constraints.
Noticethecolorofthepointturnsfromredtogreen.
4 DeletetheconstraintsontheEOP_AGGR_B_BOTand
SHDR_AGGR_B_BOTpoints.
AddConstraints
1 RightclickontheCL_AGGR_B_BOTpointandselectAddConstraint>Full
Constraint.
Templates
316
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseAddingandDeletingConstraints
2 Whenpromptedtoselecttheparentpoint,clickontheCL_AGGR_A_BOT
point.
TheAddFullConstraintdialogopens.
3 TypeaHorizontalOffsetof0.0andaVerticalOffsetof1.0[0.3m],then
click OK.
4 RightclickontheEOP_AGGR_B_BOTpointandselectAddConstraint>
FullConstraint.
5 Fortheparentpoint,clickontheEOP_AGGR_A_BOTpoint.
TheAddFullConstraintdialogopens.
6 TypeaHorizontalOffsetof 0.0andaVerticalOffsetof1.0[0.3m],then
click OK.
7 RightclickontheSHDR_AGGR_B_BOTpointandselectAddConstraint>
Slope.
8 Fortheparentpoint,clickontheEOP_AGGR_B_BOTpoint.
TheAddSlopeConstraintdialogopens.
9 TypeaSlopeof6.0%, thenclick OK.
10 RightclickontheSHDR_AGGR_B_BOTpointagainandselectAdd
Constraint>Slope.
11 ClickontheSHDR_AGGR_A_BOTpoint.
12 TypeaSlopeof25.0%, thenclick OK.
DeleteComponents
1 RightclickontheCurrentTemplateWindow(butnotoveragraphic
componentelement),thenselectDeleteComponents.
2 Holddowntheleftmousebuttonanddrawalineacrossafew
components,thenreleasetheleftmousebuttonwhendone.
Allofthecomponentsthatthelinecrossedaredeleted.
3 Toundothedeletion,pressCTRL+ZorselectEdit>Undo.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
317
TheSignoftheDistanceandSlope
TheSignoftheDistanceandSlope
Whendefiningcomponentswithprecisioninput,thesignofthedistanceis
dependentontheparentchildrelationship.Theparentisalwaysthefirstpoint
placedwhencreatingtemplatecomponents.Thedistanceispositiveiftheparent
hasalowerXorYvaluethanthechild.Thedistanceisnegativeiftheparenthasa
higherXorYvaluethanthechild.Thesignofthecomponentslopeisbasedon
themathematicalslope.
Templates
318
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SimpleComponent
SimpleComponent
Acomponentisasetofpointsthatdefineanopenorclosedshape.Each
component,whetheropenorclosed,canrepresentadifferentmaterialorareaof
interest.
Componentsaresavedinthetemplatelibraryandarenormallystoredina
separatefolderintheTemplateLibraryfolderstructure.
Tocreateacomponent,firstselectFile>NewTemplateandnamethetemplate
component.Then,useAdd>SimpleorAdd>Constrainedtobuildthe
component.Eachcomponenthasanameandanassignedfeaturestyle.
Therearesixtypesofcomponents:
Simple.
Constrained.
Unconstrained.
NullPoint.
EndCondition.
Overlay/Stripping.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
319
SimpleComponent
Asyouaddtemplatecomponents,theareaunderthegraphchangestorepresent
theparametersforthecomponentinputtype.ThisiscalledtheCurrent
Componentarea.
Asimplecomponenttypicallyrepresentsasectionofpavementorsidewalk.Itisa
closedparallelogramthatisdefinedbyslope,thickness,andwidth.Thetoppoints
areconstrainedbyhorizontalandslopeconstraints.Thelowerpointsare
constrainedtothepointsdirectlyabovethembyhorizontalandvertical
constraints.
TheConstrained,Unconstrained,andEndConditioncomponenttypesare
discussedlaterinthischapter.NullPointsandOverlay/Strippingcomponentsare
moreadvancedthanthiscourseandarenotdiscussedduringthistraining.
Templates
320
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreatingaTemplateofSimpleComponents
ExerciseCreatingaTemplateofSimpleComponents
Continueworkingonthetemplatelibraryusedinthelastexercise.
CreateaTemplateName
1 SelectthefoldernamedComponentsintheCreateTemplatesdialog.
2 RightclicktheComponentsfolder,thenselectNew>Template.
3 NamethenewtemplateConcretePavementw/Shoulder.
StartDynamicSettings
1 SelectTools>DynamicSettings.
2 Ifselected,cleartheApplyAffixescheckboxintheDynamicSettings
dialogbox.
3 SettheHorizontalandVerticalStepto0.1.
AddSimpleComponent
1 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectAddNew
Component>Simple.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
321
ExerciseCreatingaTemplateofSimpleComponents
2 SetuptheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogas
follows:
ComponentName: CONCRETE
Style: P_ROAD_Concrete
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Slope: 2.0%
Thickness: 1.000[0.300m]
Width: 12.000[3.600m]
3 PlacethecomponentattheoriginoftheCurrentTemplatewindow.
4 Fitthedisplayifnecessary.
5 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectAddNew
Component>Simple.
6 SetuptheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogas
follows:
ComponentName: CONCRETE
Style: P_ROAD_Concrete
Slope: 6.0%
Thickness: 1.000[0.300m]
Width: 8.000[2.400m]
Sincethisisthesamenameasthefirstcomponentcreated,thenameis
automaticallyappendedwitha1resultinginCONCRETE1asthe
componentname.
7 PlacethecomponentattherightedgeofpavementpointoftheCurrent
Templatewindow.
8 Fitthedisplayifnecessary.
SaveTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>SaveintheCreateTemplatedialogtosavetheTemplate
Library.
Templates
322
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointNames
TemplatePointNames
TemplatesareusedbytheRoadwayDesignertocreatesurfacesoftheproposed
roadway.Eachtemplatepointisconnectedlongitudinallytothenexttemplate
drop,basedontheinterval,toformlongitudinalbreaklinesurfacefeatures.The
namesofthosefeaturesarethenamesofthetemplatepoints.Therefore,
establishingastandardnamingconventionfortemplatepointsisimportanttothe
qualityoftheproposedsurface.
Likewise,individualcomponentnamesalsoappearintheensuingsurfaces.These
componentsareusedforvolumecalculations,sostandardnamingconventions
shouldbeappliedtoensureconsistentresults.
Whentransitioningbetweentwotemplates(goingfromatwolanetoafourlane
roadway,forexample),theRoadwayDesignerattemptstoconnecttemplate
pointsofthesamenametomodelthetransition.Templatetransitioningmakes
consistenttemplatecomponentandtemplatepointnamingevenmore
important.
Eachtemplatepointnameandcomponentnamemustbeuniquewithina
template.Foraccuratevolumecalculationsandsurfacecreation(especially
duringtemplatetransition),differenttemplatesshoulduseconsistentcomponent
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
323
TemplatePointNames
andtemplatepointnames.TheRoadwayDesignerautomaticallyappendsthe
namewithauniquenumberifthesamenameischosenduringtemplate
creation.Also,theRoadwayDesignerprovidesforautomaticprefixesandsuffixes
(suchasLT_andRT_)whencomponentsarecreatedoraddedtotheleftorright
sideoftheoriginpoint.Prefixesandsuffixesfortemplatepointnamesaredefined
usingTools>OptionsintheCreateTemplatedialog.
EdittemplatepointnamesbyrightclickingonatemplatepointandselectingEdit
Point.DoubleclickingthepointalsoinvokestheEditPointcommand.ThePoint
Propertiesdialogiswherethepointnameandsurfacefeaturestylearechanged.
Afteryouchangethepointname,clickApplytosavethechange.TheNext>and<
Previousbuttonshelptochangemultiplepointsbymovingfrompointtopoint
withinthesametemplate.SelectingtheDisplayPointsNamescheckboxinthe
DisplayportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogallowsyoutovisuallyverifythe
pointnames.
ThePointNameListisauserdefinedlistofstandardpointnamesthatcanbe
selectedduringcomponentcreationoreditingtoreducetimespententeringthe
names.ToaddnamestothePointNameList,rightclickonPointNameListinthe
TemplatefoldersandselectEdit,ordoubleclickonPointNameList.
Templates
324
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseEditingTemplatePointNames
ExerciseEditingTemplatePointNames
ContinuetoworkonthetemplatenamedConcretePavementw/Shoulder.
Thetemplatecomponentshavebeenadded,butthenamesshouldbe
changedtoreflectastandardnamingconvention.
CreatePointNames
1 RightclickonthePointNamesList,thenselectEdit.
ThePointNameListdialogopens.
2 TypeCL_CONC_BOTintheNamefield.
3 SelectP_COGO_MainCLfromtheStylelist,thenclickAdd.
4 TypeEOP_CONC_BOTintheNamefield.
5 SelectP_ROAD_EdgeOfPavementfromtheStylelist,thenclickAdd.
6 TypeSHDR_CONC_BOTintheNamefield.
7 SelectP_ROAD_ShoulderfromtheStylelist,thenclickAdd.
8 ClosethePointNameListdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
325
ExerciseEditingTemplatePointNames
EditTemplatePoints
1 Doubleclickthepointlocatedatthetemplateorigin.
ThePointPropertiesdialogopens.
2 SelectCLfromthePointNamelist,thenclickApply.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
ThepointnamesavailableinthepicklistarefromthePointNameList.
3 ClickNext>,whichwillmoveyoudownonepoint.
4 ChangetheNameasfollows:ClickApply,thenNext>andrepeat.
Name: CL_CONC_BOT
EOP
EOP_CONC_BOT
SHDR
SHDR_CONC_BOT
5 ClosethePointPropertiesdialog.
MergeComponents
1 Rightclickontheverticalsegmentseparatingtheroadandshoulder,then
selecttheMergeComponentscommand.
ThemergedcomponentisnamedCONCRETE.
2 Doubleclickonthecomponenttoverifythename.
SavetheTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>SaveintheCreateTemplatedialogtosavetheTemplate
Library.
Templates
326
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ConstrainedandUnconstrainedComponents
ConstrainedandUnconstrainedComponents
TheAddNewComponent>Constrainedcommandisusedtocreateopenor
closedshapedtemplatecomponentsusingprecisioninput.Youcanaccessthis
commandbyrightclickingontheCurrentTemplatewindoworselectingitfrom
thepulldownmenu.
Examplesofconstrainedcomponentsincludemedianbarriers,curbandgutter
sections,retainingwalls,andcomplexpavementsections.
Constrainedcomponentsarecreatedwithhorizontalandverticalconstraints
alreadyappliedtoeachpoint.
Bothclosedandopenshapedcomponentscanbecreated.Theoptiontomake
thecomponentclosedoropenisselectedbyrightclickingontheCurrent
Templatewindowduringcomponentcreation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
327
ConstrainedandUnconstrainedComponents
Whencreatingtemplatepoints,theDynamicSettingsdialogisusedtodefine
pointnamesandstyles.TheDynamicSettingsdialogisalsousedtoenterthe
preciselocationforthepoints.
Thebasicworkflowforcreatingaconstrainedcomponentisto:
SelectAddNewComponent>Constrained.
TypeintheComponentNameandselecttheStyleintheCurrentComponent
area.
TypeinthePointNameandselecttheStyleintheDynamicsSettingsdialog.
Selectthekeyintype(hs=forexample)andtypetheprecisionvalue
(12.0,2.0%forexample)intheDynamicsSettingsdialog.
PressEnterorTabtoplacethepoint.
Repeatthesestepsuntilthelasttemplatepointisplaced.
RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectFinish.
TheAddNewComponent>Unconstrainedcommandisalsousedtocreateopen
andclosedshapetemplatecomponentsusingprecisioninput.Youcanaccessthis
commandbyrightclickingontheCurrentTemplatewindoworselectingitfrom
thepulldownmenu.
ThiscommandworksthesameasusingAddNewComponent>Constrained
exceptthecomponentsarecreatedwithoutanyconstraintsonthepoints.The
constraintsareaddedmanuallyusingtheEditPointorAddConstraintcommand,
accessedbyrightclickingonanytemplatepoint
Templates
328
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent
Continueworkingonthetemplatelibraryusedinthelastexercise.
CreateaTemplateName
1 SelectthefoldernamedComponentsintheCreateTemplatesdialog.
2 RightclicktheComponentsfolder,thenselectNew>Template.
3 RenamethenewtemplateCurb.
PreparingtheSettingsBeforeComponentCreation
1 IftheDynamicSettingsdialogisnotdisplayed,selectTools>Dynamic
Settings.
2 Ifselected,cleartheDisplayPointNamescheckbox.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
329
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent(Continued)
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent(Continued)
InthisexerciseyouwillcreateaCurbcomponent.
CreatingaConstrainedComponent
1 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindow,thenselectAddNew
Component>Constrained.
2 SettheCurrentComponentoptionsasfollows:
ComponentName: CONCRETECURB
Style: P_ROAD_ConcreteCurb
3 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: SHDR(Selectfromthelist)
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: xy=0,0
4 PressEnter.
Templates
330
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent(Continued)
Precisioninputvaluesareenteredinmasterunitssuchasfeetormeters.
Youcanenterotherunitswiththeproperunitspecification,suchas6
insteadof0.5.
Whencreatingacomponentusingprecisionkeyin,ESCallowsyoutogo
back.
5 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: TOC
ApplyAffixes: Selected
PrecisionInput: xy=0.07,0.5[0.0225,0.150]
6 PressEnter.
WatchthepromptsinthelowerleftcorneroftheCreateTemplatedialog.
8 PressEnter.
7 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: BOC
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: hs=5.5,0.0[0.140,0.0]
Noticethatthesoftwareinterpreted5.5asinchesinsteadoffeetsaving
youtheneedtodothemath.
9 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: BOC_BOT
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: dl=0,16[0,0.400]
10 PressEnter.
11 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: TOC_BOT
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: dl=7.75,0[0.200,0]
12 PressEnter.
13 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectFinish.
14 SelecttheDisplayPointNamesoption.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
331
ExerciseAddingaConstrainedComponent(Continued)
SavetheTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>SaveintheCreateTemplatedialog.
Templates
332
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
BasicComponentCreationWorkflow
BasicComponentCreationWorkflow
BasicComponentCreationWorkflow
SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.ThisbringsuptheCreateTemplate
dialog.
Navigatetothetemplatefolderusedforcomponents.
SelectFile>New>TemplatefromtheCreateTemplatedialog.Namethe
newtemplate,whichisacomponent.
SelectTools>DynamicSettingsiftheDynamicSettingsdialogisnotopen.
SelectAdd>Simple,Add>Constrained,orAdd>Unconstrainedfromthe
CreateTemplatedialog.
AddtemplatecomponentsbyusingtheDynamicSettingsdialogtospecifythe
PointNameandStyle,andthepointlocations.
SelectFile>SavefromtheCreateTemplatedialogtosavethetemplate
library.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
333
CreatingEndConditions
CreatingEndConditions
Endconditionsaretemplatecomponentswhichareusedtomodelcutandfill
treatments.Theyareaddedtotheendofsimple,constrained,andunconstrained
components.
Endconditionsarecreatedlikeothertemplatecomponents.Endconditions
consistoftemplatepointsandindividualcomponents,andappearasline
segments.Theyaredifferentthansimpleandconstrainedcomponentsbecause
theyhavetheabilitytotargetsurfaces,elevations,alignmentsandsurface
features.
Anexampleofthistargetingisadesigncriteriawhichspecifiesa4:1fillslopeifa
fillheightunder6feetisencountered.Thetargettypeistheoriginalground
surface.
Tocreateanendcondition,firstselectFile>NewTemplateandnamethe
template.ThenuseAddNewComponent>EndConditiontobuildtheend
conditions.Endconditionsarestoredinthetemplatelibraryandnormallyare
createdinaseparatefolderinthetemplatelibrary.
Templates
334
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreatingEndConditions
TargetTypes
TargettypesarespecifiedintheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreate
Templatedialog,whichopensbelowtheCurrentTemplatewindowduringend
conditioncreation.
Targettypesaredefinedonlyforendconditioncomponents,andareaproperty
ofthecomponent.Toeditatargettype,opentheComponentPropertiesdialog
bydoubleclickingonthecomponentorbyrightclickingonthecomponentand
selectingEditComponent.
Asolutioncaninterceptmultipletargetsandtargettypes.Aditchdesign,for
example,mayinterceptanalignmentthatdefinesthelocationorprofileofthe
ditchbottomandthenintercepttheoriginalgroundsurfacetoformthe
backslopeoftheditch.
Surfacetargetstheactivesurfaceoranyspecifiedsurface.Usingtheactive
surfaceasthetargethelpswhenyouareapplyingtheendconditionsto
differentprojects.Thisisbecausetheendconditionwillstillworkeven
thoughthetargetsurfacenamemaybedifferent,solongasitisdesignatedas
theactivesurface.
Elevationtargetsanyspecifiedelevation.
FeatureXYtargetsthehorizontaloffsetofanyspecifiedsurfacefeature.
FeatureElevationtargetstheverticalelevationofanyspecifiedsurface
feature.
FeatureXYZtargetsthehorizontaloffsetandverticalelevationofany
specifiedsurfacefeature.
AlignmentXYtargetsthehorizontaloffsetofanyspecifiedalignment.
AlignmentElevationtargetstheverticalelevationofanyspecified
alignment.
AlignmentXYZtargetsthehorizontaloffsetandverticalelevationofany
specifiedalignment.
StyleElevationtargetstheelevationofanyspecifiedstyle.
StyleXYtargetsthehorizontaloffsetofanyspecifiedstyle.
StyleXYZtargetsthehorizontaloffsetandverticalelevationofanyspecified
style.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
335
EndConditionsSettings
EndConditionsSettings
EndConditionPriority
Simpleendconditionsconsistofcutandfillsegments.Whencreatingthe
roadwaydesign,eachconditionistestedinaspecificorder,calledthepriority.The
priorityisnumericandisassignedduringendconditioncreation,withthemost
desirableconditionsassignedthelowestprioritynumbers.Thefirstconditionto
betestedhasapriorityof1.Thenextconditiontobetestedhasapriorityof2,
andsoon.
Forexample,adesigncriteriacallsfortwofillconditions:4:1fillslopeforan8
foot[2.5m]fillheightanda3:1fillslopefora10foot[3.0m]fillheight.Inthis
example,thetargetofeachconditionistheoriginalgroundsurface.Each
conditionistestedstartingwithlowestprioritynumber.Thefirstconditionto
successfullyintersectthetarget,whichinthisexampleistheoriginalground
surface,isapplied.
Priorityisusedwhenmorethanoneendconditionstartsatthesamepoint.In
orderforanendconditionsegmenttobeplacedandusedinthedesign,a
segmentoroneofthesegmentsconnectedtothatsegmentmustsuccessfully
Templates
336
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
EndConditionsSettings
interceptitstarget.Ifasegmentoritsconnectedsegmentsdonotintercepttheir
targets,thatgroupofsegmentsfails,andthegroupofsegmentswiththenext
higherpriorityistested.Itisimportantthatendconditionshaveatleastone
solutionthatwillnotfailtointercepttheirtargets.
EndConditionSettings
Asyoucreatetheendconditions,thereareseveralsettingsthatmustbe
consideredtoobtainthedesiredresults.ThesesettingsaresetusingtheDynamic
Settingsdialogduringendconditionpointcreation.Toeditendcondition
settings,openthePointPropertiesdialogbydoubleclickingontheendcondition
pointorbyrightclickingonthepointandselectingEditPoint.
CheckforInterceptionWhenset,thelinesegmentwillsearchforthe
specifiedtarget.Ifnotset,thelinesegmentwillbecreatedatitsfullwidth
regardlessofwhetheritintersectsthetarget,providedthatoneofthe
segmentsconnectedtothissegmentsuccessfullyintersectsthetarget.
PlacePointatInterceptionWhenset,apointwillbeplacedatthelocationof
theinterception.Ifnotset,thelinesegmentwillbecreatedatitsfullwidth,
providedthatoneofthesegmentsconnectedtothissegmentsuccessfully
intersectsthetarget.
EndConditionisInfiniteWhenset,thelinesegmentwillautomaticallybe
extendedtointerceptthetargetevenwhenthewidthrequiredisgreaterthan
thespecifiedwidthforthelinesegment.Ifnotset,thelinesegmentwillonly
extendtoitsmaximumconstrainttointersectthetarget.Thisappliesonlyto
thelastlinesegmentinanendcondition.
DoNotConstructIfset,theendpointofthelinesegmentwillbeusedasa
referencepointtofindasubsequentpoint.Thepointwillbesolvedlikeany
otherendconditionpoint,butthatpointwillbeskippedwhendrawingthe
finalcomponentsegments.Thisisusedformorecomplexconditiontesting
thanisdiscussedinthistrainingmodule.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
337
ExerciseCreatingEndConditions
ExerciseCreatingEndConditions
InthisexerciseyouwillcreateanEndConditioncomponent.
CreateaNewTemplateName
1 SelecttheEndConditionsfolderintheCreateTemplatesdialog.
2 RightclicktheEndConditionsfolder,thenselectNew>Template.
3 RenamethenewtemplateSimpleCutandFill.
StarttheDynamicSettings
1 SelectTools>DynamicSettings,ifnotalreadydisplayed.
2 SelecttheDisplayPointNamescheckbox,ifnotalreadyselected.
CreateEndConditionComponents
1 RightclickontheCurrentTemplateWindowandselectAddNew
Component>EndCondition.
Theexampledesigncriteriacallsfora6:1fillslopeatfillheightsbetween0
to5[0to1.5m].
Templates
338
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreatingEndConditions
2 SettheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogas
follows:
Name: 6:1FILL
Style: P_ROAD_FillLine
TargetType: Surface
Priority: 1
Surface <Active>
3 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: BOC(selectfromlist)
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: xy=0,0
4 Withyourcursorinthexy=0,0field,pressEnter.
5 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
CheckforInterception: Selected
PlacePointatInterception: Selected
EndConditionisInfinite: Cleared
DoNotConstruct: Cleared
PointName: 6:1FILL(enterthename)
PointStyle: P_ROAD_FillLine
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: vs=5.0,1:6[1.5,1:6]
6 WithyourcursorinthePrecisionInputfield,pressEnter.
7 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectFinish.
Thetypeofkeyinusedaffectstheconstraintsthatarecreated.For
example,thevs=keyincreatesaslopeandaverticalconstraint.Thehs=
keyincreatesaslopeandahorizontalconstraint.Thexy=keyincreatesa
horizontalandaverticalconstraint.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
339
ExerciseCreatingEndConditions
8 RightclickontheBOCpointontheCurrentTemplateWindowandselect
AddNewComponent>EndCondition.
Theexampledesigncriteriacallsfora3:1fillslopeforfillheightsgreater
than5[1.5m].
9 SettheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogas
follows:
Name: 3:1FILL
Style: P_ROAD_FillLine
TargetType: Surface
Priority: 1
Surface: <Active>
10 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
CheckforInterception: Selected
PlacePointatInterception: Selected
EndConditionisInfinite: Selected
DoNotConstruct: Cleared
PointName: 3:1FILL
PointStyle: P_ROAD_FillLine
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: vs=5.0,1:3[1.5,1:3]
11 WithyourcursorinthePrecisionInputfield,pressEnter.
12 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectFinish.
Templates
340
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreatingEndConditions
13 RightclickontheBOCpointintheCurrentTemplatewindowandselect
AddNewComponent>EndCondition.
Theexampledesigncriteriacallsfora3:1cutslopeforallcutconditions.
14 SettheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogas
follows:
Name: 3:1CUT
Style: P_ROAD_CutLine
TargetType: Surface
Priority: 1
Surface: <Active>
15 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
CheckforInterception: Selected
PlacePointatInterception: Selected
EndConditionisInfinite: Selected
DoNotConstruct: Cleared
PointName: 3:1CUT
PointStyle: P_ROAD_CutLine
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: vs=5.0,33.3%[1.5,33.3%]
16 WithyourcursorinthePrecisionInputfield,pressEnter.
17 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectFinish.
SavetheTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>SaveintheCreateTemplatedialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
341
ExerciseAddingaDitchEndComponent
ExerciseAddingaDitchEndComponent
ContinuetoworkontheendconditiontemplatenamedSimpleCutand
Fill.
CreateDitchEndComponents
1 Rightclickonthe3:1FILLpointintheCurrentTemplatewindowand
selectAddNewComponent>EndCondition.
2 SettheCurrentComponentportionoftheCreateTemplatedialogas
follows:
Name: DITCH
Style: P_ROAD_Ditch
TargetType: Surface
Priority: 1
Surface: <Active>
Templates
342
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseAddingaDitchEndComponent
3 Toplacethesecondpoint,settheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: DITCHBOTTOM(selectfromlist)
CheckforInterception:
Cleared
Thisforcesthislinesegmenttobeplaced.
EndConditionisInfinite: Cleared
DoNotConstruct: Cleared
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: hs=5,1:4[1.5,1:4]
4 WithyourcursorinthePrecisionInputfield,pressEnter.
5 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: DITCHBACKSLOPE(selectfromlist)
CheckforInterception:
Cleared
Thisforcesthislinesegmenttobeplaced.
EndConditionisInfinite: Cleared
DoNotConstruct: Cleared
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: hs=5,0[1.5,0]
6 WithyourcursorinthePrecisionInputfield,pressEnter.
7 SettheDynamicSettingsdialogasfollows:
PointName: DAYLIGHT(selectfromlist)
CheckforInterception: Selected
PlacePointatInterception: Selected
EndConditionisInfinite: Selected
DoNotConstruct: Cleared
ApplyAffixes: Cleared
PrecisionInput: hs=2,25%[0.6,25%]
8 WithyourcursorinthePrecisionInputfield,pressEnter.
9 RightclickontheCurrentTemplatewindowandselectFinish.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
343
ExerciseAddingaDitchEndComponent
SavetheTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>Savetosavethetemplatelibrary.
Templates
344
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TestingtheEndConditions
TestingtheEndConditions
TestingEndConditions
EndConditionscanbetestedpriortoandduringendconditioncreation.Testing
simulateshowtheendconditionswillbehaveduringmodeling,withoutusingthe
RoadwayDesigner.
Totestthattheendconditionsproducethedesiredresults,selecttheTestbutton
locatedundertheCurrentTemplatewindow.ThisopenstheTestEndConditions
dialog.ThewindowintheTestEndConditionsdialogdisplaysnonendcondition
componentsassolidlinesandendconditionsasdottedlines.Thescaleofthis
windowisdynamicandviewcontrolsarelocatedatthebottom.
Totesttheendconditions,selectoneoftheavailabletargetsandselecttheDraw
buttonlocatedontherightsideofthedialog.Moveyourcursoroverthetesting
window.Theendconditionswillchangefromadottedlinetoasolidline,
revealingthefinalsolutionfortheproposedtargetintercept.Ifthereareany
priorityconflicts,youwillreceiveawarningmessage.SelecttheCheckPriorities
buttontoreviewandeditthepriorityofeachendcondition.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
345
ExerciseTestingtheEndConditions
ExerciseTestingtheEndConditions
ContinuetoworkontheendconditiontemplatenamedSimpleCutand
Fill.
TesttheEndConditionsandChangethePriority
1 SelectTestlocatedbelowtheCurrentTemplatewindow.
Awarningwillbegiventhatthetemplatehasendconditionpriority
conflicts.
2 ClickOKonthewarningdialog.
3 SelectCheckPrioritiesontherightsideoftheTestEndConditionsdialog.
NoticethatBOCpointisaboldwhitecolor,whichisanindicatorofthe
pointthathasthepriorityconflicts.
4 SelectEdit.
Noticethatalltheendconditionshavethesameprioritynumber.
5 Putyourcursorineachofthefieldsandnoticethesegmentshighlighting.
6 Assumethat6:1fillisthemostdesirableconditionandchangethePriority
ofthe3:1FILLto2andthePriorityofthe3:1CUTto3.
Templates
346
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseTestingtheEndConditions
7 ClickOK,thenClose.
8 ClickDrawontherightsideoftheTestEndConditionswindow.
9 Moveyourcursorovertheendconditions.
10 ChangetheUseSurfaceSlopeto10.00%andclickDrawagain.
12 ClosetheTestEndConditionsdialog.
SavetheTemplateLibrary
1 SelectFile>Savetosavethetemplatelibrary.
2 ClosetheCreateTemplatedialog.
3 ExittheCADsoftware.
11 Moveyourcursorovertheendconditions.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
347
BasicEndConditionComponentCreationWorkflow
BasicEndConditionComponentCreationWorkflow
BasicEndConditionComponentCreationWorkflow
Templates
348
SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.ThisbringsuptheCreateTemplate
dialog.
NavigatetothetemplatefolderusedforEndConditioncomponents.
SelectFile>New>TemplatefromtheCreateTemplatedialog.Namethe
newtemplate,whichisanendconditioncomponent.
SelectTools>DynamicSettingsiftheDynamicSettingsdialogisnotopen.
SelectAdd>EndConditionfromtheCreateTemplatedialog.
AddendconditioncomponentsbyusingtheDynamicSettingsdialogto
specifythePointNameandStyle,andthepointlocations.
SelectFile>SavefromtheCreateTemplatedialogtosavethetemplate
library.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Understandtemplatepointconstraintsandcomponents.
Createtemplatecomponents.
Createacompletetemplatefromthecomponents.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
349
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:Pointconstraintsareusedtomanagethebehaviorof
templatepoints.
True
False
2 AFullyConstrainedpointcontainsamaximumofhowmany
constraints?
ANone
BOne
CTwo
DThree
3 NamethreetypesofConstraints.
A
B
C
4 TrueorFalse:Thetoppointsofasimplecomponentareconstrainedto
pointsdirectlybelowthembyhorizontalandverticalconstraints.
True
False
5 Whichtemplatecomponentisusedtomodelcutandfilltreatments?
AConstrained
BSimple
CEndCondition
DUnconstrained
Templates
350
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:Pointconstraintsareusedtomanagethebehaviorof
templatepoints.
TruePointconstraintsareusedtomanagethebehavioroftemplate
points.Theyareusedsothatifapointismovedinatemplate,eitherby
theusereditingthetemplateorbytheapplicationofpointcontrolsduring
thedesignprocessing,allthepointsrelatedtothepointbeingmovedwill
behaveinapredictablemanner.
2 AFullyConstrainedpointcontainsamaximumofhowmany
constraints?
CApointwithtwoconstraintsisconsideredfullyconstrained.
3 NamethreetypesofConstraints.
AHorizontalConstraint
BVerticalConstraint
CSlopeConstraint
4 TrueorFalse:Thetoppointsofasimplecomponentareconstrainedto
pointsdirectlybelowthembyhorizontalandverticalconstraints.
FalseThelowerpointsareconstrainedtopointsdirectlyabovethemby
horizontalandverticalconstraints.
5 Whichtemplatecomponentisusedtomodelcutandfilltreatments?
CEndConditionsaretemplatecomponentswhichareusedtomodelcut
andfilltreatments.Theyareaddedtotheendofsimple,constrained,and
unconstrainedcomponents.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
351
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
1Hour40Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Templates
352
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
Createaroadwaytemplatefromscratchandusethattemplatetocreatea
roadwaydesign.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\Templates\Task\Firethorne.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Templates\Task\Task
Templates.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: FirethorneRoad.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\ExistingGroundSurvey.dtm
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
353
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createaroadwaytemplatefromscratchandaroadwaydesign.
UsethehorizontalalignmentnamedFirethorneRoad.
UsetheverticalalignmentnamedProfileGrade.
Createacompletetemplateusingthesketchesprovidedonthe
followingpages.
Createcomponentsseparately.
ClearApplyAffixeswhencreatingcomponents.
UsethestyleP_ROAD_ConcretefortheSidewalkcomponent.
DraganddropcompletedcomponentswithApplyAffixesselected.
AdjusttemplatepointlocationsorconstraintsusingtheEditPoint
commandifnecessary.
Testtheendconditionspriortocreatingthesurfacemodel.
UsethePointNamesListtocreateanymissingpointnamesand
associatedstyles(mostpointnameshavealreadybeencreated).
Createaroadwaydesignanddesignsurface.
Createcrosssectionsandreviewthedesign.
Saveallnewormodifiedfiles.
Forassistancewithassemblingatemplatefromcomponents,refertothe
RoadwayDesignerOverviewtrainingmodule.
Tips
StartthecurbattheShoulderpointandworkinacounterclockwise
direction.
IfyouhavedifficultycreatingAGGREGATETYPEBpavementlayer,
thencreateallothercomponentsfirst.
TheCut&FillDetailisnottoscale,sobesuretousethevalues
specifiedfortheclearzonesoneachendcondition.
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Templates
354
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
RoadwayDetail
RoadwayDetail
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
355
CurbandGutterDetail
CurbandGutterDetail
Templates
356
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CutandFillDetail
CutandFillDetail
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Templates
357
CutandFillDetail
Templates
358
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
Thismoduleteacheshowtousemultipletemplatesinasingledesignprocess.You
willlearnhowtocontrolthetransitionofpointsandcomponentsbetweenthe
dissimilartemplates.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
359
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill
TemplateTransitioning
360
LearnaboutTransitioningTemplates.
CreateTransitioningTemplates.
Createadesignmodelofthetransitioningroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartMicroStationandInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoads/PowerInRoadsshortcut
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
Transitioning\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileSR2067Bypass.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
Transitioning\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeTemplateTransitioning.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\SR2067
BypassExistingGround.dtm
GeometryProject: SR2067Bypass.alg
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: SR2067Bypass.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
361
TemplateTransitioning
TemplateTransitioning
Morecomplicateddesignsoftencallformultipletemplatesthatvarythroughout
thecorridor.Whenevertwoormoredifferenttemplatesareappliedtoasingle
corridorusingtheRoadwayDesigner,transitioningbetweenthetemplates
occurs.Forexample,atemplatetransitionoccurswhentheroadwaydesign
changesfromatwolanetoafourlaneroadway.
Transitioningcanbeassimpleasthewidthofthetravellaneincreasing.
Regardlessofthetransitioncomplexity,transitionsmustbeidentifiedandverified
toobtaindesirableresults.Howtemplatepointsareconnectedbetweentwo
consecutivetemplatesgreatlyinfluencesthedesignresults.
TemplateTransitioning
362
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
MultipleTemplateDrops
MultipleTemplateDrops
MultipleTemplateDrops
Templatetransitionsoccurbetweentemplatesthathavedifferentnamesinthe
TemplateDropsdialog.Toholdatemplatecrosssectionthroughastationrange,
assignthetemplateatitsstartingstationandassignthesametemplateagainat
thestationwhereitstartsitstransition.
Intheexampleabove,thetemplatenamedTwoLanestartsatStation100+00and
ishelduntilStation120+00.BetweenStation120+00and125+00theTwoLane
transitionstotheThreeLanetemplate.Thisiscalledthetemplatetransitionarea.
Ifnoothertemplatesareapplieddownstationof125+00,theThreeLane
templatewillcontinuetotheendofthecorridor.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
363
TemplateTransitionAreas
TemplateTransitionAreas
TemplateTransitionAreas
WhenaddingmorethanonetemplateusingtheTemplateDropscommand,
templatetransitionareasaredisplayedintheRoadwayDesignersPlanView
window.Theyareshownascoloredrectanglesbetweenthetemplatedrops.
Templatedropsareshownastransversebrowncoloredlines.
TemplateTransitioning
364
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TransitionAreaColors
TransitionAreaColors
TransitionAreaColors
Thecolorofthetransitionareasindicatestheconditionofthetransitionwith
respecttohowthepointsareconnected.Templatepointsoftwodifferent
templatesareconnectedautomaticallyiftheyhavethesamepointnames.Thisis
themostdesirablecondition.Ifthepointsnamesaredifferentorthenumberof
pointsbetweenthetwotemplatesarenotthesame,thenthepointconnection
mustbemanuallyspecifiedforeachtransition.Regardlessofthecondition,each
transitionareamustbeverifiedpriortoprocessing.Templatepointconstraints
greatlyaffectthetransitioningresults.
Aredcolortransitionmeansthatnoneofthetemplatepointsareconnected
becausethepointnamesbetweenthetwotemplatesdonotmatch.
Ayellowcolortransitionmeansthatsomeofthepointsareconnectedby
similarnames,butadditionalconnectionsstillneedtobedefined.
Alightbluecolormeansthatnotallthepointsareconnected,butthe
transitionhasbeenreviewed.
Adarkbluecolormeansallthepointsareconnectedandthetransitionhas
beenreviewed.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
365
ExerciseTransitionfromTwotoThreeLanes
ExerciseTransitionfromTwotoThreeLanes
ContinueworkingwiththefileSR2067Bypass.
CreateaNewCorridor
1 SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
2 SelectCorridor>CorridorManagement.
3 IntheNamefield,typeTemplateTransitioning.
4 ClickAdd,thenClose.
TemplateTransitioning
366
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseTransitionfromTwotoThreeLanes
CreateTemplateDrops
1 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
3 SelectthetemplatenamedTwolaneagainandtype170+00[15+600]for
theStationandclickAdd.
4 SelectthetemplatenamedThreelaneandtype180+00[15+900]forthe
StationandclickAdd.
5 ClosetheTemplateDropsdialog.
6 ObservetheyellowtransitionareainthePlanViewwindow.
7 ReviewthetemplatetransitioningintheCrossSectionViewwindow.
Noticethatnotransitioningoccursbetweenthetwotemplates.
SavetheRoadwayDesign
1 SelectFile>Savetosavetheroadwaydesign.
2 IntheLibraryTemplatessection,browsetotheTemplatesfolder,select
thetemplatenamedTwolaneandtype150+00[15+000]forthestation
andclickAdd.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
367
TransitionVerification
TransitionVerification
TransitionVerification
Toreviewthetransitionareas,doubleclickonthetransitionareainthePlanView
window.ThisdisplaystheEditTransitiondialog,whichshowsthepoint
connectionsbetweenthetwotemplates.
Templatepointswhichhavesimilarnamesareconnectedwithlinesegments.
Templatepointsthatarenotconnected,eitherbecausetheydonthavesimilar
namesorthenumberoftemplatespointsdiffer,displayasboldcoloredpoints.To
connectanunconnectedpoint,firstclickonanyboldpointandthenclickonthe
connectionpoint.Alinesegmentisdrawnbetweenthepoints.Thefeaturestyle
andnameusedforthelineisdeterminedbythefirstpointselectedwhen
connectingpoints.
TemplateTransitioning
368
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TransitionVerification
The3Ddisplaycanbemanipulatedusingtheviewcontrolslocatedatthebottom
oftheview.Tomovethetemplateintheview,rightclickonanytemplatepoint
andselectMoveTemplate.Movingthetemplatesmakesiteasiertoconnect
morecomplicatedtemplates.Endconditioncomponentsarenotshownoredited
duringthisprocess.
Asinglepointcanhavemorethanoneconnection.Toremoveaconnectionline,
rightclickonthelineandselectDelete.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
369
ExerciseEditTransitionConnections
ExerciseEditTransitionConnections
ContinueworkingonthecorridornamedTemplateTransitioning.
IdentifytheTransitionArea
1 DoubleclicktheyellowtransitionareaonthePlanViewwindow.
ConnecttheFreePoints
1 Clicktheboldpoint,whichisnotconnected(ThreelaneRT_Pass_Lane),
andclicktherightedgeofpavementpoint(TwolaneRT_EOP).
Thisdrawsaconnectinglinebetweenthesepoints.
2 RightclickonanypointandselectMoveTemplate.
3 Movethetemplateandclicktoendthemoveoperation.
4 Rightclicktostopthedynamicmove.
5 ClickOKtoacceptthetransitionconnections.
6 ClickOKontheReminderdialogthattheconstraintsmustberemoved.
7 LeavetheEditTransitionMidpointdialogOPEN.Itwillbeusedinthenext
exercise.
TemplateTransitioning
370
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
TemplateTransitioning
TransitionTesting
AfterthepointsareconnectedusingtheEditTransitiondialog,thetransitioningis
reviewedandeditedusingtheEditTransitionMidpointdialog.Thisdialog
displaysacrosssectionviewofthetwotemplatesastheytransition.Thedialog
startsbydisplayingthemidpointbetweenthetwotemplates.Locatedonthe
bottomofthewindowisasliderbarwhichisusedtoviewdifferentlocationson
thetransition.
Ifthetemplatepointsareconstrainedinamannerthatprohibitsthetemplate
transition,theycanbeeditedinthisdialog.JustlikeintheCreateTemplate
dialog,rightclickingonanypointbringsuptheeditingoptions.Youcanalso
doubleclickonanypointtobringupthePointPropertiesdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
371
ExerciseTransitionTesting
ExerciseTransitionTesting
ContinueworkingonthecorridornamedTemplateTransitioning.
YoushouldhavetheEditTransitionMidpointdialogshownfromthe
previousexercise.
ReviewtheTransition
1 SelecttheDisplayPointNamescheckboxatthebottomoftheEdit
TemplateMidpointdialog.
2 Movethetemplatesliderbar.
Noticethetemplatedoesnottransition.
ChangePointConstraints
1 RightclickonthepointnamedRT_PASS_LANEandselect
Delete Both Constraints.
2 RightclickonthepointnamedRT_PASS_LANEagainandselectAdd
Constraint>Slope.
3 ClicktheRT_EOPpoint.(Notepromptsonlowerleftofdialog).
4 ClickOKontheAddSlopeConstraintdialog(2.0%slope).
TemplateTransitioning
372
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseTransitionTesting
5 Movethetemplatesliderbaragain.
Thetransitionshouldbeworkingnow.
6 ClickOKwhendone.
NoticethatthecolorofthetransitionareainthePlanViewwindowis
nowdarkblue,indicatingthatallpointsareconnectedandthetransition
hasbeenreviewed.
ProcessAllandReview
1 SelectProcessAllandreviewthetransitioningintheCrossSectionView
window.
2 SelectCorridor>CreateSurfaces.
3 TypeFinishedinthesurfacenamefield.
4 SelecttheFeaturescheckboxintheDisplayinPlanViewarea.
5 ClickApplythenClose.
6 SelectFile>Savetosavetheroadwaydesign.
7 ClosetheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
8 ReviewtheplanviewgraphicsofthetransitionareaintheCADfile.
SavetheRoadwayDesign
1 SavethesurfaceFinishedtothedirectoryC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\TemplateTransitioning\Practice\.
2 ExittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
373
TemplateTransitioningWorkflow
TemplateTransitioningWorkflow
BasicTemplateTransitioningWorkflow
SelectTemplateDropsandaddmorethanonetemplatedrop.
IdentifythetemplatetransitionareasonthePlanViewwindow,whichwillbe
asolidcoloredrectanglelocatedbetweenthetemplatedrops.
Verifythefirsttemplatetransitionbydoubleclickingthetransitionareainthe
PlanViewarea.
VerifythepointconnectionsarecorrectintheEditTransitiondialog.Addor
modifythepointconnections,ifneeded,byclickingonnonconnectedpoints
andconnectingthemtotheappropriatepoints.
ReviewthetransitioningintheEditTransitionMidpointdialogbyusingthe
transitionsliderbar.Ifpointconstrainteditsareneededtoresolvethe
transition,rightclickonanypointandedittheconstraints.
Repeatthisprocessforalltransitions.
SelectProcessAllandreviewtheresultsofthedesign.
SelectFile>Savetosavetheroadwaydesign.
TemplateTransitioning
374
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
UnderstandTransitioningTemplates.
CreateTransitioningTemplates.
Createadesignmodelofthetransitioningroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
375
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:Templatetransitionsoccurbetweentemplatesthathave
differentnamesintheTemplateDropsdialog.
True
False
2 DescribethedifferentTransitionAreacolors,listedbelow:
Red
Yellow
Lightblue
Darkblue
3 TrueorFalse:Whenverifyingatemplatetransition,aboldcoloredpoint
indicatesagoodconnection.
True
False
TemplateTransitioning
376
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:Templatetransitionsoccurbetweentemplatesthathave
differentnamesintheTemplateDropsdialog.
2 DescribethedifferentTransitionAreacolors,listedbelow:
RedNotemplatepointsareconnectedbecausethepointnamesarenot
similar.
YellowSometemplatepointsareconnectedbysimilarnames.
LightblueNotallpointsareconnected,butthetransitionhasbeen
reviewed.
DarkblueAllpointsareconnectedandreviewed.
3 TrueorFalse:Whenverifyingatemplatetransition,aBoldcoloredpoint
indicatesagoodconnection.
FalseBoldcoloredpointsindicatenoconnection.
TrueTemplatetransitionsoccurbetweentemplatesthathavedifferent
namesintheTemplateDropsdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
377
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
20Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
TemplateTransitioning
378
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
UsetheRoadwayDesignertocreatearoadwaythattransitionsfromfour
lanestotwolanes.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
Transitioning\Task\SR1455.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
Transitioning\Task\TaskTemplateTransitioning.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: SR1455.alg
ExistingGround: ExistingGroundSurvey.dtm
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
379
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createaroadwaythattransitionsfromfourlanestotwolanes.
Createadesignsurface.
Createcrosssectionsandreviewthedesign.
Saveallnewormodifiedfiles.
HorizontalAlignmentName:SR1455.
VerticalAlignmentName:ProfileGrade.
Fourlanestartsat122+46.41[12+246.41].
Transitionstartsat130+50[12+490].
Fourlanetotwolanetransitionis400feet[120m].
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
TemplateTransitioning
380
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TransitionDetail
TransitionDetail
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateTransitioning
381
TransitionDetail
TemplateTransitioning
382
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
ThismoduleteacheshowtouseTemplatePointControlstooverridethenormal
horizontalandverticallocationsoftemplatepointsduringthemodelingprocess.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
383
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill
TemplatePointControls
384
Learnabouttemplatepointcontrols.
Createhorizontalandverticalcontrols.
Createadesignmodeloftheroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartMicroStationandInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoads/PowerInRoadsshortcut
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
PointControls\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileSR2067Bypass.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
PointControls\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeTemplatePointControls.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\SR2067
BypassExistingGround.dtm
GeometryProject: SR2067Bypass.alg
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: SR2067Bypass.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
385
TemplatePointControls
TemplatePointControls
TemplatePointControls
TemplatePointControlsareusedtooverridethenormalhorizontalandvertical
locationsoftemplatepointsduringthemodelingprocess.Designexamples
includelanewidening,rampandintersectiondesign,superelevation,anddivided
highwayswithseparategradelines.
Theseoverridesareaccomplishedbyassigningtemplatepointnamesto
alignmentsorsurfacefeatures.Theassignedtemplatepointswillfollowthe
alignmentsorsurfacefeaturesusinghorizontaland/orverticalcontrolswithina
specifiedstationrange.
TemplatePointControls
386
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
PointControlCommands
PointControlCommands
PointControlsareusedtoassignhorizontaland/orverticalcontrolstotemplate
points.Pointcontrolsareaddedtothedesignafterthecorridoriscreatedandthe
templatedropsareassignedtothecorridor.Pointcontrolsarespecifiedbythe
corridorsalignmentstationing,andnotbythestationingonthecontrolling
alignment.Pointcontrolsautomaticallyoverridealltemplatepointconstraintson
thepointbeingcontrolled.Constraintsonallotherpointsareobeyed.
PointControlsBasicWorkflow
SelectCorridor>PointControls.
Selectthetemplatepointnameyouwanttocontrol.
Selectwhetheryouwanttocontrolthepointhorizontally,verticallyorboth
usingtheModeoption.
Selectthecorridorshorizontalstationinglimitswherethecontrolisbeing
applied.
Selecttheappropriatehorizontaland/orverticalalignmentwhichis
controllingthespecifiedtemplatepoint.
ClickAdd.Repeatthesestepsforeachcontrolpoint.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
387
ExerciseAssignHorizontalControl
ExerciseAssignHorizontalControl
CreateaNewCorridor
1 SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
2 SelectCorridor>CorridorManagement.
3 TypePointControlsintheCorridorNamefield.
4 ClickAdd,thenClose.
CreateTemplateDrops
1 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
2 BrowsetotheTemplatesfolderandselectthetemplatenamedTwolane.
3 IntheStationfield,type150+00[15+000].
4 ClickAdd,thenClose.
CreatePointControls
1 SelectCorridor>PointControls.
2 SelectLT_EOPfromthePointlist.
3 SettheModetoHorizontal.
TemplatePointControls
388
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseAssignHorizontalControl
4 SettheControlTypetoAlignment.
5 SelectOffsetfromtheHorizontalAlignmentlist.
6 ClickAdd,thenclickClose.
Theoffsetalignmentwidensthetwolaneroadwaytothreelanesbetween
stations225+92.38to245+92.38[17+314.16to17+923.76].
ProcessAllandReview
1 SelectProcessAllandreviewthedesign,especiallybetween225+00and
246+00[17+300and18+000].
Youshouldseetheroadwaywidenontheleftsideofthecenterline.
2 SelectCorridor>CreateSurface.
3 TypeFinishedintheNamefield.
4 SelectthePreferencenamedFinishedSurface.
5 SelecttheFeaturecheckboxintheDisplayinPlanViewarea.
6 ClickApply,thenClose.
7 ReviewthetransitiongraphicsintheCADfile.
SavetheRoadwayDesignandDesignSurface
1 SelectFile>Save.
2 SavethesurfaceFinaltotheC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\TemplatePointControls\Practice\folder.
3 ExittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
389
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
TemplatePointControls
390
Understandtemplatepointcontrols.
Createhorizontalandverticalcontrols.
Createadesignmodeloftheroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
AHorizontalAlignment
BVerticalAlignment
CSurface/DTMFeature
DGraphicsfromaCADfile
ETemplatepointonanothercorridor
2 TrueorFalse:Templatepointcontrolsareusedtooverridethenormal
horizontalandverticallocationsoftemplatepointsduringthemodeling
process.
True
False
1 Whichofthefollowingtypesofcontrolscanbedirectlyusedtodefinea
PointControl?(Selectallthatapply)
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
391
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 Whichofthefollowingtypesofcontrolscanbedirectlyusedtodefinea
PointControl?(Selectallthatapply)
AllPointcontrolsexceptDcanbedefinedfromalignments,surface
features,andtemplatepoints,buttheycannotbedirectlydefinedfrom
graphicelements.Thegraphicelementmustbeimportedintoan
alignmentorsurfacefeaturefirst.
2 TrueorFalse:Templatepointcontrolsareusedtooverridethenormal
horizontalandverticallocationsoftemplatepointsduringthemodeling
process.
TrueTemplatepointcontrolsareusedtooverridethenormalhorizontal
andverticallocationsoftemplatepointsduringthemodelingprocess.
TemplatePointControls
392
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
20Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
393
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
UsetheRoadwayDesignertocreateadividedroadwaywherethegradelineof
eachroadwayisdifferent.Createandreviewthefinaldesignsurface.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Template
PointControls\Task\I598Reconstruction.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\TemplatePoint
Controls\Task\TaskTemplatePointControls.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: I598Reconstruction.alg
ExistingGround: ExistingGroundSurvey.dtm
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
TemplatePointControls
394
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createadividedroadwaywherethegradelineofeachroadwayis
different.
HintWhenopeningthefilestakealookattheAlignmentsandthe
Templatetogetagoodunderstandingoftheproject.Createthecorridor
usingtheI598EBalignment.
Reviewthetemplatenamedfourlanedivided.Itincludestwo12[3.6
m]laneswith10[3.0m]shoulders(improvedfrom6[2.0m]on
inside).
Createaroadwaydesignofadividedroadway(EBandWBlanes)with
differentgradelines.
I598EBistheprimarycorridoralignment.
Startingstation266+25.87[26+625.87].
Endingstation288+50[27+304].
TemplateDropIntervalis5[1.5m].
Usethefollowingalignmentstocontrolspecifictemplatepointsas
shownontheProjectDetailsillustrationonthefollowingpages.I598
WB,MedianDitch,EBOutsideShoulder
Createthedesignsurface.
Createcrosssectionsandreviewthedesign.CrossSectionsRight
Offset:200feet[60m].
Saveallnewormodifiedfiles.
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplatePointControls
395
ProjectDetails
ProjectDetails
Legend #
Alignment
Name
EBInsideEdgeof Controllingcorridor
Pavement
alignment
MedianDitch
Bottomof
MedianDitch
Horizontaland
Vertical
I598WB
WBInsideEdge
ofPavement
Horizontaland
Vertical
EBOutside
Shoulder
Horizontal
2.
3.
EBOutside
Shoulder
TemplatePointControls
396
TYPE OF CONTROL
I598EB
1.
4.
DESCRIPTION
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
Inthismoduleyouwilllearntoapplysuperelevationtospecificsegmentsofthe
roadwaytemplate,controlshoulderslopes,andgenerateasuperelevationreport.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
397
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill
Superelevation
398
Learntoapplysuperelevationandrolloverlocks.
Createsuperelevationandrolloverlocks.
Createadesignmodeloftheroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartMicroStationandInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoads/PowerInRoadsshortcut
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\Superelevation\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileSR2067Bypass.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\Superelevation\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeSuperelevation.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\SR2067
BypassExistingGround.dtm
GeometryProject: SR2067Bypass.alg
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: SR2067Bypass.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
399
SuperelevationTerminology
SuperelevationTerminology
SuperelevationTerminology
CrownThehighestpointofaroadway;thecrownpointcanbe(dependingon
designspecifications)thepointtheroadwaypivotsaboutduringsuperelevation.
LeftandRightRangePointThelimitsoftheSuperelevationsection.The
superelevationnormallydoesnotincludetheshoulders.
CrossSlopeThetransverseslopebetweentheCrownandleftorrightRange
Point.
SuperelevationSectionAnamedportionoftheroadbeingsuperelevated
definedusingtheCreateSuperelevationWizard.
Superelevation
400
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SuperelevationTerminology
SuperelevationTerminology
NormalCrownThenormalcrosssectionoftheroadwhentheroadisnotbeing
superelevated.
ZeroCrossSlopeWhenthehighsideofthesuperelevatedroadwayhasazero
crossslopebetweentheCrownPointandthehighsideRangePoint.
ReverseCrownWhenthehighsidecrossslopeequalsthelowsideNormal
Crowncrossslope.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
401
SuperelevationTerminology
SuperelevationTerminology
FullSuperWhenthecrossslopereachesitsmaximumsuperelevation.
SuperRunoffThelengthofthetransitionbetweentheZeroCrossSlopeandFull
Super.
SuperRunoutThelengthofthetransitionbetweentheNormalCrownandZero
CrossSlope.
Superelevation
402
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SuperelevationTerminology
SuperelevationTerminology
Asuperelevationsectionisanamedportionoftheroadwhichisbeing
superelevated.ItisdefinedbyusingtheCreateSuperelevationWizard.Agiven
Corridorcanhaveoneormanysuperelevationsections.
Foreachsuperelevationsection,youdefineaname,thenselectthecrownpoint,
theleftandrightrangepoint,andthepivotpoint.Inadividedhighwayscenario,
whereyouhavetwodifferentpivotpoints,twosuperelevationsectionsare
created.Thesuperelevationwizardwillcreatecontrolslineswhichbelongtoeach
section,thusallowingthepointstomoveverticallyaboutthespecifiedpivot
point(s).
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
403
CreatingSuperelevation
CreatingSuperelevation
SuperelevationiscreatedandappliedusingtheRoadwayDesigner,afterthe
corridoriscreatedandtemplatedropsareassigned.Superelevationisstoredand
savedintheroadwaydesignfile(.ird),andisappliedtoacorridor.
TheCreateSuperelevationwizardisusedtocreatesuperelevation.When
superelevationiscreated,superelevationpointcontrolsareautomaticallycreated
andareaddedtothePointsControldialog.Superelevationpointcontrolsare
verticalcontrols.Asinnormalpointcontrols,superelevationpointcontrols
automaticallyoverridetemplatepointconstraints.
Superelevation
404
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SuperelevationWizard
SuperelevationWizard
TheCreateSuperelevationwizardwalksyouthroughthestepsnecessaryto
createandapplysuperelevationtothecorridor.SelectSuperelevation>Create
SuperelevationWizard>Tabletostartthewizard.ThisbringsuptheTable
Wizarddialog.Itisimportanttounderstandthatthewizardcannotbeusedto
editanypreviouslycreatedsuperelevation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
405
TableWizard
TableWizard
TheTableWizarddialogisusedtoinputsuperelevationdatasuchasthename,
locationofthesuperelevationratetable,andtheparametersthatrelatetothe
superelevationtransition.TheratetableisanASCIIfilecontainingsuperelevation
ratesandtransitionlengthsbasedondesignspeed.Thetablehasthedefault
extensionof.sup.Anexampleofaratetableisshownonthenextpage.
BasicWorkflow
Selecttheappropriatesuperelevationtablenameandlocationbyselecting
BrowsenexttotheTablefield.
Setuptheappropriatesuperelevationtransitioningparameters.
ClickLoadValuesFromTable.
ClickNext>.
ThisdisplaystheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialog.
Superelevation
406
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TableWizard
*BENTLEYSYSTEMSINROADSSUPERELEVATIONRATETABLE
*
*DesignSpeed
70.000
*2lane4lane
*DegCrvRadiusSuperRatespllgtspl_lgt
*
0^15'00.000"22918.000nc0.0000.000
0^30'00.000"11459.000rc200.000200.000
0^45'00.000"7639.000.026200.000200.000
1^00'00.000"5730.000.033200.000200.000
1^30'00.000"3820.000.046200.000200.000
2^00'00.000"2865.000.055200.000230.000
2^30'00.000"2292.000.059200.000260.000
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
407
ExerciseCreateaNewCorridor
ExerciseCreateaNewCorridor
CreateaNewCorridor
1 SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
2 SelectCorridor>CorridorManagement.
3 TypeSuperelevationintheCorridorNamefield.
4 ClickAdd,thenClose.
Superelevation
408
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaNewCorridor
CreateTemplateDrops
1 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
2 BrowsetotheTemplatesfolderandselecttheTwolanetemplate.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
3 Type150+00[15+000]intheStationfield.
4 Type20[5m]intheIntervalfield.
5 ClickAdd,thenClose.
CreateSuperelevationWizardandSelectTable
1 SelectSuperelevation>CreateSuperelevationWizard>Table.
ThisdisplaystheTableWizarddialog.
2 ClicktheBrowsebuttonnexttotheTablefieldtoselectandopentherate
tablenamed06_60.sup[06_120k.sup]fromtheC:\Bentley
Training\InRoadsFundamentals\Superelevation\Practice\folder.
3 ClickLoadValuesFromTableintheTableWizarddialog.
Reviewthesuperelevationrates.
4 ClickNext>.
ThisdisplaystheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialog.
5 LeavetheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialogOPEN.Itwillbeused
inthenextexercise.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
409
SuperelevationSection
SuperelevationSection
SuperelevationSectionDefinitionsDialog
TheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialogisusedtospecifywhichpavement
sectionstosuperelevate,basedonacrosssectionview.Thesesectionsarenamed
duringtheprocess.
Onatwolaneroadway,onlyonesectionisneeded.Multiplesectionsareusedfor
dividedroadways.
Whenspecifyingpavementsections,theCrownPoint,LeftandRightRangePoints
areselected.Thesepointscanbeselecteddirectlyfromthecrosssectionviewor
fromtheirrespectivedropdownlists.
TheCrownPointisnormallythecenterlineofatwolaneroadway,butitcanbe
anypointwherethepavementbreaksslope.
RangePointsmarktheportionoftheroadwaythatwillbesuperelevated.
ShouldersareconsideredtobethenextsegmentspasttheextentoftheRange
PointsandaretypicallynotincludedwhenselectingtheRangePoints.
Superelevation
410
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SuperelevationSection
ThePivotDirectionisthelocationofthepointthesuperelevationispivoted
about.
ClickAddintheSuperelevationSectionsDefinitionsdialog.Thisdisplays
theAddSuperelevationSectiondialog.
Enterthenameofthesuperelevationsection.
SelecttheCrownPoint,LeftRangePoint,andRightRangePointusingthe
dropdownlistsorbyselectingthepointsusingTargetlocatednexttoeach
field.IfusingTarget,clickonthecrosssectionviewwindowtoselectthe
appropriatepoints.
SelectthePivotDirectionfromthedropdownlist.
SelecttheNumberofLanesandtheappropriateStationLimits,ifany.Ifyou
donotselectStationLimits,superelevationwillbeappliedtotheentire
corridor.
SelectOK.
Repeatthesestepsonallsections.
ClickNext;thisdisplaystheSuperelevationControlsdialog.
BasicWorkflow
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
411
SuperelevationControls
SuperelevationControls
SuperelevationControlsDialog
TheSuperelevationControlsdialogshowsthenamesofthepointcontrolsthat
willbecreated.ThenamescanbechangedbyselectingtheEditbutton.Thisis
alsowhereyoucansetthestationroundingbyusingtheRoundStationtoNearest
option.Stationroundingallowsyoutoroundsuperelevationstationsupordown.
Forexample,insteadofthefullsuperelevationstationbeingcomputedas
245+45.96,itcouldberoundedtonearestfoot[meter](245+46.00)usinga
roundingvalueof0+01.00.
BasicWorkflow
Superelevation
412
Reviewandeditthesuperelevationpointcontrols.
SettheRoundStationtoNearestoptionandselecttheroundingvalue,if
stationroundingisdesired.
ClickNext>.Iftherearesuperelevationoverlaps,thisdisplaysthe
Fix Superelevation Overlapdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateaSuperelevationSection
ExerciseCreateaSuperelevationSection
Continueworkingonthelastpracticeactivity.
TheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialogshouldstillbedisplayed
fromthelastpracticeactivity.
CreateSuperelevationSectionDefinitions
1 ClickAddintheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialog.
TheAddSuperelevationSectiondialogopens.
2 TypeTwolaneSuperelevation fortheNameofthesection.
3 UsetheTargetbuttonnexttotheCrownPointfieldandclickthe
centerlinepointontheCrossSectionview.
ThisreturnstheCrownPointnameasCL.
4 UsetheTargetbuttonnexttotheLeftRangePointfieldandclicktheleft
edgeofpavementpointontheCrossSectionview.
ThisreturnstheLeftRangePointnameasLT_EOP.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
413
ExerciseCreateaSuperelevationSection
5 UsetheTargetbuttonnexttotheRightRangePointfieldandclickthe
rightedgeofpavementpointontheCrossSectionview.
ThisreturnstheRightRangePointnameasRT_EOP.
6 ThePivotDirectionshouldbesettoFromCrownPoint.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
7 TheNumberofLanesshouldbesettoTwo.
8 StationLimitsshouldbecleared,whichwillresultinsuperelevatingthe
entirecorridor.
9 ClickOK.
ReviewtheSuperelevationControls
1 ReviewtheinformationintheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialog.
2 ClickNext>.
ThisdisplaystheSuperelevationControlsdialog.
3 ReviewtheinformationintheSuperelevationControlsdialog.
4 SelecttheRoundStationtoNearestoptionandsettheroundingvalueto
0+01.00[0+001].
5 ClickFinish.
ThereisanoverlapinthecomputedsuperelevationsotheFix
SuperelevationOverlapdialogopenssotheoverlapcanbecorrected.The
superelevationcannotbesaveduntiltheoverlapiscorrected.
6 LeavetheFixSuperelevationOverlapdialogOPEN.Wewilluseitinthe
nextexercise.
Superelevation
414
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
FixingOverlap
FixingOverlap
FixSuperelevationOverlapDialog
TheFixSuperelevationOverlapdialogisusedtoresolvesuperelevationoverlaps.
Itappearsautomaticallyifthereisasuperelevationoverlap.Anoverlapoccurs
whenthereisnotenoughdistancetofitthesuperelevationtransitionlengths
betweencurves,orthecorridoralignmentstartsorendsinasuperelevation
transition.
Superelevationoverlapscanberesolvedbyeithershiftingthetransitionlength
ontothenextcurveorpreviouscurve,orbyreducingthetotaltransitionlength.
Toshiftthetransition,enterthedistanceyouwanttoshiftthetransitioninthe
ShiftTransitionOntoCurvebyfieldsforthePreviousCurveorNextCurve.The%
RunoffonCurveand%TransitiononCurveareusedforreadoutonlyandwill
showyouRunoffandTotalTransitionpercentagesonthecurvesasyoushiftthe
transitions.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
415
FixingOverlap
Toreducethetotaltransitionlength,enterthetransitionlengthreductioninthe
ReduceTransitionLengthbyfields,locatedinthePreviousCurveareaorNext
Curveareas.ThenewlengthisreflectedintheNewLengthfield.Youmustmove
thecursortoanotherfieldorusetheTabkeytoupdatethelengthvalue.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
TheNewLengthfieldcanalsobeusedtospecifythenewreducedlength,without
usingtheReduceTransitionLengthbyfield,producingthesameresults.
Thediagramatthetopofthedialogdynamicallydisplaystheoverlapsandthe
resultsofshiftandchangingthetransitionlengths.Clickingonthediagramand
holdingdowntheleftmousebuttonallowsyoutodynamicallyslidethe
transitions.
BasicWorkflow
Superelevation
416
Toshiftthetransitionontoacurve,entertheshiftdistanceintheShift
TransitionOntoCurvebyfields.
Toreducethetransitionlength,enterthetransitionlengthreductioninthe
ReduceTransitionLengthbyfields.
ClickApply.
ClickNext>tomovetothenextoverlap,ifnecessary.
Repeatforalloverlaps.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCorrectingaSuperelevationOverlap
ExerciseCorrectingaSuperelevationOverlap
Continueworkingonthelastpracticeactivity.
TheFixSuperelevationOverlapdialogshouldstillbedisplayedfromthe
lastpracticeactivity.
ReducetheTransitionLength
1 ReviewthesuperelevationoverlapintheFixSuperelevationOverlap
dialog.
2 Reducethetotaltransitionlengthofthefirstcurvebytyping45.00[25m]
intheReduceTransitionLengthbyfieldinthePreviousCurvearea.
ShifttheTransition
1 Shiftthetransitionontothesecondcurvebytyping45.00[25m]inthe
ShiftTransitionOntoCurvebyfieldintheNextCurvearea.
2 ClickApply,thenClose.
ReviewthePointControls
1 SelectCorridor>PointControlsandreviewthenewpointcontrols
relatingtosuperelevation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
417
ExerciseCorrectingaSuperelevationOverlap
2 SelectCloseonthePointControlsdialog.
ReviewtheSuperelevation
1 SelecttheSuperelevationradiobuttonlocatedonthebottomrightcorner
oftheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Thesuperelevationdiagramisdisplayedinanewsuperelevationview
alongwiththeplan,profile,andcrosssectionviews.
2 SelectProcessAll.
Reviewhowthesuperelevationisdisplayedintheplan,profile,andcross
sectionviews.Youwilllearnaboutthiscolorcodinginthenextsection.
3 SelectFile>Save.
Superelevation
418
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ViewingtheSuperelevation
ViewingtheSuperelevation
AftersuperelevationiscreatedusingtheCreateSuperelevationwizard,youcan
viewitinanewwindowintheRoadwayDesignerbyselectingthe
Superelevationradiobutton.TheSuperelevationradiobuttoncanbesetatany
timeduringthedesign.Toreturntothenormalplan,profile,crosssectionviews,
selecttheNormalradiobutton.Thesewindowsareusedtoreviewandeditthe
superelevation.Thedisplayofeachwindowiscolorcoded.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
419
SuperelevationColors
SuperelevationColors
WhentheDisplayModeissettoSuperelevation,colorcodedcrossslopesare
displayedinthePlan,Profile,andCrossSectionViewwindows.Thisallowsyouto
visualizetheslopesastheroadwaytransitionsthroughsuperelevatedareas.
Slopestotherightthatarebetween0.5%and10%willstartasgreenand
transitiontoblueastheslopeapproaches10%.Whentheslopeisgreaterthan
10%totheright,thecolorbecomesdarkblue.
Slopestotheleftthatarebetween0.5%and10%willstartasyellowand
transitiontoredastheslopeapproaches10%.Whentheslopeisgreaterthan
10%totheleft,thecolorbecomesdarkred.
Slopesthatarelessthan0.5%willappearasawhitecoloroneithersideofthe
pivotpoint.
Superelevation
420
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SuperelevationPlanViewWindow
SuperelevationPlanViewWindow
TheSuperelevationPlanViewwindowislocatedintheupperleftcornerofthe
RoadwayDesignerdialog.WhentheDisplayModeissettoSuperelevation,the
transitionsarecolorcodedwithrespecttocrossslope.Endconditionsarenot
showninthisview.Alltheviewshavezoomfunctionandarelinkedtothedata.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
421
SuperelevationCrossSectionViewWindow
SuperelevationCrossSectionViewWindow
TheSuperelevationCrossSectionViewwindowislocatedinthelowerleftcorner
oftheRoadwayDesignerdialog.WhentheDisplayModeissetto
Superelevation,thecrosssectionslopesarecolorcodedandlabeled.Thecrown
points,left,andrightrangepointsarealsolabeled.Theshoulderslopesareonly
labeledwhenShoulderRolloverLocksareapplied.Endconditionsarenotshown
inthisview.
Superelevation
422
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SuperelevationProfileViewWindow
SuperelevationProfileViewWindow
TheSuperelevationProfileViewwindowislocatedintheupperrightcornerof
theRoadwayDesignerdialog.WhentheDisplayModeissettoSuperelevation,
pavementlinesareprojectedtotheprofileandarecolorcodedwithrespectto
thetransverseslope.
RightclickontheProfileViewwindowtoselectwhichpavementlinestoview.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
423
SuperelevationDiagramViewWindow
SuperelevationDiagramViewWindow
TheSuperelevationDiagramViewwindowislocatedinthelowerrightcornerof
theRoadwayDesignerdialog.Itdisplayssuperelevationcontrollines.Thecontrol
linesarecoloredcodedforidentificationpurposesonlyandarenotrelatedto
slopes.Thewindowalsoshowsthelocationofthecorridorsalignmentcardinal
stations.
Toeditthesuperelevationpoints,doubleclickonanypointontheDiagramView
tochangestations,crossslopesandsuperelevationtypes.Superelevationpoints
haveconstraints,liketemplatepoints.Editingaconstrainedsuperelevationpoint
mayaffectthelocationoftheotherpointsinthediagram.Whatyouareableto
editdependsonwhichpointyouselectandtheconstraintsonthatpoint.
AnothertechniqueforeditingsuperelevationistheEditCurveSetStations
command.Toaccessthecommand,rightclickontheSuperelevationDiagram
ViewwindowandselectEditCurveSetStations.TheEditCurveSetStations
showsthesuperelevationstationsandslopesinatabularform,andallowsyouto
editsuperelevationstationsandslopes.
MoredetailedinformationonsuperelevationeditingisavailableinotherBentley
Institutetrainingcourses.
Superelevation
424
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ShoulderRolloverLocks
ShoulderRolloverLocks
Shoulderrolloverlocksareusedtolimittheslopedifferencebetweenthetravel
portionoftheroadwayandtheadjacentshouldersduringsuperelevation.This
differenceisthealgebraicdifferencebetweentheslopesasapercentage.For
example,ifthecrossslopeofthetravelportionoftheroadis2.0%andthe
shoulderis6.0%,thenthealgebraicdifferencebetweentheslopesis4.0%.
Superelevationrolloverlocksareappliedafterthesuperelevationhasbeen
defined.Thelimitissetonthehighsideandlowsideoftheroadway,andisinput
asanalgebraicpercentage.Whenthelimitisreached,thetravelportionofthe
roadwayandshoulderwillmovetogetherholdingthelimitingpercentage
differencebetweentheroadwayandshoulder.
Aswithsuperelevation,shoulderrolloverlocksproducetemplatepointcontrols
thatautomaticallyoverridetemplatepointconstraints.Thesewillshowupinthe
PointControldialogaftertheshoulderrolloverlocksarecreated.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
425
ExampleNoShoulderRollover
ExampleNoShoulderRollover
Assume,forexample,thattheroadcrossslopeis2%andtheshoulderis6%.Ifno
shoulderrolloverisapplied,theslopeoftheshoulderwillnotchange,thus
remainingat6%throughoutthesuperelevationtransition.Thisresultsinthe
conditionshownintheaboveillustration.
Superelevation
426
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExampleApplyingShoulderRollover
ExampleApplyingShoulderRollover
Givenaroadcrossslopeof2%withashoulderof6%wheninnormalcrown,
applyingahighsidedifferenceof6.0%willlocktheroadandshouldertogether
whentheroadwayslopeis0%orgreater.Applyinga0%slopedifferenceonthe
lowsidewilllocktheroadandtheshouldertogetherwhentheroadwayslopeis
6%orgreater.Thisresultsintheconditionshownintheaboveillustration.
MultipleShoulderRollover
Whenapplyingrolloverwithonlyoneshoulder,itisimportanttonotethatthe
algebraicdifferenceingradespecifiedappliestothesegmentimmediately
precedingtherangepointandtheshouldersegmentdirectlyoutsidetherange
point.Whenadditionalshouldersegmentsexistoutsidetherangepoint(apaved
andunpavedshoulder,forexample)thealgebraicdifferenceingradeappliedis
betweenthetwoshouldersegments,nottheoriginalroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
427
ExampleApplyingShoulderRollover
RolloverCriteria
Itmustbeapointthathasnotbeensuperelevated.
Itisnexttoapointthathasbeensuperelevatedorisapivotpointfor
superelevation.
Itisnotapivotpointoftheadjacentsuperelevatedpoint.
ItisnotanEndConditionpoint.
InordertousetheApplyShoulderRollovercommand,thefollowingcriteriamust
bemet.
Superelevation
428
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ShoulderRolloverLocksBasicWorkflow
ShoulderRolloverLocksBasicWorkflow
BasicWorkflow
CreatesuperelevationusingtheCreateSuperelevationwizard.
SelectSuperelevation>ApplyShoulderRolloverLock.Thisdisplaysthe
ApplyShoulderRolloverLockdialog.
SelecttheShoulderPointfromthedropdownlist.
EntertheDifferencefortheHighSideandLowSideoftheshoulders.
ClickApply.
Repeatthisforeachshoulder.
ClicktheProcessAllbuttonandreviewthedesign.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
429
ExerciseShoulderRollover
ExerciseShoulderRollover
Continueworkingonthelastexercise.
ApplyRolloverLocks
1 SelectSuperelevation>ApplyShoulderRolloverLock.
2 SelectLT_SHDRintheShoulderPointfield.
3 TypeLT_SHDRRolloverintheControlLineNamefield.
4 Type5.0%intheHighSideDifferencefieldandleavetheLowSide
Differenceat0%.
5 ClickApply.
ThiswillautomaticallychangetheShoulderPointfromLT_SHDRto
LT_GUTTERbecauseLT_GUTTERisthenextpointoutsideLT_SHDR.
6 ChangetheShoulderPointtoRT_SHDR.
7 TypeRT_SHDRRolloverintheControlLineNamefield.
8 LeavetheHighSideDifferencesetat5.0%andtheLowSideDifferenceset
at0.00%.
9 ClickApply,thenClose.
Superelevation
430
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseShoulderRollover
ReviewthePointsControls
1 SelectCorridor>PointControlsandreviewthenewpointcontrols
relatingtosuperelevation.
ReviewtheDesign
1 ProcessAllandreviewthedesign.
2 Savetheroadwaydesign.
2 ClickCloseonthePointControlsdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
431
SuperelevationReports
SuperelevationReports
SuperelevationReportWorkflow
Tocreateasuperelevationreport,selectSuperelevation>Superelevation
Report.ThisbringsuptheRoadwayDesignSuperelevationReportdialog.
SelectthesuperelevationcontrolpointstoreportonintheRoadwayDesign
SuperelevationReportdialogandclickApply.ThisbringsuptheViewXML
Reportsdialog.Fromthisdialog,youcansaveandprintthesuperelevation
reports.
Superelevation
432
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseSuperelevationReport
ExerciseSuperelevationReport
ContinueworkingonthecorridornamedSuperelevation.
CreateSuperelevationReport
1 SelectSuperelevation>SuperelevationReport.
TheRoadwayDesignSuperelevationReportdialogopens.
2 SelecttheReportAtAllProcessedStationsoption.
3 ClickAlltoselectalloftheSuperelevationPoints.
4 ClickApply.
TheBentleyReportBrowserdialogopens.
5 Reviewthereport.
6 ClosetheBentleyReportBrowserdialog.
7 ClosetheRoadwayDesignSuperelevationReportdialog.
8 ClosetheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
9 ExittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
433
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Superelevation
434
Understandsuperelevationandrolloverlocks.
Createsuperelevationandrolloverlocks.
Createadesignmodelofasuperelevatedroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:SuperelevationiscreatedandappliedusingtheRoadway
Designerbeforethecorridoriscreatedandtemplatedropsareassigned.
True
False
2 WhichToolisusedtowalkyouthroughcreatingandapplying
superelevation?
ACorridorModeling
BRoadwayDesigner
CCreateSuperelevationWizard
DDrawCrossSectionsfromSurfaces
3 TrueorFalse:TheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialogisusedto
specifythepavementsectionstosuperelevate,basedonacrosssection
view.
True
False
4 Superelevationoverlapscanberesolvedusingwhichmethod?(Selectall
thatapply)
AShiftingthetotaltransitionlengthontothenextorpreviouscurve.
BReducingthetotaltransitionlength.
5 TrueorFalse:SuperelevationcanbeimportedfromanASCIIfile.
True
False
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
435
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:SuperelevationiscreatedandappliedusingtheRoadway
Designerbeforethecorridoriscreatedandtemplatedropsareassigned.
FalseSuperelevationiscreatedandappliedusingtheRoadwayDesigner
afterthecorridoriscreatedandtemplatedropsareassigned.
2 WhichToolisusedtowalkyouthroughcreatingandapplying
superelevation?
CTheCreateSuperelevationWizardwalksyouthroughcreatingand
applyingsuperelevation.
3 TrueorFalse:TheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialogisusedto
specifythepavementsectionstosuperelevate,basedonacrosssection
view.
TrueTheSuperelevationSectionDefinitionsdialogisusedtospecifythe
pavementsectionstosuperelevate,basedonacrosssectionview.
4 Superelevationoverlapscanberesolvedusingwhichmethod?
Both:
AShiftingthetotaltransitionlengthontothenextorpreviouscurve.
BReducingthetotaltransitionlength.
5 TrueorFalse:SuperelevationcanbeimportedfromanASCIIfile.
TrueYes,superelevationcanbeimportedfromanASCIIfile.
Superelevation
436
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
60Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
437
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
UsetheRoadwayDesignertocreateasuperelevateddividedroadwaywitha
medianbarrier.Createandreviewthefinaldesignsurface.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\Superelevation\Task\I591Reconstruction.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Superelevation\Task\Task
Superelevation.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: I591Reconstruction.alg
ExistingGround: ExistingGroundSurvey.dtm
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
AdditionalProjectData
Superelevation
438
Otheralignmentsarecontrolling.
Shouldersnarrowoverbridge.
NoticethatNB_CLandSB_CLareincludedintheSuperelevationPoint
Controlsbecausethesuperelevationrangespansacrossthem.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createasuperelevateddividedroadwaywithamedianbarrier.
HintThisprojectrequires2superelevationsectionswithonebeingNB
andtheotherbeingSB.TheCrownPointmaybethesamepointusedfor
aRangePoint.
CreateacorridorusingthealignmentI591Reconstructionandthe
followingparameters.
Templatenamedfourlanedivided.
Templatedropintervalof5[1.5m].
Thestartingstationis356+34.25[35+634.25]andtheendingstationis
376+50[36+245].
TheShouldersarenarrowedintheareaofthebridgelocatedat
approximatelystation372+00[36+110].Theshouldertapersare
definedusingthealignmentshownontheProjectTaskDetailsdrawing
onthefollowingpages.
Definesuperelevationusingthefollowingparameters.
DesignSpeedis75MPH[120kph].
Pivotsuperelevationaroundtheinsideedgesofpavement.
ShoulderRolloveronOutsideShoulders.
HighSideDifferenceis4%.
LowSideDifferenceis0%.
NoShoulderRolloverappliedonInsideShoulders.
Overlapsduetocorridornotbeinglongenoughshouldbeignored.
Createcrosssectionsandreviewthedesign.
Saveallnewormodifiedfiles.
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Superelevation
439
ProjectTaskDetails
ProjectTaskDetails
Legend #
Alignment
Name
I591Reconstruction
1.
TYPE OF CONTROL
Controllingcorridor
alignment
I591NBShoulder
Taper
2.
TaperHorizontal
I591SBShoulderTaper
3.
Superelevation
440
TaperHorizontal
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
Thismoduleexploreshowtoedittemplatesandendconditionsalready
associatedwithacorridordesign.Italsoexploreshowtooverridetemplate
constraintswithparametricconstrainswhichallowmaximumflexibilityinyour
templates.Finally,youwilllearnhowtheRoadwayDesignerinterface
communicateschangestothetemplatesthroughtheuseofcoloredtextinthe
dialogboxes.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
441
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill
DesignChanges
442
LearntoimplementDesignChanges.
ApplyDesignChanges.
Createadesignmodeloftheroadway.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartMicroStationandInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoads/PowerInRoadsshortcut
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Design
Changes\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileSR2067Bypass.dgn,thenclickOpen.
OpenProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Design
Changes\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeDesignChanges.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\SR2067
BypassExistingGround.dtm
GeometryProject: SR2067Bypass.alg
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: SR2067Bypass.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
443
TemplateLibrarySynchronization
TemplateLibrarySynchronization
WhenatemplateisappliedtoastationusingtheTemplateDropscommand,the
templateiscopiedfromthetemplatelibrarytotheRoadwayDesigner.Templates
canberevisedintheRoadwayDesignerorinthetemplatelibrary.Thisallowsyou
tomakeminorchangestoatemplatedirectlyintheRoadwayDesignerwithout
affectingthetemplatelibrary.Uptothispoint,wehaverevisedallthetemplates
inthetemplatelibrary.
IntheTemplateDropsdialog,thereareindicatorsthattellyouifthetemplatehas
beenrevisedandwhetherthetemplatematchestheoneinthetemplatelibrary.
DesignChanges
444
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
TemplateDropIndicators
TemplateDropIndicators
TheTemplateDropsareaofthedialogshowstemplatenamesandthestation
wherethattemplateisapplied.Inaddition,theRevisedIncolumnindicateswhere
thetemplatewasedited:theIRDortheITL.
Inadditiontothisbasicinformation,thedialogusescolorcodingthatrepresents
variousconditionsofthetemplatedrop.
IftheStationisred,thatstationdoesnotexistinthecorridorsalignment.
IftheTemplateNameisredyouknowthatthetemplatestoredintheRoadway
DesignerdoesnotmatchthetemplatestoredintheTemplateLibrary.TheRevised
columndescribedbelowwilltellyouiftheRoadwayDesignerortheTemplate
Libraryhasbeenedited.
IftheTemplateNameisblue,thattemplatedoesnotexistinthetemplatelibrary.
IftheIRDorITLisredintheRevisedcolumn,thetemplatehasbeeneditedinthe
RoadwayDesignerorthetemplatelibraryrespectively,andisnottheone
originallyusedtoaddthattemplatedrop.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
445
SynchronizewithLibraryButton
SynchronizewithLibraryButton
TheSynchronizewithLibrarybuttonisusedtoupdatethetemplatestoredinthe
roadwaydesignfilewiththetemplatestoredinthetemplatelibrary.Thisis
normallydonewhenachangeismadetoatemplateinthetemplatelibraryand
thatchangeisneededinapreviouslycreatedroadwaydesign.Tosynchronizea
template,highlightatemplatedropandclicktheSynchronizewithLibrary
button.
TheEditbuttonisusedtoreviseatemplatesavedintheroadwaydesignfile.It
bringsuptheCreateTemplatedialog.Thisisnormallydonewhenaminorchange
ismadetotheroadwaydesigntemplateandyoudontwanttocommitthat
changetothetemplateinthetemplatelibrary.
Ifyoueditorsynchronizeatemplate,thetemplatetransitionsthatusethat
templatemayneedtobereestablished.
DesignChanges
446
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseSynchronizingtheRoadwayDesignFile
ExerciseSynchronizingtheRoadwayDesignFile
ContinueworkingwiththedesignfileSR2067Bypass.dgn.
ReviseTemplateLibrary
1 SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.
2 SelectTools>Options.
3 SelecttheApplyAffixescheckbox.
4 TypethefollowinginthePrefixfields:
LeftPrefix:LT_
RightPrefix:RT_
5 ClickOKontheTemplateOptionsdialog.
6 SelectTools>DynamicSettings.
7 NavigatetotheTemplatesfolderanddoubleclicktheFourlanetemplate.
TheFourlanetemplatebecomesthecurrenttemplateandisshowninthe
Current TemplateWindow.
8 Deletetheendconditioncomponentsontherightsideofthetemplate.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
447
ExerciseSynchronizingtheRoadwayDesignFile
9 NavigatetotheEndConditionsfolderanddraganddroptheFillDitch
templatetotheRT_OUTSIDE_SHDRpoint.
10 Testtheendconditions.
11 ClosetheTestEndConditionsdialog.
12 DoubleclicktheTwolanetemplatetosetitastheactivetemplate.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
13 Deletetheendconditioncomponentsontherightsideofthetemplate.
14 NavigatetotheEndConditionsfolderanddraganddroptheFillDitch
templatetotheRT_OUTSIDE_SHDRpoint.
15 Savethetemplatelibrary.
16 ClosetheCreateTemplatedialog.
SynchronizeRoadwayDesignwithTemplateLibrary
1 SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
2 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
NoticethattheTwolaneandFourlanetemplatesarered,indicatingthat
thetemplatestoredinthetemplatelibraryandthetemplatestoredinthe
RoadwayDesignerdonotmatch.
3 Highlighttheentryinthecurrenttemplatedropssettingthatusesthe
Fourlanetemplate.
Noticethethumbnailshowsthesimplecutandfillontherightsideofthe
template.
4 ClickSynchronizewithLibrary.
NoticetheFillDitchendconditionsontherightsideofthetemplatenow
appear.
5 HighlighttheentrythatusestheTwolanetemplate.
6 ClickSynchronizewithLibrary.
7 ClosetheTemplateDropsdialog.
Thetemplatetransitionsmayneedtobeverifiedagainbecausethe
templatehasbeenupdated.
8 Ifthetemplatetransitionareaisdarkblue,thetransitiondefinitionisstill
validandnoupdatesarerequired.However,ifthetemplatetransition
areaisyellow,thetransitionmustbeupdated.Doubleclickthetransition
areaandupdatethetemplatetransitions.
RememberthatthetwoOUTSIDE_EOPpointshavetobeeditedsothat
theyhaveonlyaslopeconstraint,insteadofbeingfullyconstrained.
DesignChanges
448
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseSynchronizingtheRoadwayDesignFile
9 ClickProcessAll.
10 ClosetheResultsdialog.
11 Savetheroadwaydesign.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
449
TemplateRevisionsintheRoadwayDesigner
TemplateRevisionsintheRoadwayDesigner
ToreviseatemplatesavedintheRoadwayDesigner,selectCorridor>Template
Drops.HighlightthetemplateintheCurrentTemplateDropssectionofthedialog
andclickEdit.ThisdisplaystheCreateTemplatedialog.Editthetemplateinthe
CreateTemplatedialogandclickOK.Allchangestothetemplatearestoredinthe
roadwaydesignfileandthetemplatelibraryisnotchanged.
Ifamodificationisdesiredforanindividualstationalongthecorridor,double
clicktheCrossSectionViewwindowwhenthatstationisdisplayed.Thisdisplays
theCreateTemplatedialog.EditthetemplateintheCreateTemplatedialogand
clickOK.Allchangestothetemplatearestoredintheroadwaydesignfileandthe
templatelibraryisnotchanged.TheeditedstationisaddedtotheTemplateDrops
dialogassinglestationtemplatedropassignment.Themodifiedstationisalso
displayedasagreenlineinthePlanViewwindow.Singlestationmodifications
arenormallydonewhenthedesignisnearingcompletionandonlyminor
refinementsaredesired.
DesignChanges
450
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseRevisingaTemplate
ExerciseRevisingaTemplate
Continueworkingwiththefilesfromthepreviousexercise.
ReviseaTemplateusingtheTemplateDropsDialog
1 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
2 SelecttheTwolanetemplateintheCurrentTemplateDropsportionof
theTemplateDropsdialog.
3 ClickEdit.
ChangetheShoulderWidth
1 EdittheRT_OUTSIDE_SHDRpointandchangeHorizontalConstraintValue
to8.00[2.5m].
2 ClickApply,thenClose.
3 ClickOKontheCreateTemplatedialog.
4 ReviewtheTemplateDropsdialog.
NoticethetemplateisnowrevisedintheIRDandthetemplateisred.
5 ClosetheTemplateDropsdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
451
ExerciseRevisingaTemplate
6 Ifthetransitionareaisdarkblue(allpointsconnectedandreviewed)skip
totheReviseaTemplateatanIndividualStationsectionbelow;otherwise
continue.
7 Ifthetransitionareaisyellow(missingtransitionconnection)doubleclick
thetransitionareaonthePlanViewoftheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
8 ClickOKtomovetotheEditTransitionMidpointdialog.
9 RightclickontheRT_OUTSIDE_SHDRpointandselectDeleteHorizontal
Constraint.
10 Testthetransition.
11 ClickOK.
Thisallowstheshouldertotransitionfrom10.00to8.00[3.0mto2.5m]
duringthetransition.
ReviseaTemplateatanIndividualStation
1 Navigatetostation206+50[16+720]intheCrossSectionViewWindow.
2 DoubleclicktheCrossSectionViewwindow.
ThisdisplaystheCreateTemplatedialog.
NoticethatthenameofthedialogboxisEditingTemplateatStation
206+50Only[EditingTemplateatStation16+720Only].
3 SelectTools>DynamicSettings.
4 ClicktheX:Y:buttonintheDynamicSettingdialog.
ThischangesthereadouttoX:Slope:.
5 Setthefollowing:
XStep: 0.01
SlopeStep: 1.00%
6 ClicktheSetDynamicOriginbuttonandclicktheLT_OUTSIDE_SHDR
pointonthetemplate.
7 RightclickontheLT_FILL2pointandselectMovePoint.
8 MovetheLT_FILL2pointalongthegroundsurfaceuntiltheDynamic
Settingsreadoutsays25%,thenzoominclosetotheexistinggroundand
youshouldseethattheslopewilltietothegroundautomatically.Left
clicktosavethenewpoint.
DesignChanges
452
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseRevisingaTemplate
9 RightclickontheCLpoint,thenselectMovePoint.
Noticethatthenewlymodifiedslopedoesnotstayat25%asyoumove
yourcursor.
10 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
12 ClickontheLT_OUTSIDE_SHDRpoint,andclickOKontheAddSlope
Constraintdialog(25.0%slope).
13 RightclickontheCLpoint,thenselectMovePoint.
Nowyoushouldnoticethatthenewlymodifiedslopedoesstayat25%as
youmoveyourcursor.
14 Rightclicktoexitthecommand.
15 ClickOKontheEditingTemplateatStation206+50[16+720]Onlydialog.
ReviewtheDesign
1 ClickProcessAll.
2 ClosetheResultsdialog,andreviewthedesign.
3 Savetheroadwaydesign.
11 RightclickontheLT_FILL2pointagainandselectAddConstraint>Slope.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
453
EndConditionExceptions
EndConditionExceptions
Endconditionexceptionsareusedtooverrideendconditionsalongarangeof
corridorstations.SelectCorridor>EndConditionExceptionstoactivatethe
command.ThisbringsuptheEndConditionExceptionsdialog.Enterthestation
rangeandspecifywhichsideoftheroadisbeingoverridden.ClickEdittoeditthe
endcondition.ThisbringsupadialogboxsimilartotheCreateTemplatedialog.
However,thedialogshowsonlytheendconditionsonthespecifiedoverrideside.
Allothernonendconditioncomponentsareshownasdashedlines.Overridethe
endconditionusingthefamiliarCreateTemplatetools.
Sometimestheendconditionsarenotdesiredinthedesign,forexample,when
thecorridorpassesthroughanintersectionorcrossesabridge.Toeliminateend
conditionsforarangeofstations,createanendconditionexceptionandselect
theBackboneOnlyoption.
EndconditionexceptionsaredisplayedinthePlanViewwindowasacyan
coloredshape.YoucandoubleclicktheshapetoaccesstheEndCondition
Exceptionsdialog.
DesignChanges
454
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseEndConditionExceptions
ExerciseEndConditionExceptions
Continueworkingwiththefilesfromthepreviousexercise.
CreateanEndConditionException
1 SelectCorridor>EndConditionExceptions.
2 IntheStationRangearea,type188+00[16+150]intheStart:fieldand
200+00[16+530]intheStop:field.
3 SelecttheApplytoLeftOverridecheckbox.
4 ClickAdd,thenEdit.
ThisdisplaystheLeftOverride188+00to200+00[LeftOverride
16+150to16+530]dialog.
5 Rightclickontheleftfillslope(whichwillbeacyancoloredline)and
selectDeleteComponent.
NoticethattheLT_FILL2pointdisappears.
6 NavigatetotheEndConditionsfolderandselecttheFillDitchtemplate.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
455
ExerciseEndConditionExceptions
7 DragtheFillDitchtemplatefromthePreviewWindowandrightclick,
withtheleftmousebuttonstillhelddown.
8 SelectReflect.
9 MovetheFillDitchendconditiontotheLT_OUTSIDE_SHDRpoint(the
pointbecomesaboldwhiteplussign)andclick.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
10 ClickOK.
11 ClickCloseontheEndConditionExceptionsdialog.
NoticetheendconditionexceptiondisplaysinthePlanViewwindowasa
lightblueshadedarea.
ReviewandSaveRoadwayDesign
1 ClickProcessAll.
2 ClosetheResultsdialog,andreviewthedesign.
3 Savetheroadwaydesign.
4 ClosetheRoadwayDesignerdialog.
DesignChanges
456
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ParametricConstraints
ParametricConstraints
Parametricconstraintsareusedtooverrideconstraintvalues.Forexample,you
createatemplatewitha2inch[50mm]layerofasphalt,butthedesigncallsfor3
inches[75mm].The2inches[50mm]isaverticalconstraintvaluethatcanbe
overriddento3inches[75mm]usingparametricconstraints.Tocreate
parametricconstraints,firstEditthetemplatepointsandtypeanameinthe
Labelsfieldthatyouwanttoassigntoaspecificconstraintvalue.Forpavement
thickness,itwouldbetheverticalconstraintofthebottomlayerpoints.Next,use
Tools>ParametricConstraintstoassignoverridingvaluestothelabeledpoints.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
457
ExerciseUsingaParametricConstraint
ExerciseUsingaParametricConstraint
Continueworkingwiththefilesfromthepreviousexercise.
LabelingConstraintValues
1 SelectModeler>CreateTemplate.
2 NavigatetotheTemplatesfolderanddoubleclicktheTwolanetemplate.
3 DoubleclicktheLT_OUTSIDE_SHDR_BOTpoint.
ThePointPropertiesdialogopens.
4 UnderConstraint1(whichistheverticalconstraint),typeThicknessinthe
Labelfield.
5 ClickApply.
6 ClickNext>twice.
TheLT_OUTSIDE_EOP_BOTpointshouldnowbetheselectedpoint.
7 ChangeConstraint2(whichistheverticalconstraint),selectThicknessas
theLabel.
8 ClickApply.
DesignChanges
458
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseUsingaParametricConstraint
AftertheLabelhasbeenenteredonceitcanbeselectedfromthelist.
Usingthelistensuresthattherearenospellingdifferencesbetweenthe
Labelnames.
9 Repeatforthefollowingpoints:
CL_BOT
RT_OUTSIDE_EOP_BOT
RT_OUTSIDE_SHDR_BOT
10 ClosethePointPropertiesdialog.
11 ClosetheCreateTemplatedialogandsavethetemplatelibrary.
AssignConstraintValueOverrides
1 SelectModeler>RoadwayDesigner.
2 SelectCorridor>TemplateDrops.
3 SelecttheTwolanetemplate(station188+00[16+155]entry)andclick
SynchronizewithLibrary.
AWarningdialogopens.
4 ClickYesontheWarningdialog.
5 ClosetheTemplateDropsdialog.
6 SelectTools>ParametricConstraints.
7 SelecttheConstraintLabelnamedThickness.
8 TypeaStartValueof2.00[0.6]andaStopValueof2.00[0.6].
Thepavementthicknesswillnowbe2[0.6m]insteadofthedefault0.83
[0.25m]intheareaoftheTwolanetemplate.TheFourlanetemplatewill
stillhaveapavementthicknessof0.83[0.25m]becausetheparametric
labelswerenotassignedtothattemplate.
9 ClickAdd,thenClose.
10 Ifthetemplatetransitionareaisdarkbluethetransitiondefinitionisstill
validandnoupdatesarerequired.However,ifthetemplatetransition
areaisyellow,thetransitionmustbeupdated.Doubleclickthetransition
areaandupdatethetemplatetransitions.
RememberthatthetwoOUTSIDE_EOPpointshavetobeeditedsothat
theyhaveonlyaslopeconstraint,insteadofbeingfullyconstrained.
11 ClickProcessAll.
12 ClosetheResultsdialogandreviewthedesign.
13 SelectFile>Savetosavetheroadwaydesign.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
459
ExerciseUsingaParametricConstraint
14 ExittheCADsoftware.
DesignChanges
460
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Implementdesignchanges.
Applydesignchanges.
Createanupdateddesignmodel.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
461
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 TrueorFalse:WhenatemplateisappliedtoastationusingtheTemplate
Dropscommand,thetemplateiscopiedfromthetemplatelibrarytothe
roadwaydesign.
True
False
2 DescribetheTemplateDropIndicators.
Stationisred
Templatenameisred
Templatenameisblue
Revisedisred
3 TrueorFalse:Allchangestothetemplatearestoredintheroadwaydesign
fileandthetemplatelibrary.
True
False
4 TrueorFalse:EndConditionexceptionsareusedtooverrideend
conditionsalongarangeofcorridorstations.
True
False
5 TrueorFalse:Parametricconstraintsareusedtooverrideconstraint
values.
DesignChanges
462
True
False
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:WhenatemplateisappliedtoastationusingtheTemplate
Dropscommand,thetemplateiscopiedfromthetemplatelibrarytothe
roadwaydesign.
TrueWhenatemplateisappliedtoastationusingtheTemplateDrops
command,thetemplateiscopiedfromthetemplatelibrarytothe
roadwaydesign.
2 DescribetheTemplateDropIndicators.
StationisredThestationdoesnotexistinthecorridorsalignment.
TemplatenameisredThetemplateintheRoadwayDesignerdoesnot
matchthetemplateinthetemplatelibrary.
TemplatenameisblueThetemplatedoesnotexistinthetemplate
library.
RevisedisredAsinglestationhasbeeneditedintheRoadwayDesigner
orthetemplatelibraryandisnottheoneoriginallyusedtoaddthat
templatedrop.
3 TrueorFalse:Allchangestothetemplatearestoredintheroadwaydesign
fileandthetemplatelibrary.
FalseChangestothetemplatearestoredwherethechangesaremade.
ChangesmadeintheRoadwayDesignerarestoredintheRoadway
Designer.ChangesmadeintheCreateTemplatetoolarestoredinthe
TemplateLibrary.TheSynchronizewithLibrarytoolisusedtobringthe
newesttemplatefromthetemplatelibraryintotheRoadwayDesigner.
4 TrueorFalse:EndConditionexceptionsareusedtooverrideend
conditionsalongarangeofcorridorstations.
TrueEndConditionexceptionsoverrideendconditionsalongarangeof
corridorstations.
5 TrueorFalse:Parametricconstraintsareusedtooverrideconstraint
values.
TrueParametricconstraintsareusedtooverrideconstraintvalues.For
example,aparametricconstraintcouldbeusedtocontrolvariable
pavementthicknessorshoulderwidthfromasingletemplate.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
463
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
35Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
DesignChanges
464
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
UsetheRoadwayDesignertomodifytheI591Reconstructiondesign.CreateEnd
ConditionExceptionstoeliminatethefillslopesinthelocationoftheexisting
bridge.UseParametricConstraintstochangethethicknessofthepavementlayer.
Createandreviewthefinaldesignsurface.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Design
Changes\Task\I591ReconstructionChanges.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\DesignChanges\Task\Task
DesignChanges.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
ProposedSurface: Finished.dtm
GeometryProject: I591Reconstruction.alg
ExistingGround: ExistingGroundSurvey.dtm
TemplateLibrary: TemplateStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: I591ReconstructionChanges.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
DesignChanges
465
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:ModifytheI591Reconstructiondesign.
CreateEndConditionExceptionstoeliminatethefillslopescreatedon
theexistingbridge.
NBBridgeExceptionstartsatstation370+60[36+065]andendsat
station373+00[36+155].
SBBridgeExceptionstartsatstation371+15[36+070]andendsat
station373+60[36+160].
Useparametricconstraintstochangethethicknessofthepavement
layerfrom10to12[250mmto300mm]beginningatstation
364+00[35+865].
Createadesignsurface.
Createcrosssectionsandreviewthedesign.
Tips
IfcalculatingtheEndAreaVolume,attempttouseVolumeExceptions
intheareaofthebridge.
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
DesignChanges
466
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtodisplayandannotatecrosssections.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
467
WhereAreWeintheBigPicture?
WhereAreWeintheBigPicture?
Atthispointintheprojectwehavedonethefollowing:
Setuptheproject
Defineexistinggroundsurface
Definedthetemplates
Createdgeometries
Designedtheroadwaycorridor
Generatedproposedsurfaces
Nowwearereadytoevaluatetheresults,whichwillinvolvethefollowingtasks:
Createproposedcrosssections
Calculateendareavolumes
Generatereports
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
468
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
Reviewhowtocreatecrosssections.
Learnhowtoupdatecrosssections.
Learnhowtoannotatecrosssections.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
469
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Cross
SectionsandAnnotation\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileCreateCrossSections.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Cross
SectionsandAnnotation\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeCrossSectionsandAnnotation.rwk,thenclick
Open.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\Hemfield
Existing.dtm
ProposedSurface: HemfieldFinished.dtm
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
TemplateLibrary: HemfieldCountyStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: Hemfield.ird
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
470
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionCreation
CrossSectionCreation
CrossSectionCreation
Beforecrosssectionscanbecreated,abaselinemustbedefined.Thiscouldcome
fromeitherahorizontalalignment,agraphicline,orpointsselectedinthegraphic
view.
Tocreatecrosssectionsoftheexistinggroundsurfaceorproposedsurface,those
surfacesmustbeopened.
Normally,thecrosssectionsarecutperpendiculartothehorizontalbaseline;
however,therearesettingsthatwillcreateskewedcrosssectionsorevenbroken
backcrosssections.Thesearecalledcustomcrosssections.
Crosssectionscanbesetuptobelaidoutinalargegrouporbrokenintosheets.
Individualcrosssectionscanalsobecreated.Anindividualorgroupofcross
sections,createdatthesametime,iscalledacrosssectionset.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
471
SurfaceDisplay
SurfaceDisplay
SurfaceDisplay
Thesurfacelinethatisdisplayedoncrosssectionsisbasedonthesymbology
associatedwiththesurface.Thesymbologyassociationisdefinedusingthe
SurfacePropertiestool(Surface>SurfaceProperties).
Ifsurfacefeaturesaredisplayedonthecrosssection,thesymbologyofthe
featureisbasedontheStyleassociatedwiththesurfacefeature.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
472
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CreateCrossSectionDialog
CreateCrossSectionDialog
CreateCrossSectionDialog
TheCreateCrossSectiondialoghasaninterfacecalledatreeandleafformat.One
folder(orstem)leadstoeitheranotherfolder(stem)ortoafile(leaf).
TheGeneralleafdisplaysthegeneralsettingsforthetool.Thisincludestheset
name,crosssectionintervalordistancebetweencrosssections,thewidthleft
andrightofthecrosssection,theverticalexaggerationused,andwhich
surfaceorsurfaceswillbeplacedonthecrosssection.
TheSourceleafisusedtoselectthehorizontalcontrol.Forgraphicsand
multipointbasedalignments,ahorizontalalignmentcanbecreatedasthe
crosssectionsaregenerated.Thealignmentisneededifyouwanttoupdate
thecrosssectionsinthefutureusingtheUpdateCrossSectiontool.
TheIncludeleafisusedtoaddsurfacefeatures,components,andstormand
sanitarystructurestothecrosssections.Viewingcomponentsonthecross
sectionsdisplaysthetemplatecomponentsonthecrosssections.
TheLimitsleaffoundintheControlsstemisusedtoseteitherelevationlimits
orstationlimitsforcrosssections.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
473
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
CreatetheCrossSections
1 SelecttheEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSections.
2 EnsurethesurfacesHemfieldExistingandHemfieldFinishedareselected.
TheIntervalshouldbesetat50[10],theLeftOffsetat100.00[40]and
theRightOffsetat100.00[40].
3 EnterHemfieldRoadOption2fortheSetName.
4 SelecttheIncludeleafandverifythattheComponentscheckboxis
selectedandallothercheckboxesarecleared.
5 ClickApply.
6 ClickabovetheexistinggroundcrosssectionsintheCADviewtoidentify
wherethelowerleftpointofthefirstcrosssectionwillbelocatedinthe
CADfile.
7 ClosetheCrossSectionsdialog.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
474
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
ReviewtheCrossSections
1 Fittheview.
2 WindowAreaononeofthecrosssections.
Althoughwindowingintothecrosssectionsisfunctional,thereisaneasier
waytoviewcrosssections.
3 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSectionViewer.
4 ChangetheCrossSectionSettoHemfieldRoadOption2.
5 Selectoneofthestationslisted.
Theviewisupdatedshowingtheselectedcrosssection.
6 Selectanotherstation.
7 SelectStation27+50.00[2+750].
8 IntheMovieModesection,settheTimeto.3andClickRun.
Eachcrosssectionisdisplayedoneatatimeinamoviemode.
9 Whenfinished,closetheCrossSectionViewer.
ChangetheSurfaceProperties
1 SelectSurface>SurfaceProperties.
2 SelecttheSurfacenamedHemfieldExisting.
3 SelecttheAdvancedtab.
NoticethatHemfieldExistinghasE_SURF_OriginalGroundasthe
symbologyforcrosssections.
4 ChangetheSurfacetoHemfieldFinished.
Noticethatthesymbologyforboththeprofileandthecrosssectionsisset
toDefault.
5 Changethesymbologyforbothprofileandcrosssectionsto
P_SURF_DesignSurface.
6 ClickApply.
Thesymbologyassociatedwiththesurfacehasbeenupdated.However,
thecrosssectionswillnotautomaticallyupdate.Next,wewilllearnhow
toupdatethem.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
475
ExerciseCreateCrossSections
7 ClosetheSurfacePropertiesdialog.
Achangehasjustbeenmadetothesurface;itshouldbesavedtothehard
drive.
8 Savethesurface.(Hint:File>Save).
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
UpdatetheCrossSections
1 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSections.
2 IntheCrossSectionsdialog,selecttheUpdateCrossSectionfolder.
3 SettheModetoRefresh.
Refreshwillupdateallofthedisplayedsurfacesonthecrosssection.
4 ChangetheCrossSectionSettoHemfieldRoadOption2.
5 SelecttheSurfacesleaf.
6 SelecttheSurfacenamedHemfieldFinished.
7 ClickApply.
Noticethatthesurfacecolorchangedforthefinishedsurface.
AnnotatetheCrossSections
1 IntheCrossSectionsdialog,selecttheAnnotateCrossSectionfolder.
2 SelecttheGeneralleaf.
3 ChangetheCrossSectionSettoHemfieldRoadOption2.
4 SelecttheSurfacenamedHemfieldFinished.
5 ClickApply.
ThesurfaceHemfieldFinishedinthecrosssectionsisannotated.
6 ClosetheCrossSectionsdialog.
7 Reviewtheannotationofthecrosssectionatstation25+00[2+500].
Onlysurfacedatathatiscurrentlydisplayedonthecrosssectionscanbe
annotated.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
476
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CustomCrossSectionSets
CustomCrossSectionSets
CustomCrossSectionSets
CustomcrosssectionsetsareconfiguredusingtheCustom>Generalleaf.Whena
customcrosssectionsetiscreated,someofthesettingsontheGeneraland
IncludeleafsareoverriddenbythesettingsontheCustom>Generalleaf.These
settingsinclude:Interval,LeftandRightOffset,andCrossingandProjected
Features.
AcustomcrosssectionsetcanincludedifferentStationRanges,single
Perpendicularstations,Skewedsections,andsectionsthatfollowalinestring.
ThecrosssectionsetisonlyavailableduringthecurrentInRoadssessionunlessit
issaved.CustomcrosssectionsetscanbesavedusingtheSavebuttonlocatedat
thebottomoftheCustom>Generalleaf.TheImportbuttonisusedtoretrievea
previouslysavedcustomcrosssectionset.Thefileextensionforacustomcross
sectionis.xsc.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
477
ExerciseCreateCustomCrossSections
ExerciseCreateCustomCrossSections
CreatingaCustomCrossSectionSet
1 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSections.
2 IntheCrossSectionsdialog,selecttheCreateCrossSectionfolderand
selecttheGeneralleaf.
3 EnterHemfieldRoadCustomfortheSetName.
AddTwoStationRanges
1 SelecttheCustom>Generalleaf.
2 SettheTypetoStationRange.
3 Enter24+00[2+400]fortheStartStation.
4 Enter30+00[2+800]fortheStopStation.
5 SettheIntervalto100[20].
6 SettheLeftOffsetto100[30].
7 SettheRightOffsetto100[30].
8 ClickAdd.
9 LeavetheTypesettoStationRange.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
478
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateCustomCrossSections
10 Enter30+00[2+800]fortheStartingStation.
11 Enter70+00[3+200]fortheStopStation.
12 ChangetheIntervalto50[10].
13 ClickAdd.
AddThreeSkewedSections
1 ChangetheTypetoSkewed.
2 Enter26+70[2+774]fortheStation.
3 SettheLeftOffsetto100[30].
4 SettheRightOffsetto100[30].
5 Enter11^00'00.0"fortheSkewAngle.
6 ClickAdd.
7 Enter32+38[2+838]fortheStation.
8 Enter5^00'00.0"fortheSkewAngle.
9 ClickAdd.
10 Enter49+33[3+133]fortheStation.
11 Enter9^00'00.0"fortheSkewAngle.
12 ClickAdd.
AddTwoPerpendicularSections
1 ChangetheTypetoPerpendicular.
2 Enter48+34.78[3+201]fortheStation.
3 SettheLeftOffsetto100[30].
4 SettheRightOffsetto100[30].
5 ClickAdd.
6 Enter57+16.44[3+357.88]fortheStation.
7 ClickAdd.
SavetheCustomCrossSectionSet
1 ClickSaveAs.
2 ChangetheSaveInfoldertoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\CrossSectionsandAnnotation\Practice\.
3 EnterHemfieldCustom.xscfortheFilename.
4 ClickSaveontheSaveAsdialog.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
479
ExerciseCreateCustomCrossSections
EnablethePlanimetricandPlanimetricStationDisplay
1 SelecttheControls>PlanDisplayleaf.
2 IntheSymbologysection,selectthePlanimetricandPlanimetricStation
options.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
DisplaytheCrossSectionSet
1 ClickApply.
2 WhenpromptedtoIdentifyLocation,clickabovethepreviouscross
sectionset.
3 ClickYesonthewarningdialogthatstatesUsingstationlimitsmaylimit
thecustomset.Continue?
4 ClosetheCreateCrossSectiondialog.
5 Reviewtheplanviewgraphics.
Noticethedifferentspacingbetweencrosssections.
Locatetheskewedcrosssections.
ViewtheCrossSections
1 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSectionViewer.
2 ChangetheCrossSectionSettoHemfieldRoadCustom.
3 ReviewthecrosssectionsusingtheCrossSectionViewerdialog.
NoticethattheSkewedcrosssectionsaremarkedwithan(S).
4 ClosetheCrossSectionViewerdialog.
5 ExittheCADsoftware.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
480
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
Createcrosssections
Updatecrosssections
Annotatecrosssections
Createcustomcrosssections
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
481
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 Anindividualorgroupofcrosssectionscreatedatthesametimeiscalled
a________.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
ACrosssectionsheet
BCrosssectionfile
CCrosssectiongroup
DCrosssectionset
True
False
2 TrueorFalse:Thereisnowaytosaveacustomcrosssectionlist.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
482
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 Anindividualorgroupofcrosssections,createdatthesametime,iscalled
a________.
2 TrueorFalse:Thereisnowaytosaveacustomcrosssectionlist.
FalseCustomcrosssectionscanbesavedbyselectingCustom>General,
clickingSave,andspecifyinganameforthefile.Thecustomcrosssection
lististhensavedtoan.xscfile.
DCrosssectionset
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
483
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
15Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
484
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
Createcrosssectionsshowingtheexistinganddesignsurface.Annotatethe
designsurfaceonthecrosssections.
SourceData
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Cross
SectionsandAnnotation\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\CrossSectionsand
Annotation\Task\TaskCrossSectionsandAnnotation.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
ProposedSurface: MeadowParkFinished.dtm
TemplateLibrary: MeadowParkCityStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: MeadowPark.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
485
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createcrosssectionsshowingtheexistinganddesignsurface.
Verifytheexistinggroundsurfacecrosssectionsymbologyissetto
E_SURF_OriginalGround.
Setthefinisheddesignsurfacecrosssectionsymbologyto
P_SURF_DesignSurface.
Createcrosssectionsata50foot[10M]intervalstartingatstation
26+50[1+885]alongthehorizontalalignmentnamedMeadowPark
Drive.
NamethecrosssectionsetMeadowParkOption2.Placethesecross
sectionsabovetheexistinggroundcrosssections.
Annotatethefinisheddesignsurfaceofthecrosssectionsetcalled
MeadowParkOption2.
Questions
Whatistheelevationoftheleftgutterflowlineatstation32+00
[1+900]?
Howmanyclosedcomponentsaredisplayedoneachcrosssection?
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
CrossSectionsandAnnotation
486
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
Inthischapter,wewilllearnhowtocomputeendareavolumesfromcross
sections.Wewillalsolearnhowtocomputetrianglevolumesbetweentwo
surfaces.Wewillgeneratereportsofthevolumecomputations.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
487
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
IntroductiontoVolumes
488
Generateendareavolumes.
Createvolumereports.
Learnabouttrianglevolume.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Volumes\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileVolumes.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Volumes\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeIntrotoVolumes.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\Hemfield
Existing.dtm
ProposedSurface: HemfieldFinished.dtm
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
TemplateLibrary: HemfieldCountyStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: Hemfield.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
489
EndAreaVolume
EndAreaVolume
EndAreaVolume
Althoughendareavolumescanbeinaccurate,theyhavetraditionallybeenthe
preferredmethodofvolumecalculation.Whyinaccurate?Thevolumecalculation
isbasedontwothinslicesoftheproject;theareasofcutandfillatthesetwo
locationsareassumedtoberepresentativeofeverylocationbetweenthetwo
locations.Theaccuracyofthevolumeisonlyasgoodasthelocationsselected.So,
ifcrosssectionsarecreatedevery50feetalonganalignment,itisassumedthat
nosignificantchangesinterrainoccurredbetweenthetwocrosssections.
Beforecomputeraidedassistance,endareavolumeswereapracticaland
reasonablyaccuratemanualmethodofestimatingvolumes.Theothervolume
calculationmethods,suchasdifferentialelevations,requiredexcessivemanual
calculations.Usingcrosssections,thecontractor,engineerandownercouldeach
manuallyestimatethevolumeswithinanacceptableamountoferror.
So,howdoesthecalculationwork?Findtheareaofcutontwoadjacentcross
sections,forexample,station12+00and12+50.Traditionally,theareawas
measuredonacrosssectiondrawingusingaplanimeterorbycountingsquares
IntroductiontoVolumes
490
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
EndAreaVolume
onagrid.Addthetwoareastogetheranddividebytwotogettheaverageofthe
two.Multiplythataverageareabythedistancebetweenthetwocrosssectionsto
determinethecutvolume.Repeatthisprocessforthefillvolume.Thecloserthe
crosssectionsaretoeachother,themoreaccuratethevolumewillbe.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
491
EndAreaVolumePrerequisites
EndAreaVolumePrerequisites
EndAreaVolumePrerequisites
CrosssectionsareneededintheworkingCADfile.Thecrosssectionsmusthaveat
leasttwosurfacesdisplayed.Forcomponentvolumes,thetemplatecomponents
mustbedisplayedonthecrosssections.
Sincethebasicendareacalculationassumesastraightline,anoptionisavailable
tocorrectforalignmentcurvature.Ifyouusethisoption,thehorizontalalignment
onwhichthecrosssectionsarebasedmustbeloadedinInRoads.
IntroductiontoVolumes
492
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SurfaceType
SurfaceType
SurfaceType
Whenthesurfacelineisdisplayedonthecrosssection,thereissomeadditional
informationassociatedwiththatline.Oneoftheitemsassociatedwiththe
surfacelineistheSurfaceType.TheSurfaceTypeisusedbyInRoadswhen
computingvolumes.TherearefourpossibleSurfaceTypes.
Existingusedforexistinggroundsurfaces
Designusedfordesignsurfaces
Substratumusedforsurfacesbelowthetopofground,suchasan
undergroundrocklayer
IgnoreinstructsInRoadsnottousethesurfaceforendareacalculations
Subgradeusedtocomputeendareavolumesthathaveasubgradesurface.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
493
EndAreaVolumeDialog
EndAreaVolumeDialog
EndAreaVolumeDialog
TheEndAreaVolumescommandispartoftheCrossSectionsdialog.
MultiplecrosssectionsetscanbedisplayedinasingleCADfile.TheEndArea
Volumestoolusesthecrosssectionsetnametospecifywhichcrosssectionsto
calculatevolumesfor.TheCrossSectionSetselectionboxandgraphicaltarget
buttonareusedtospecifytheappropriatecrosssectionset.Whenacrosssection
setisselected,aboxisdisplayedaroundthesettoidentifyitforprocessing.
ThesurfaceslistedintheEndAreaVolumesdialogboxaretheonesonthecross
sections.Thesurfaces(.dtm)donotneedtobeopenedtocomputeendarea
volumesusingthatsurface.Theactualgraphicsarereadtocomputetheendarea
volume.
AnotheroptionontheGeneralleafisanXMLreportthatcanbegeneratedwhen
thevolumesarecalculated.
IntroductiontoVolumes
494
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCalculateEndAreaVolume
ExerciseCalculateEndAreaVolume
CalculateEndAreaVolume
1 SelectEvaluation>CrossSection>CrossSections.
2 SelecttheEndAreaVolume>Generalleaf.
3 ChangetheCrossSectionSettoHemfieldRoadOption2.
4 SelectboththeHemfieldExistingandHemfieldFinishedsurfaces.
Notethetypeforeachsurface.
5 SelecttheCreateXMLReportcheckbox.
6 ClickApply.
Thevolumereportappears.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
495
ExerciseCalculateEndAreaVolume
IfthemessageYouneedtosettheStyleSheet...appears,clickOKand
proceedwithstep7.Otherwiseskiptostep8.Thismessageindicatesthat
theselectedvolumereporttyperequiresadefaultstylesheet.
7 Ontheleftsideofthebrowser,opentheEvaluationfolder.
8 SelectBasicVolume.xsl.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
The.xslfileisareporttemplatefilethatcanbeedited.
9 Reviewthereport.
10 ClosetheReportBrowser.
11 ClosetheCrossSectionsdialog.
IfyouwantBasicVolume.xsltobethedefaultformatforallendareavolume
reports,rightclickonBasicVolume.xslandselectSetasDefaultEndArea
Volume.
IntroductiontoVolumes
496
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VolumeReports
VolumeReports
VolumeReports
TheInRoadsXMLreportingallowsquickviewingofvariousreportformats.Each
ofthe.xslfileslistedintheEvaluationfolderaredifferentvolumereportformats.
1 TryothervolumereportformatsintheEvaluationfolderandnoticehow
thedifferentformatscanbedisplayed.
2 ClosetheReportBrowserandtheCrossSectiontool.
3 Windowintooneofthecrosssections.
Noticethevolumecalculationinformationthatappearsatthebottomof
thecrosssections.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
497
TriangleVolumes
TriangleVolumes
TriangleVolumes
Asnotedbefore,endareavolumeisonlyasgoodasthefrequencyandaccuracy
ofthecrosssections.
Trianglevolumescomparethetrianglesinbothsurfacestocomputethetrue
differencebetweenthesurfaces.Unlikeendareavolumes,trianglevolumesare
notanestimateofthedifferencebetweensurfaces.However,rememberthat
eventrianglevolumescanonlybeasgoodasthesurfacestheyaremeasuring;
surfacesapproximatetheterrain.
TheTriangleVolumetoolcomputesvolumesdirectlyfromsurfaces.Crosssections
arenotrequired.Similartotheendareavolumecalculations,theresultsofthe
TriangleVolumetoolsarereportedusingXML.
UnliketheEndAreaVolumetool,theTriangleVolumetooldoesnotrecognize
componentsthatareinthesurfaces.
IntroductiontoVolumes
498
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCalculateTriangleVolume
ExerciseCalculateTriangleVolume
ComputeTriangleVolume
1 SelectEvaluation>Volumes>TriangleVolume.
2 SetOriginalSurfacetoHemfieldExisting.
3 SetDesignSurfacetoHemfieldFinished.
4 ClickAdd,thenApply.
IfthemessageYouneedtosettheStyleSheet...appears,clickOKand
proceedwithsteps5and6.Otherwiseskiptostep7.Thismessage
indicatesthattheselectedvolumereporttyperequiresadefaultstyle
sheet.
5 Ontheleftsideofthebrowser,opentheEvaluationfolder.
6 SelectTriangleVolumes.xsl.
7 Reviewthereport.
8 ClosetheReportBrowserandtheTriangleVolumedialog.
IfyouwantTriangleVolumes.xsltobethedefaultformatforalltriangle
volumereports,rightclickonTriangleVolumes.xslandselectSetasDefault
TriangleVolume.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
499
TriangleVolumebyStation
TriangleVolumebyStation
TheTriangleVolumebyStationtoolcomputesahybridvolume.Truevolumesare
calculatedbetweentwosurfacesbutonlywithinaspecifiedwidthfromthe
centerlineandbetweenastationinterval.Thevolumeresultsarereportedona
stationbystationbasis,muchlikeendareavolumes.
TheTriangleVolumebyStationtoolcomputesvolumesdirectlyfromsurfaces.
Crosssectionsarenotrequired.Similartotheendareavolumecalculations,the
resultsoftheTriangleVolumebyStationtoolsarereportedusingXML.
UnliketheEndAreaVolumetool,theTriangleVolumebyStationtooldoesnot
recognizecomponentsthatareinthesurfaces.
IntroductiontoVolumes
500
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseTriangleVolumebyStation
ExerciseTriangleVolumebyStation
ComputingTriangleVolumesbyStation
1 SelectEvaluation>Volumes>TriangleVolumebyStation.
2 SetOriginalSurfacetoHemfieldExisting.
3 SetDesignSurfacetoHemfieldFinished.
4 ClickApply.
IfthemessageYouneedtosettheStyleSheet...appears,clickOKand
proceedwithsteps5and6.Otherwiseskiptostep7.Thismessage
indicatesthattheselectedvolumereporttyperequiresadefaultstyle
sheet.
5 Ontheleftsideofthebrowser,opentheEvaluationfolder.
6 SelectBasicVolume.xsl.
7 Reviewthereport.
8 ClosetheReportBrowserandtheTriangleVolumebyStationdialog.
9 ExittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
501
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
IntroductiontoVolumes
502
Generateendareavolumes
Createvolumesreports
Generatetrianglevolumes
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
1 Whichvolumecalculationmethod(s)comparetwosurfacestocompute
volumes?
AEndAreaVolumes
BTriangleVolumes
CTriangleVolumesbyStation
2 Whichvolumecalculationmethod(s)usethegraphicsinthecrosssection
tocomputevolumes?
AEndAreaVolumes
BTriangleVolumes
CTriangleVolumesbyStation
3 Whichvolumecalculationmethod(s)cancomputevolumesfrom
components?
AEndAreaVolumes
BTriangleVolumes
CTriangleVolumesbyStation
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
503
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 Whichvolumecalculationmethod(s)comparetwosurfacestocompute
volumes?
BTriangleVolumes
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
CTriangleVolumesbyStation
BoththeTriangleVolumesandTriangleVolumesbyStationmethods
calculatevolumesbycomparingthedifferencebetweentwosurfaces.
2 Whichvolumecalculationmethod(s)usethegraphicsinthecrosssection
tocomputevolumes?
AEndAreaVolumes
TheEndAreaVolumemethodcomputesvolumesbyreadingthegraphics
andcalculatinganareaofcutandfilloneachcrosssection.Theendareas
areaveragedoverthedistancebetweenthecrosssectionstocalculatethe
volume.
3 Whichvolumecalculationmethod(s)cancomputevolumesfrom
components?
AEndAreaVolumes
OnlytheEndAreaVolumesmethodcancalculatevolumesfrom
components.
IntroductiontoVolumes
504
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
15Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
505
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
Createandcompareanendareavolumeandtrianglevolumereport.
SourceData
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Volumes\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Volumes\Task\TaskIntrotoVolumes.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
ProposedSurface: MeadowParkFinished.dtm
TemplateLibrary: MeadowParkCityStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: MeadowPark.ird
IntroductiontoVolumes
506
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Requirements
Exercise:Createendareavolumesandatrianglevolumereport.
Calculatetrianglevolumesbetweentheexistinggroundandfinished
designsurfaces.
Savetheendareavolumeandtrianglevolumereportstothefolder
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\IntrotoVolumes\Task\.
Questions
Whatisthetotalcutandfillbasedontheendareavolumecomputation?
EndAreaCutVolume_______________
EndAreaFillVolume_______________
Whatisthetotalcutandfillbasedonthetrianglevolumecomputation?
TriangleCutVolume_______________
TriangleFillVolume_______________
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoVolumes
507
ReviewTask
IntroductiontoVolumes
508
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
Inthischapter,youwilllearnabouttheInRoadsreportingsystem.Youwill
generateandsavethereports.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
509
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
IntroductiontoReports
510
Learnaboutstylesheets.
Createfixedformatreports.
GenerateanXMLReport.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Objectives
StartInRoadsorPowerInRoads
1 DoubleclicktheInRoadsorPowerInRoadsicon
orlaunchInRoads/PowerInRoadsfromtheStart>AllPrograms>Bentley
menuchoices.
TheFileOpendialogopens.
OpenaCADFile
1 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Reports\Practice\.
2 SelectthefileReports.dgn,thenclickOpen.
3 OpentheCADfilekeyinwindow(Utilities>Keyin).
OpentheProjectFile
1 SelectFile>OpenfromtheInRoadsmenu.
TheOpendialogopens.
2 SetthedirectorytoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Reports\Practice\.
3 SelectthefilePracticeIntrotoReports.rwk,thenclickOpen.
4 ClickCanceltoclosethedialog.
5 Verifythatthefollowingfileswereopened:
PreferenceFile:
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
Fundamentals\_Standards\BentleyTraining.xin
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingSurface: Fundamentals\_CommonReferences\Hemfield
Existing.dtm
ProposedSurface: HemfieldFinished.dtm
GeometryProject: Hemfield.alg
TemplateLibrary: HemfieldCountyStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: Hemfield.ird
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
511
WhatisXMLandXSL?
WhatisXMLandXSL?
XMLandXSL
XMLisastructuredASCIIformat.ItissimilartoHTML,withwhichmostwebpages
arecreated.Likeawebpagewheredataispresentedbyusingatemplate,XML
usesanXSLfiletoformatthedata.BothXMLandXSLfilesareASCIIfiles.
IntroductiontoReports
512
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
InRoadsXMLReportProcess
InRoadsXMLReportProcess
InRoadsXMLReportProcess
XMLreportsareabyproductofBentleyCivilssupportoftheAmericanSocietyof
CivilEngineers(ASCE)initiativeforaneutralfileformattoexchangealignment
andsurfacedata.ThisformatisknownasLandXML.
WhydidASCEandotherspickXMLasthestandardtoexchangedata?XMLfiles
areASCIIfilesandcanbereadonanycomputer.ThetagsthatXMLusesto
structurethedatacanbedefinedasastandardsuchasLandXML.SinceXMLis
similartoHTML,therearemanyresources(books,training,experts,etc.)
availabletocustomizeandformatthedata.AnXSLfileisatemplatethatformats
theXMLdataintosomethingthatcanbeprintedorreused.
InRoadsreportsaretheresultofXMLdataformattedbyanXSLfile.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
513
QuickReports
QuickReports
QuickReports
ThereareseveralfixedformatquickreportsavailableinInRoads.Thesereports
arefrequentlyusedduringthedesignprocesswhenaquickcheckofthedatais
neededandtheexactformatofthereportisnotimportant.Anexampleofone
quickreportisGeometry>ReviewHorizontal.
ThereportcanbesavedasanASCIIfile,printeddirectlytoaprinter,appendedto
anotherASCIIfile,ordisplayedintheCADdrawing.
IntroductiontoReports
514
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseReviewingHorizontalGeometry
ExerciseReviewingHorizontalGeometry
ReviewingHorizontalGeometry
1 SelectGeometry>ReviewHorizontal.
Theactivehorizontalalignmentreportisdisplayed.
2 Afterreviewingthereport,closethedialog.
Manyofthequickreportsarealsoavailablebyrightclickingonanitemin
theInRoadsExplorerwindow.
3 SelecttheGeometrytabatthebottomoftheInRoadsExplorerwindow.
4 ClicktheplussignnexttoHemfieldtoexpandtheGeometryProjectlist.
5 RightclickthehorizontalalignmentnamedHemfieldRoadandselect
Review.
Thequickhorizontalalignmentreportforthisalignmentappears.
6 Closethereport.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
515
ExerciseReviewingHorizontalGeometry
VerticalAlignmentReports
1 ExpandtheHemfieldRoadhorizontalalignmenttoviewitsvertical
alignments.
2 RightclicktheHemfieldVerticalverticalalignmentandselectReview.
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Thequickverticalalignmentreportforthisalignmentappears.
3 Closethereport.
IntroductiontoReports
516
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseReviewaSurface
ExerciseReviewaSurface
ReviewaSurface
1 SelectSurface>SurfaceProperties.
2 ClickReportontheMaintab.
3 CloseboththereportandtheSurfacePropertiesdialogs.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
517
XMLReports
XMLReports
XMLReports
XMLReportsarefoundunderTools>XMLReports.
ThereareseveraldifferenttypesofXMLReportsthatcanbegenerated.The
dialogboxthatisdisplayeddependsonthetoolthatwasselected.
IntroductiontoReports
518
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
OtherXMLReports
OtherXMLReports
OtherXMLReports
Asreviewedinthelessononvolumes,thereareotherplaceswhereXMLreport
filesarecreated.
Volumes
RoadwayDesigner
CrossSectionReports
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
519
ExerciseCreateGeometryReport
ExerciseCreateGeometryReport
WhencreatingXMLreports,firsttheXMLdatafileiscreated,thenthe
reportisformatted.
CreatingaGeometryReport
1 SelectTools>XMLReports>Geometry.
2 ClickintheHorizontalAlignmentIncludefield.
3 ClicktheFilterbutton.
Theavailablehorizontalalignmentsaredisplayedontheleftsideofthe
dialogbox.
4 HighlighttheHemfieldRoadalignment.
5 ClickAdd>toselectthisalignment.
6 ClickOK.
HemfieldRoadshouldnowbelistedintheIncludefield.
Youcanalsotypethenameofanalignmentoruseawildcardtospecify
thealignmentname.
IntroductiontoReports
520
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseCreateGeometryReport
7 SelectIncludeVerticalAlignmentsAll.
8 ClickApply.
TheReportBrowserappears.
9 OntheleftsideoftheBentleyReportBrowser,selecttheGeometryfolder.
Areportopensshowingallverticalalignmentsassociatedwiththe
HemfieldRoadhorizontalalignment.
The.xmldatafileisplacedinthetempdirectoryandthedataisformatted
throughtheVerticalAlignmentReview.xslstylesheet.
10 SelectVerticalAlignmentReview.xsl.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
521
ExerciseTryAnotherFormat
ExerciseTryAnotherFormat
ThedefaultXSLfileusedforthereportisnottheonlyformatthatcanbe
used.
TryAnotherFormat
1 OntheleftsideoftheBentleyReportBrowser,intheGeometryfolder,
selectHorizontalElementsXYZ.xsl.
Noticethatthereportformatchanged.
2 Tryafewoftheotherformats.
IntroductiontoReports
522
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SavingaReportforPrinting
SavingaReportforPrinting
SavingaReportforPrinting
1 SelecttheXSLtemplateHorizontalAndVerticalAlignmentReview.xsl.
2 SelectFile>SaveAsfromtheBentleyReportBrowser.
3 NavigatetoC:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Reports\Practice\andenterHorizontalVertical.htmlforFilename.
4 ClickSave.
SavingaReporttoMicrosoftExcel
1 RightclickthereportintheBentleyReportBrowserwindow.
2 SelectExporttoMicrosoftExcelfromthepopupmenu.
MicrosoftExcelopensandthereportdataisaddedtoablankfile.
3 Afterreviewingthereport,closeMicrosoftExcelwithoutsavingthe
report.
ThereportformatisnotretainedwhensavingtoExcelbythismethod.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
523
SavingaReportforPrinting
MicrosoftExcelcanreadtheHTMLformatreportsavedintheprevious
steps.WhenthisreportformatisopeninExcel,mostoftheformattingis
retained.
MicrosoftExcelmustbeinstalledtohavethisfunctionality.
IntroductiontoReports
524
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SavingtheXML
SavingtheXML
SavingtheXML
WhentheXMLfileisgeneratedforthereports,thefileisplacedinatemporary
directory.Tosavethexmlfileforlaterformatting,thefileshouldbesavedout.To
reviewandsavetheformat,userawxml.xsl.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
525
ExerciseChangingtheFormatOptions
ExerciseChangingtheFormatOptions
ChangetheFormatOptions
1 SelecttheHorizontalAlignmentReview.xslformatintheBentleyReport
Browser.
TheHorizontalAlignmentReviewreporttemplateislocatedinthe
Geometryfolder.
2 SelectTools>FormatOptionsontheReportBrowser.
3 ChangetheNorthing/EastingPrecisiontoadifferentnumberofdecimal
places.
Noticethatassoonasthechangeismade,thereportisupdated.
4 Changeafewotheroptionsandreviewthereport.
5 CloseFormatOptionsdialog.
6 ClosetheBentleyReportBrowser.
7 ClosetheGeometryReportdialog.
IntroductiontoReports
526
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ExerciseStationBaseReport
ExerciseStationBaseReport
CreateaStationBaseReport
1 SelectTools>XMLReports>StationBase.
2 SelecttheGeneralleaf.
3 EnsurethattheHorizontalAlignmentoptionisselected.
4 EnsurethattheHorizontalAlignmentissettoHemfieldRoad.
5 SelecttheIncludeleaf.
6 SelecttheIntervaloption.
7 Enter50[10]fortheInterval.
8 SelecttheFeaturesleaf.
9 EnsurethattheSurfaceissettoHemfieldFinished.
10 SelecttheFeaturenamedExteriorBoundary.
11 ClickApply.
12 SelecttheStationBaseCoordinates.xslreportfromtheStationOffset
folder.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
527
ExerciseStationBaseReport
Noticethatthereportliststhestationalongthealignment,theoffsetto
thefeature,andthecoordinatesofthefeature.
13 ClosetheReportBrowserandtheStationOffsetReporttool.
14 ExittheCADsoftware.
IntroductiontoReports
528
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
VolumeandTemplateReports
VolumeandTemplateReports
VolumeandTemplateReports
Inthelessononvolumes,areportwascreatedatthetimethevolumewas
calculated.
ForRoadwayDesigner,thereportislocatedontheTools>ResultsReportmenu.
Similartocreatingasurface,themodeliscalculatedagainsothatallpointsare
locatedintheproperlocation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
529
SummaryandReview
SummaryandReview
Summary
Youarenowableto:
IntroductiontoReports
530
Understandstylesheets.
Createfixedformatreports
GenerateXMLformattedreports
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
SummaryandReview
Questions:
Beforecontinuing,letsreinforcewhatyouhavelearned.
True
False
2 TrueorFalse:AllInRoadsreportsareXMLreports.
True
False
3 ListthreetypesofXMLreports.
1__________
2__________
3__________
1 TrueorFalse:XMLStyleSheets(.xsl)definetheformatofeachreport.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
531
SummaryandReview
Answers:
1 TrueorFalse:StyleSheets(.xsl)definetheformatofeachreport.
TrueStyleSheets(.xsl)controlanddefinehowareportappears.Style
sheetscanbecustomizedtocreatenewreportformats.
2 TrueorFalse:AllInRoadsreportsareXMLreports.
FalseInadditiontoInRoadsrobustXMLreportcapability,thereare
severalquickformatreportsavailablethroughoutthesoftware.Examples
includetheReviewHorizontal,ReviewVertical,andReviewGeometry
PointsquickreportsfoundontheGeometrymenu.
3 ListthreetypesofXMLreports.
1Geometry
2StationBase
3StationOffset
4Clearance
5Stakeout
6LegalDescription
7Surfaces
IntroductiontoReports
532
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
ReviewTask
TimeAllocated
15Minutes
WhatIsaReviewTask
ReviewTasksarechallengingexercisesdesignedtoreinforcetheconcepts
taughtinthisandpreviousexercisesandtoprovideyouwithanevaluationof
yourabilitytounderstandtheconcepts.Thetasksdonotprovidestepbystep
instructions.Instead,theyrequireyoutodrawonyournewknowledgeto
solveproblems.
Notallstudentswillfinishthetasksinthetimeallowed.Ifyouarenotableto
completeataskyoushouldreviewthepreviouspracticeexercisestoreinforce
theconceptsandthenattemptthetaskagain.Astimepermitsyoumaybe
abletodothisduringclass,oryoucancontinueyourstudiesafterthe
conclusionoftheclass.
Completionofthistaskisnotrequiredtomoveontothenextmoduleinthe
training.Theexercisesinthenextchapterarenotdependentoncompleting
thistask.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
533
ReviewTask
TaskObjective
Creategeometryandclearancereports.
SourceData
Class Date: 02-Apr-2013
Exercise:Loadthesourcedataforthistask.
1 Closeanyopendatafiles.
2 OpentheCADfile:C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\Introto
Reports\Task\MeadowParkWorking.dgnfile.
3 LoadtheProjectfile.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\IntrotoReports\Task\Task
IntrotoReports.rwk.
TheProjectfileopensthefileslistedbelow.
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
PreferenceFile: Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley
Training.xin
GeometryProject: MeadowPark.alg
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoads
ExistingGround: Fundamentals\_Common
References\MeadowParkExisting.dtm
ProposedSurface: MeadowParkFinished.dtm
TemplateLibrary: MeadowParkCityStandards.itl
RoadwayDesign: MeadowPark.ird
IntroductiontoReports
534
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ReviewTask
Requirements
Createageometryreportshowingthecoordinatesandcurvedatafor
allofthehorizontalandverticalalignmentsinthisproject.
Createareportthatliststhenames,descriptions,andstylesofall
horizontalandverticalalignmentsinthegeometryproject.
Createaclearancestakeoutreportfromthecenterlinealignment
namedMeadowParkDrivetothetoeofslope.Thetoeofslopeisthe
ExteriorBoundaryfeatureinthefinisheddesignsurface.Theclearance
reportshouldstartatStation26+60[1+885]andruntotheendofthe
alignment.
Savethereportstothefolder
C:\BentleyTraining\InRoadsFundamentals\IntrotoReports\Task\.
Cleanup
SelectFile>Close>CloseAlltocloseallopenInRoadsfilestoprepareforthe
nextlesson.Whenpromptedtoconfirmclosingthefiles,clickYes.
WhenfinishedexittheCADsoftware.
Exercise:Creategeometryandclearancereports.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
IntroductiontoReports
535
ReviewTask
IntroductiontoReports
536
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTools
Inthischapter,youwilllearnabouttheInRoadsLocksfunctionandthebenefitsof
usingthetrackingtools.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTools
537
Objectives
Objectives
Inthislessonwewill...
ProductivityTools
538
LearnaboutthePen/PencilLock.
LearnabouttheStyleLock.
LearnaboutTracking.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
InRoadsLocks
InRoadsLocks
InRoadslockscontrolhowInRoadstoolsworkwhenviewing,selectingor
evaluatingdata.BecauselocksaffectnearlyeverytoolinInRoads,itisimportant
tounderstandhowlockswork.Belowisabriefintroductiontothelocks.
InRoadshastwobasictypesoflocks.Therearelocksthathaveanenabled/
disabledstate.Therearealsolocksthatswitchbetweentwoorthreedifferent
modes,butarealwaysactive.
LocksareaccessedbyselectingTools>LocksfromtheInRoadsmenu.However,
sincethestatusormodeofthelocksisfrequentlyadjustedwhilerunning
InRoads,thebestpracticeistodisplaythelockstoolbarforeasyaccess.Thelocks
ToolbarisdisplayedwhenyouselectTools>Locks>Toolbar.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTools
539
StyleLock
StyleLock
TheStyleLockisusedwithsurfaces.Surfacescanhavepreferencesassociated
withthem.WhenaviewsurfacetoolisusedwiththeStylelockenabled,the
dialogboxforthecommandwillnotbedisplayed.Instead,yoursurfacedatawill
bedisplayedinthegraphicsfilewithoutanyfurtherinputfromyou.TheStylelock
bypassesthedialogboxanddisplaystheactivesurface,automatically
determiningwhatsymbologytousefromthesurfacepreference.
ProductivityTools
540
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Pen/PencilLock
Pen/PencilLock
ThePencil/Penlockcontrolswhathappenswhengraphicsareredisplayedfrom
InRoads.Forexample,whensurfacegraphicsareredisplayed,thesettingofthis
lockdeterminesifthepreviouslydisplayedgraphicsaredeletedpriortocreating
thenewgraphics.
ThePencil/Penlockonlyappliestoplandisplay;itdoesnotapplytocrosssections
orprofiles.Therearetwomodesforthislock:PenmodeorPencilmode.
PengraphicscreatedintheCADfilearepermanentandwillnotbedeleted
thenexttimeInRoadsisusedtodrawthesamegraphic.Thisisanalogousto
drawingininkonpaper,wheretheinkisnottypicallydeletedwhennew
graphicsareadded.
PencilgraphicscreatedintheCADfilearepermanentbutwillautomatically
bedeletedthenexttimeInRoadsisusedtodrawthesamegraphics.Thisis
analogoustodrawingwithapencilonpaper,wherethepenciliseasily
removedwhennewgraphicsareadded.
InRoadsusersmostoftenusethePencilmode.Penmodeistypicallylimitedto
specialsituations.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTools
541
SnapLock
SnapLock
TheSnapLockcontrolshowInRoadssnapstogeometrypointsorelementsinthe
activegeometryprojectwhenatargetbuttonisusedtospecifyapositioninthe
graphicsfile.Targetbuttonsarefoundthroughouttheinterface.Eachbuttonis
indicatedbythecrosshairicon.
Therearethreemodesforthislock:NoSnap,PointSnap,orElementSnap.
NoSnapInRoadsdoesnottrytolocatethenearestgeometrypointor
element.Thegraphicallyselectedcoordinateorelementisselected.
PointSnapThisenablesuserstosnaptoapointintheactivegeometry.Use
thislocktoaidintheplacementprocessofgeometryelements.Forexample,
whenyouselectatargetbuttoninadialogboxandthenclickintheCADfile,
InRoadswilllocatetheclosestgeometrypoint,notthegraphiclocation.The
geometrypointdoesnotneedtobedisplayedgraphicallytobelocated.
ElementSnapThisenablesuserstosnaptogeometryelement(line,arc,
spiral)inthegeometryproject.Usethislocktoaidinusingthedirection,
distance,length,radius,and/orangleofanexistinggeometryelementto
designanewelement.InRoadssnapstotheelementnearestthedatapoint
placedintheCADfile.
ProductivityTools
542
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
StationLock
StationLock
TheStationLockcontrolshowInRoadsdeterminesstationintervalswhena
horizontalalignmentbeginsatanoddnumberedstation.Thislockappliesto
InRoadstoolssuchasgeneratingcrosssections,runningtheRoadwayModeler,or
generatingstationbasedreports.
Therearetwomodesforthislock:enabledordisabled.
EnabledIfthefirststationisoddnumbered,thesoftwareforcesall
subsequentstationstoevennumbers.Forexample,ifthefirststationis2+38
andthestationintervalisdefinedas50,thesoftwareperformsthecommand
actionatstations2+38,2+50,3+00,3+50...
DisabledInRoadsdoesnotforcestationstoevennumberedstationsifthe
firststationisanoddnumberedstation.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTools
543
ReportLock
ReportLock
TheReportLockcontrolswhetherornotthecommanddisplaysoutputinadialog
boxascommandcalculationsareperformed.
Therearetwomodesforthislock:enabledordisabled.
ProductivityTools
544
EnabledThecommandprocesses,storesresults,anddisplaysthe
resultsinanoutputdialogbox.
DisabledThecommandprocessesandstoresresultswithout
displayingtheminanoutputdialogbox.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
Tracking
Tracking
Thiscommanddynamicallydisplaysthenorthingandeastingcoordinatesofthe
cursorlocation,aswellasthesurfaceelevation,slope,andaspectbasedonthe
activesurface.Thedialogboxalsodynamicallyreportsthecursorlocationin
termsofstationandoffsetfromtheactivehorizontalalignment.
Youcanannotateallorpartofthisinformationtothedrawingfilebyplacinga
datapoint.Optionsthataretoggledonareannotated.Forexample,toannotate
onlythestationandoffsetvalues,toggleontheStationandOffsetoptions.
Ifyouinterruptthiscommandtouseanothercommand,youcanreactivateitby
clickingtheActivatebutton.AfteryouclickActivate,adatapointwillagainplace
annotationinthedrawingfile.
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated
ProductivityTools
545
Tracking
ProductivityTools
546
Dec2011
Copyright2011BentleySystems,Incorporated